SIMATIC Distributed I/O Device ET 200iSP

Preface, Contents
SIMATIC
1
Product Overview
Distributed I/O Device Getting Started with 2
Commissioning
ET 200iSP
3
Configuration Options
Manual 4
Installation
5
Wiring
6
Commissioning and Diagnostics
7
Maintenance
8
General Technical Data
9
Terminal Modules
10
Power Supply PS
11
Interface Module
12
Digital Electronic Modules
13
Analog Electronic Modules
14
Reserve Module
This documentation is available under
order number
6ES7152-1AA00-8BA0 Appendices
Glossary, Index
Edition 02/2005
A5E00247483-04
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to
prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by
a safety alert symbol, notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol. The notices
shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
! indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
! indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
! with a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Attention
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding notice is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of
danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a
warning relating to property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning
and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the
safety notices in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to
commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety
practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
! This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which
have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as
well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by  are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG.
The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own
purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Copyright Siemens AG 2004 All rights reserved Disclaim of Liability
The distribution and duplication of this document or the We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure
utilization and transmission of its contents are not permitted consistency with the hardware and software described. Since
without express written permission. Offenders will be liable for variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or consistency. However, the information in this publication is
registration of a utility model or design, are reserved reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included
in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives Siemens AG 2005
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00247483-02
Preface
Purpose of this manual

The information in this manual enables you to operate the
ET 200iSP distributed I/O device as a DP slave via an RS 485 IS coupler on the
PROFIBUS-DP RS 485 IS.
Basic knowledge required

To understand the manual, you require general experience in the field of
automation engineering.
In particular when operating a PLC in safety-relevant areas, observe the
information on the safety of electronic control systems in the S7-300, CPU 31xC,
and CPU 31x operating instructions: Installation.
The following qualifications are also required:
Table 1-1 Qualified Personnel
Activities Qualifications
Installation of ET 200iSP • Basic technical training
• Knowledge of safety regulations regarding the
workplace
Wiring the ET 200iSP • Basic practical training in electrical engineering
• Knowledge of the relevant safety regulations for
electrical engineering
• Knowledge of methods of installing explosion-proof
electrical equipment
• Knowledge of safety regulations regarding the
workplace
Commissioning the ET 200iSP • Knowledge of all electrical and functional
parameters and properties of ET 200iSP
• Knowledge of the functions and commissioning of
PROFIBUS-DP
• Knowledge of the connected encoders, actuators,
and HART field devices
• Knowledge of the safety regulations regarding the
workplace, and in particular of procedures in
potentially explosive areas
Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

A5E00247483-02 iii
Preface
Scope of the manual

This manual applies to the distributed I/O station ET 200iSP.
Approbation
for information on standards and certifications, refer to chapter 8-2.
CE certification
Identification for Australia (C tick mark)

Standards
Where this documentation fits in

In addition to this manual, you also need the manuals supplied with the DP master
and RS 485 IS coupler you are using (see the Order numbers in the appendix).
The Order numbers appendix provides a list of further sources of information on
SIMATIC S7 and on the ET 200 distributed I/O system.
A description of the parameter assignment and configuration frame is not included
in this manual. The description is available on the Internet URL
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/de/4000024
Guide to the manual

This manual describes the hardware of the ET 200iSP distributed I/O station. It
consists of introductory chapters and reference chapters (technical data).
• Installing and wiring the ET 200iSP distributed I/O station
• Commissioning and diagnostics of the ET 200iSP distributed I/O station
• Components of the ET 200iSP distributed I/O station
• Order numbers
Recycling and disposal

The ET 200iSP distributed I/O station can be recycled due to its low-pollutant
equipment. For environment-friendly recycling and disposal of your electronic
waste, please contact a company certified for the disposal of electronic waste.

iv A5E00247483-02
Preface
Further Support
If you have any technical questions, please get in touch with your Siemens
representative or agent responsible.
You will find your contact person at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner
You will find a guide to the technical documentation offered for the individual
SIMATIC Products and Systems here at:
http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal
The online catalog and order system is found under:
http://mall.automation.siemens.com
Training Centers
Siemens offers a number of training courses to familiarize you with the SIMATIC
S7 automation system. Please contact your regional training center or our central
training center in D 90327 Nuremberg, Germany for details:
Telephone: +49 (911) 895-3200.
Internet: http://www.sitrain.com

A5E00247483-02 v
Preface
Technical Support
You can reach the Technical Suport for all A&D products
• Via the Web formula for the Support Request
http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
• Phone: + 49 180 5050 222
• Fax:+ 49 180 5050 223
Additional information about our Technical Support can be found on the Internet
pages:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service.
Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer our Know-how online on the internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
where you will find the following:
• The newsletter, which constantly provides you with up-to-date information on
your products.
• The right documents via our Search function in Service & Support.
• A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange their
experiences.
• Your local representative for Automation & Drives.
• Information on field service, repairs, spare parts and more under “Services”.

vi A5E00247483-02
Contents
1 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 What are Distributed I/O Stations? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 What is the ET 200iSP Distributed I/O Station? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 ET 200iSP in Potentially Explosive Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.4 Integration into the Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2 Getting Started with Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 Materials and Tools Required for the Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.4 Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5 Installation of the Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.1 Installation of the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.2 Mounting the S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.5.3 Installing the RS 485-IS Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.6 Wiring the Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.7 Insert the Interface Module and the Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.8 Setting the PROFIBUS Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.9 Configuring the Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.9.1 Configuring the S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.9.2 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.10 Programming the Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.11 Putting the Example into Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.12 Analysis of Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.13 Removing and Inserting Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.14 Wire Break of the NAMUR Encoder Connected
to the Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

A5E00247483-02 vii
Contents
3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Modular System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Electronics Modules to Suit Your Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Electronic Modules Matching the Terminal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.4 Power Supply of ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.5 Configuration Options in Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.6 Limitation of the Number of Connectable Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.7 Maximum Configuration of ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.8 Direct Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.9 Time Stamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.9.1 Time Stamping at an Accuracy of 20 ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.9.2 Time Synchronization with Flexible Time Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.10 Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.10.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.10.2 Function Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.10.3 Configuring Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.10.4 Configuring Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.11 Frequency Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.11.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.11.2 Function Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.11.3 Configuring Frequency Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.11.4 Assigning Frequency Counter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.12 Identification Data I&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.13 Redundancy with IM 152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.13.1 Redundancy with S7 DP Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.13.2 Software redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.14 Redundancy of the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.15 Configuration Changes in RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.16 Operating the ET200iSP with Older CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.17 Date of Production of the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Rules for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Installing the Mounting Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3 Installing the Terminal Module for Power Supply PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.4 Installing Terminal Modules for the Interface Module
and Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.5 Installing the Bus Termination Module and the Slot Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.6 Installing the Slot Number Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

viii A5E00247483-02
Contents
5 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 General Rules and Regulations for Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 ET 200iSP Operation with Equipotential Bonding PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 Electrical Installation of the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.4 Lightning and Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4.2 The Lightning Protection Zone Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.3 Rules for the Interface Between Lightning Protection Zones
0 to 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.4 Rules for the Interfaces between Lightning Protection Zones 1...2
and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.5 Example of Protection from Overvoltage
for Networked ET 200iSP Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5 Wiring the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.5.1 Rules for Wiring the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.5.2 Wiring a Terminal Module with Screw Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.5.3 Wiring a Terminal Module with Spring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.5.4 Grounding the Mounting Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.5.5 Wiring Terminal Module TM-PS-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.5.6 Wiring Terminal Modules TM-IM/EM and TM-IM/IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.5.7 Wiring Terminal Modules TM-EM/EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.5.8 Terminating the Cable Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.5.9 Connecting a TC Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.6 Inserting and Labeling the Power Supply, Interface Module,
and Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.7 Setting the PROFIBUS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.8 Inserting and Changing the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) . . . . . . 5-34
6 Commissioning and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Configuring in STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2 Configuring with GSD File and SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3 Commissioning and Startup of ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.3.1 Requirements for Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.3.2 Commissioning the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3.3 Startup of ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.3.4 Startup of ET 200iSP with IM 152 redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.3.5 Start up for time synchronization / time stamping of signal changes . . . . 6-14
6.4 Assigning Parameters for the ET 200iSP during Operation
using SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.5 Diagnostics by Means of the Process Input Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.6 Status and Error LEDs on the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.7 Diagnostics in STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.7.2 Reading Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.7.3 Diagnostic Messages of the Electronics Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.7.4 Evaluating Interrupts of the ET 200iSP (S7 DP Slave/ DPV1 Slave) . . . . 6-25
6.7.5 Structure of the Slave Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.7.6 Station Status 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.7.7 Master PROFIBUS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

A5E00247483-02 ix
Contents
6.7.8 Manufacturer’s ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

6.7.9 ID-related Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.7.10 Module Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.7.11 Channel-Specific Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.7.12 H-Status (Only with the S7-400H and Standard Redundancy) . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.7.13 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.7.14 Diagnostics for Incorrect Module Configuration States of the ET 200iSP 6-50
7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Actions in Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Removing and Inserting Electronic Modules During Operation
(Hot Swapping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 Exchanging the Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.4 Maintenance during Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.5 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.6 IM 152 Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
8 General Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 General Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility and Shipping and Storage Conditions . . . 8-3
8.4 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.5 Information on Dielectric Tests, Class of Protection,
Degree of Protection, and Rated Voltage of the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
9 Terminal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Overview of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Terminal Modules TM-PS-A and TM-PS-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.3 Terminal modules TM-IM/EM 60S and TM-IM/EM 60C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.4 Terminal module TM-IM/IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.5 Terminal modules TM-EM/EM 60S and TM-EM/EM 60C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
10 Power Supply PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
11 Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Interface module IM 152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 Parameters for IM 152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.3 Description of the Parameters for IM 152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3.1 Operation if Preset-<> Actual configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3.2 Self-diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3.3 Redundant Power Supply diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.4 Diagnostics Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.5 Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.6 Time Stamping / Edge Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.7 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.8 Interference Frequency Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.3.9 Unit of temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.3.10 Slot Reference Junction / Reference Junction Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.4 Identification and Message Functions (I&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

x A5E00247483-02
Contents
12 Digital Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.1 Digital Electronic Module 8 DI NAMUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 Digital Electronic Module 4 DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.3 Parameters of the Digital Electronics Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.3.1 Digital Electronic Module 8 DI NAMUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.3.2 Digital electronic module 4 DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12.4 Parameters of the Digital Electronics Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12.4.1 Time Stamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12.4.2 Pulse Stretching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.4.3 Flutter Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
12.4.4 Counting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.4.5 Frequency Counting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
13 Analog Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 Analog Value Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1.1 Analog Value Representation for Measuring Ranges with SIMATIC S7 . . 13-2
13.1.2 Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules in S7 Format . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.1.3 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules in S7 Format . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.2 Basics of Analog Value Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
13.2.1 Connecting Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
13.3 Basics of HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.3.1 HART Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.3.2 Function Principle of HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.3.3 Integration of HART Field Devices with ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13.3.4 Use of HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13.3.5 IEEE Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13.3.6 HART Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
13.4 Response of the Analog Modules during Operation and if Faults Occur . 13-29
13.5 Analog Electronic Module 4 AI I 2WIRE HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
13.6 Analog Electronic Module 4 AI I 2WIRE HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
13.7 Analog Electronic Module 4 AI RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
13.8 Analog Electronic Module 4 AI TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
13.9 Analog Electronic Module 4AO I HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
13.10 Parameters of the Analog Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
13.10.1 Parameters of the Analog Electronic Modules 4 AI I 2WIRE HART,
4 AI I 4WIRE HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
13.10.2 Parameters of the Analog Electronic Modules 4 AI RTD and 4 AI TC . . . 13-50
13.10.3 Parameters of the Analog Electronic Module 4AO I HART . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-52
13.11 Description of the Parameters of the Analog Electronic Modules . . . . . . . 13-54
13.11.1 Reference Junction / Reference Junction Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54
13.11.2 Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54
13.11.3 Channel and IEEE Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-56
13.11.4 HART Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58
13.11.5 HART Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58

A5E00247483-02 xi
Contents
14 Reserve Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

A Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
B Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
C Reaction Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1 Response times at the DP master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.2 Reaction Times on the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.3 Reaction Times with Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.4 Reaction Times with Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.5 Reaction Times of Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.6 Reaction Times of Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
D Address Space of the Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.1 Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.2 Digital Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D.3 Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D.4 Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D.5 Analog Input Modules with HART
(4 AI I 2WIRE HART, 4 AI I 4WIRE HART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D.6 Analog Output Module with HART (4 AO I HART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
E Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.1 EC Prototype Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.2 EC Declarations of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

xii A5E00247483-02
Contents
Figures
1-1 Typical PROFIBUS DP network structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 View of the ET 200iSP Distributed I/O Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-3 Identifiers of ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-4 Integration into the Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2-1 Overview of the Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2 Wiring TM-PS-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-3 Wiring the RS 485-IS Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 Wiring the ET 200iSP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-5 Setting the PROFIBUS-address 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-6 Configuring the S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-7 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-8 Deactivating ET 200iSP Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3-1 Example of an ET 200iSP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 Power Supply PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 Configuration Options for the ET 200iSP in Zone 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-4 Example of Direct Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-5 Example of Time Stamping and Edge Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-6 Example configuration with 2 IM 152s for redundancy in an H-system . . 3-16
3-7 Principle of Operation of the 16-bit Up Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-8 Principle of Operation of the 16-bit Down Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-9 PIO with “2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-10 PIO with “2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-11 PII with “2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3-12 Redundancy with 2 x IM 152 in an H-system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-13 Redundancy of the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3-14 Year of production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
4-1 Enclosure for ET200iSP in Zone 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 Enclosure for ET200iSP in Zone 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-3 Enclosure for ET 200iSP in Zone 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-4 Enclosure for ET200iSP in Zone 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-5 Minimum Clearances to the Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-6 Mounting Terminal Module TM-PS-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-7 Mounting Terminal Module TM-PS-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-8 Installing Terminal Modules TM-IM/EM and TM-EM/EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-9 Removing Terminal Module TM-EM/EM, Starting from the Right Side . . . 4-12
4-10 Installing the bus termination module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-11 Installing the Slot Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-12 Installing the Slot Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-13 Installing the Slot Number Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
5-1 ET 200iSP Operation with Equipotential Bonding PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-2 Potentials in the ET 200iSP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3 Lightning Protection Zones of a Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-4 Example of the Wiring of Networked ET 200iSP Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-5 Wiring with Spring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-6 Grounding the Mounting Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-7 Connecting the Power Supply and Grounding Conductor PA
to the TM-PS-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-8 Wiring Terminal Module TM-IM/EM (PROFIBUS RS 485-IS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5-9 Wiring Terminal Module TM-IM/IM (PROFIBUS RS 485-IS) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-10 Wiring the Terminal module TM-EM/EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-11 Terminating the Cable Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5-12 TC-Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-13 Installing the Power Supply PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5-14 Installing and Labeling Interface Modules and Electronic Modules . . . . . . 5-29

A5E00247483-02 xiii
Contents
5-15 Removing Interface and Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

5-16 Changing the Type of an Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-17 Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-18 Position of the MMC Slot on the IM 152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
6-1 Function Principle of Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 Startup of ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-3 Startup of the ET 200iSP with IM 152 redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-4 Starting Up Time Synchronization / Time Stamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-5 LED Display on IM 152 Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-6 LED Displays on the Digital Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6-7 LED Displays on the Analog Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-8 Interrupts from Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6-9 Structure of Slave Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-10 Evaluation of the Slave Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6-11 Structure of the ID-Related Diagnostic Information for ET 200iSP . . . . . . 6-32
6-12 Module Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6-13 Structure of Channel-Specific D iagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6-14 Structure of the H-Status of the IM 152 (for S7-400H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6-15 Structure of the Interrupt Status of the Interrupt Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-16 Structure of bytes x+4 to x+7 for Diagnostic Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6-17 Structure Starting at Byte x+8 for Diagnostics Interrupt
from Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6-18 Structure Starting at Byte x+8 for Diagnostic Interrupt
(Input / Output Modules without HART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6-19 Structure Starting at Byte x+8 for Diagnostic Interrupt
(Input or Output Module with HART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6-20 Example of a Diagnostic Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6-21 Example of a Diagnostic Interrupt (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6-22 Structure Starting at Byte x+4 for Hardware Interrupts (Analog Input) . . . 6-47
6-23 Structure Starting at Byte x+4 for Process Alarms (Time Stamping) . . . . 6-47
6-24 Structure Starting at Byte x+4 for Remove/Insert Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6-25 Structure Starting at Byte x+4 for Update Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
7-1 Automatic Parameter Assignment after Replacing a Module . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
9-1 Block Diagram of Terminal Modules TM-P-A and TM-PS-B . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-2 Block diagram of Terminal Module TM-IM/EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9-3 Block diagram of Terminal Module TM-IM/IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9-4 Block Diagram of Terminal Module TM-EM/EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
10-1 Block Diagram of the Power Supply PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
11-1 Block Diagram Interface Module IM 152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
12-1 Block Diagram of 8 DI NAMUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12-2 Block Diagram 4 DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
12-3 Output Characteristics 4 DO DC23.1V/20mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12-4 Output Characteristics 4 DO DC17.4V/27mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12-5 Output Characteristics 4 DO DC17.4V/40mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12-6 Actuator Shutdown by Means of Intrinsically Safe Switching Signal
(Safety Barrier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12-7 Principle of Pulse Stretching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12-8 Principle of Flutter Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25

xiv A5E00247483-02
Contents
13-1 Compensation by 4 AI RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

13-2 Example of the Configuration of Reference Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
13-3 The HART Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
13-4 Location of the HART Analog Modules in the Distributed System . . . . . . 13-21
13-5 System Environment for HART Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13-6 IEEE Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13-7 IEEE754 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
13-8 Status Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
13-9 Block Diagram of 4 AI I 2WIRE HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
13-10 Block Diagram of 4 AI I 4WIRE HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
13-11 Block Diagram of 4 AI RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
13-12 Block Diagram of 4 AI TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
13-13 Block Diagram of 4AO I HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
13-14 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response . . . . . . . . . 13-55
13-15 Assigning the IEEE Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
B-1 Terminal Module TM-PS-A with Inserted Power Supply PS . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B-2 Terminal Module TM-IM/EM with Inserted Interface Module and Electronic
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B-3 Terminal Module TM-EM/EM with Inserted Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . B-2
B-4 Terminating module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
C-1 Response times between the DP master and the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C-2 Cycle Time of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-3 Cycle Time of the Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C-4 Response Time of an Analog Output Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
D-1 PII with ”8 DI NAMUR” Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D-2 PII with ”2 Counter/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D-3 PII with ”2 Counter/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D-4 PII with ”2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D-5 PIO with Digital Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D-6 PII with Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D-7 PIO with Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D-8 PIO with Analog Input Modules with HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D-9 PIO/PII with Analog Output Module with HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

A5E00247483-02 xv
Contents
Tables
1-1 ET 200iSP Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2 Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-3 Zone Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-4 Intrinsic Safety of the Types of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
2-1 Required Material and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-3 Sample program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
3-1 Electronics Modules to Suit Your Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 Modules and Terminal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-3 Rules for Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-4 Current Consumption Calculation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-5 Current consumption calculation table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-6 Assignment of Digital Inputs of 2 Count / 6 DI NAMUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-7 Assignment of Digital Inputs of 2 Count / 6 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-8 Parameters for the Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-9 Assignment of digital inputs of 2 Trace / 6 DI NAMUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-10 Parameters for the Frequency Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-11 Identification data I&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-12 Parameters for Redundancy of the Power Supply PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3-13 Reaction of the I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-14 Operating the ET200iSP with Older CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
4-1 Installation Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 Rail Mounting Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-3 Fixing Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
5-1 System Startup after Certain Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 Mains Power in the Safe Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-3 24 VDC Supply in the Safe Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-4 Protection from External Electrical Influences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-5 24 V DC Supply in the Safe Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-6 Lightning Protection Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-7 Protection of Cables with Overvoltage Protection Components . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-8 Example of a Lightning-Protected Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-9 Rules for Wiring the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-10 Available MMCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
6-1 Comparison of DPV1, S7 DP and DPV0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2 Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-3 Requirements for Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-4 Commissioning the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-5 Status and Error LEDs on the IM 152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-6 Status and Error LEDs on the Digital Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6-7 Status and Error LEDs on the Analog Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-8 Reading Diagnostics Data Using STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6-9 Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6-10 Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6-11 Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6-12 Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6-13 Structure of Station Status 1 (byte 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-16 Structure of the Vendor ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6-17 Types of error of the electronic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6-18 SKF Identifiers (STEP 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6-19 Diagnostics of Faulty Configuration of the ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

xvi A5E00247483-02
Contents
7-1 Permitted actions / tasks in the potentially explosive areas . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
9-1 Modules and Terminal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-2 Pinout on Terminal Modules TM-PS-A and TM-PS-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9-3 Pinout on the TM-IM/EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9-4 Pinout on the TM-IM/IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9-5 Pinout of Terminal Module TM-EM/EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
11-1 Parameters for Interface Module IM 152-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
12-1 Pinout for NAMUR Encoders or Encoders According to DIN 19234 . . . . 12-2
12-2 Pinout for NAMUR Changeover Contacts or Encoders According
to DIN 19234 Changeover Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12-3 Terminal Assignment of Single Contact with 10 kW Load Resistance
(Mechanical NO Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12-4 Terminal Assignment of Changeover Contact with 10 kW Load Resistance
(Mechanical Changeover Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12-5 Terminal Assignment of a Single Contact without Load Resistance
(Mechanical NO Contact with Single Contact ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12-6 Terminal Assignment of a Changeover Contact without Load Resistance
(Mechanical Changeover Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12-7 Changeover Contact Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12-8 4 DO Terminal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12-9 ”8 DI NAMUR” parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
12-10 Parameters for ”2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” and ”2 Count/ 6 Control” . . . . . . 12-21
12-11 ”2 Count/ 6 Control” Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12-12 Parameters for ”2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12-13 Parameters for 4 DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
13-1 Measured Values in the Event of Wire Break Dependent on Enabled
Diagnostics (Format S7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13-2 Analog Value Representation (SIMATIC S7 Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13-3 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-4 Measured Value Resolution of the Analog Values (SIMATIC S7 Format) 13-3
13-5 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range "80 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13-6 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . 13-5
13-7 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges 600W Absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13-8 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges Pt 100 Standard in °C and °F . 13-6
13-9 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges Pt 100 Climatic in in °C and °F 13-6
13-10 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges Ni 100 Standard in °C and °F . 13-7
13-11 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges Ni 100 Climate in °C and °F . . 13-7
13-12 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type B in °C and °F . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13-13 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type E in °C and °F . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13-14 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type J in °C and °F . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-15 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring range Type K in °C and °F . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-16 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type L in °C and °F . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13-17 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type N in °C and °F . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13-18 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type R, S in °C and °F . . . . . . . . 13-11
13-19 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type T in °C and °F . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13-20 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type U in °C and °F . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13-21 SIMATIC S7 Format: Output Ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13-22 Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
13-23 Reference Junction Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
13-24 Examples of HART Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13-25 Properties of the ET 200iSP HART Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
13-26 HART Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
13-27 Dependencies of the Input and Output Values on the Operating State
of the PLC (CPU of the DP Master) and the Supply Voltage L + . . . . . . . 13-29

A5E00247483-02 xvii
Contents
13-28 Response of the Analog Modules, Depending on the Location of the

Analog Input Value in the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
13-29 Response of the Analog Modules, Depending on the Location of the
Analog Output Value in the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
13-30 Terminal Assignment of 4 AI I 2WIRE HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
13-31 Terminal Assignment of 4 AI I 4WIRE HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
13-32 Terminal Assignment of 4 AI RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
13-33 Terminal Assignment of 4 AI TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
13-34 Parameters of the ”4 AI I 2WIRE HART” and ”4 AI I 4WIRE HART”
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-49
13-35 Parameters of the ”...W+x” Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
13-36 4 AI RTD and 4 AI TC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
13-37 Parameters of the ”4AO I HART” Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
13-38 Parameters of the ”...I +x” Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54
A-1 Interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A-2 Terminal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A-3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-4 Digital Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-5 Analog electronic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-6 Reserve module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-7 ET 200iSP Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A-8 Network Components for ET 200iSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-9 STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A-10 Reference for PROFIBUS DP with SIMATIC S7 and STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . A-8

xviii A5E00247483-02
Product Overview 1
1.1 What are Distributed I/O Stations?
Distributed I/O stations – Fields of Application

When a system is set up, the inputs and outputs from and to the process are often
located centrally in the programmable logic controller.
If there are inputs and outputs at considerable distances from the programmable
logic controller, there may be long runs of cabling which are not immediately
comprehensible, and electromagnetic interference may impair reliability.
In such systems, it is often advisable to use distributed I/O stations:
• The control CPU is located centrally.
• The I/O devices (inputs and outputs) operate locally on a distributed basis.
• the high-performance PROFIBUS DP system provides high-speed data
transmission rates for reliable communication between the control CPU and the
I/O devices.
• low installation effort by reduced wiring.
What is PROFIBUS DP?

PROFIBUS DP is an open bus system based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1
with the ”DP” transmission protocol (DP stands for distributed I/O).
PROFIBUS DP is implemented either as an electrical network based on shielded
twisted-pair cables, or as an optical network based on fiber optic cable.
The ”DP” transmission protocol allows a rapid, cyclic exchange of data between
the control CPU and the distributed I/O devices.
What is PROFIBUS RS 485-IS

In contrast to PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS DP RS 485-IS is intrinsically safe
(intrinsically safe i type of protection). The RS 485-IS coupler ensures intrinsic
safety and acts as a safety barrier. For further information on
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS, refer to the
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS User and Installation Guideline
(http://www.profibus.com).

A5E00247483-02 1-1
Product Overview
What are DP-masters and DP-slaves?

The DP master links the control CPU with the distributed I/O devices. It exchanges
data with the distributed I/O devices via PROFIBUS DP and monitors
PROFIBUS DP.
The distributed I/O devices (= DP slaves) prepare the data of the sensors and
actuators locally so that they can be transmitted to the control CPU by
PROFIBUS DP.
Which devices can be connected to the PROFIBUS-DP?

An extremely wide range of devices can be connected to the PROFIBUS DP as
DP-masters or DP-slaves, provided their behavior complies with
IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. These include devices of the following product
families:
• SIMATIC S7/M7/C7
• SIMATIC PG/PC
• SIMATIC human-machine interface, or HMI (operator panel, OP; operator
station, OS; and text display, TD)
• Distributed I/O devices
• Devices from other vendors
Structure of a PROFIBUS DP network

The figure below illustrates the typical layout of a PROFIBUS DP network.
The DP master is integrated in the relevant device. For example, the S7-400 is
equipped with a PROFIBUS DP interface. The ET 200iSP distributed I/O devices
are interconnected with the DP masters via PROFIBUS DP and
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS.
S7-400 ET 200M PG/PC
PROFIBUS DP
RS 485-IS coupler
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
ET 200iSP ET 200iSP
Potentially explosive area: Zone 1 Potentially explosive area: Zone 2
Figure 1-1 Typical PROFIBUS DP network structure

1-2 A5E00247483-02
Product Overview
1.2 What is the ET 200iSP Distributed I/O Station?
Definition
The ET 200iSP distributed I/O device is a highly modular and intrinsically safe DP
slave with degree of protection IP 30.
Fields of application
The ET 200iSP distributed I/O device can be operated in potentially explosive
environments characterized by gas and dust atmospheres:
Certification ET 200iSP Station* Inputs and outputs

CENELEC Zone 1 and Zone 21 up to Zone 0, Zone 20
Zone 2 and Zone 22 up to Zone 0, Zone 20
* with installation in a corresponding enclosure
The ET 200iSP distributed I/O device is also suitable for operation in safety areas,
of course.
You can insert almost any combination of ET 200iSP I/O modules directly next to
the interface module that transfers the data to the DP master. This allows you to
tailor the system to meet local requirements.
Each ET 200iSP consists of a power supply module, an interface module, and up
to 32 electronic modules (for example, digital electronic modules.) Note the
maximum current consumption (see the chapter 3.6.)
Terminal and Electronic Modules

An ET 200iSP distributed I/O station basically consists of various passive terminal
modules you can use to connect the power supply and electronic modules.
The ET 200iSP is connected to PROFIBUS RS 485-IS by means of a connector
on terminal module TM-IM/EM. Each ET 200iSP represents a DP slave on
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS.

A5E00247483-02 1-3
Product Overview
View
The figure below shows an example of an ET 200iSP configuration.
Interface
Bus termination
module
module
Power Supply PS IM 152 Electronic module
Terminal module
TM-PS-A Terminal
module Terminal modules
TM-IM/EM TM-EM/EM
Figure 1-2 View of the ET 200iSP Distributed I/O Station
ET 200iSP Components
The table below provides an overview of the most important components of the
ET 200iSP.
Table 1-1 ET 200iSP Components
Component Function View

Enclosure ...is an additional measure to
increase safety, in order to avoid
the development of high
temperatures, sparks and electric
arcs.
DIN rail ...rack of the ET 200iSP. Install
the ET 200iSP on this DIN rail.

1-4 A5E00247483-02
Product Overview
Table 1-1 ET 200iSP Components, continued

Terminal module ...carries the wiring and
accommodates the power supply TM-PS-A TM-PS-B
module, interface module, and
the electronic modules. Terminal
modules versions available:
• for power supply TM-PS-A
• for redundant power supply
TM-PS-B
• for interface module
TM-IM/EM
• for redundant interface
module TM-IM/IM
• for electronic modules
TM-EM/EM TM-IM/EM TM-IM/IM
TM-EM/EM
Power Supply PS ...is plugged into terminal module

TM-PS-A or TM-PS-B. The power
supply module supplies power to
the electronic circuits and
encoders.

A5E00247483-02 1-5
Product Overview
Table 1-1 ET 200iSP Components, continued

Interface module ...is plugged into the terminal
module. The interface module
interconnects the ET 200iSP with
the DP master and prepares the
data for the inserted electronic
modules.
Electronic module ...is plugged onto the terminal

module and decides the function:
• Digital electronic modules for
NAMUR sensors, digital
output
• Analog electronic modules
with current and resistance
measurement circuit,
thermoresistor and
thermocouples, analog output
• Reserve module
Bus terminating ...completes the ET 200iSP
module
RS 485-IS coupler ...couples PROFIBUS DP to

PROFIBUS RS 485-IS.
Label sheet (DIN ...for machine labeling or printing

A4, perforated, foil) 80 strips per label sheet
Slot number labels ...used to identify the slots of the

terminal module.
62
63
1
PROFIBUS- cable ...interconnects the PROFIBUS

with bus connector RS 485-IS nodes or the RS
485-IS Coupler with ET 200iSP.
PROFIBUS connector RS
485-IS, including switched
terminating resistor

1-6 A5E00247483-02
Product Overview
Features of ET 200iSP and its benefits
Table 1-2 Features and Benefits
Features Benefits
Regarding design
Modular structure based on 4- or 8-channel • Cost-effective station design
electronic modules • Reduced engineering and
documentation costs
• Space-saving with user-specific in-line
installation of the modules
Wide range of electronic modules Wide field of application
Permanent wiring by separating mechanical • Prewiring possible
and electronic components • Hot swapping of modules while the
ET 200iSP is in operation, if at least two
electronic modules are present.
Integrated Powerbus Reduced wiring effort
Regarding terminating technique
Screw terminals or spring terminals Use of most suitable terminating technique
I/Os intrinsically safe to EEx ia IIC Intrinsically safe encoders, actuators and
HART field devices up to Zone 0/20 can be
connected
Automatic coding of the I/O modules Fast and safe module replacement
Large label Adequate space for clear labeling
Shutdown of the digital outputs of a module Control of outputs independent of process
by means of intrinsically safe control signal image

A5E00247483-02 1-7
Product Overview
Table 1-2 Features and Benefits, continued
Regarding functionality
Reconfiguration and expansion in runtime No restart of the ET 200iSP necessary
Time stamp, flutter monitoring, Efficient monitoring of the inputs
pulse stretching
Counting and frequency measurements Technological fields of application
Identification data I&M Unique identification / assignment of
modules (for example, for validation, quality
assurance)
Analog value display in S7-format
IEEE tags Analog modules with HART support up to
four IEEE tags in IEEE754 format
Redundancy of IM 152 (V2.0 and higher) • on S7-DP masters (e.g. S7-400H)
• with software redundancy
Redundancy of the Power Supply PS with TM-PS-B
DP master
All ET 200iSP modules support communication with DP masters that are compliant
with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 and operate with ”DP” transmission protocol
(DP = Distributed I/O).

1-8 A5E00247483-02
Product Overview
1.3 ET 200iSP in Potentially Explosive Environments
Properties of the zones

Potentially explosive areas are divided into zones. The zones are distinguished
based on the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.
The ET 200iSP can be operated in the potentially explosive areas Zone 1/21 and
Zone 2/22, and in the safe area.
ET 200iSP supports the connection of intrinsically safe sensors, actuators and
HART field devices located in Zone 0/20 and in the safe area. The sensors,
actuators, and HART field devices must be certified for operation in the relevant
potentially explosive areas.
The table below shows the zone classes:
Table 1-3 Zone Classes
Potentially Risk of explosion Example

explosive areas
Zone 0/20 Long-term, frequent or Within containers.
permanent presence of explosive
gas or dust atmosphere
Zone 1/21 Infrequent presence of potentially In the region of openings for
explosive gas or dust filling and draining.
atmosphere
Zone 2/22 Rare or short-term presence of Areas bordering on zone 1/21
potentially explosive gas or dust
atmosphere
For further information, refer to the Principles of Intrinsically-Safe Design manual.
Types of protection of ET 200iSP

The types of protection include design and electrical measures relating to the
equipment in order to achieve Ex protection in potentially explosive areas.

A5E00247483-02 1-9
Product Overview
Table 1-4 Intrinsic Safety of the Types of Protection
Type of Meaning View

protection
Intrinsic safety i All voltage, current, inductive and
capacitive loads are limited by
electrical measures (intrinsically
safe). Sparking or thermal effects
capable of causing ignition are
thus excluded.
Pressure-proof The power supply module is

encapsulation d installed in a stable
(pressure-proof) enclosure. If the
explosive atmosphere within the
enclosure ignites, the enclosure
will withstand the explosion and
contain the explosion within the
power supply module.
Increased safety e In zone 1 of the hazardous area,

the ET 200iSP must be installed
in an additional enclosure. The
enclosure must have the
increased safety e type of
protection.
This type of protection is an
additional measure to avoid the
development of high
temperatures, sparking and
electrical arcs by increasing the
degree of safety
This type of protection is not
required in the potentially
explosive zone 2. Here, the
ET 200iSP must simply be
installed in an enclosure suitable
for zone 2 with at least degree of
protection IP 54.

1-10 A5E00247483-02
Product Overview
Identification of the ET 200iSP

Equipment for operation in potentially explosive areas is marked with an identifier
indicating the Ex environments in which the equipment can be used. Identifiers of
ET 200iSP:
Enclosure: EEx e
Basic ET 200iSP structure: EEx d e ia/ib IIC T4
IM 152 and EMs: EEx ib IIC T4

Power
Supply
EEx de [ib]
IIC T4
Inputs and outputs: EEx ia IIC T4
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
Potentially explosive
area: Zone 1 mA
Meaning:
EEx: Identifier of explosion protection

ia : Type of protection intrinsic safety (up to Zone 0)
ib : Type of protection intrinsic safety (up to Zone 1)
d : Type of protection pressure-proof encapsulation
e : Type of protection increased safety
IIC : Explosion group for hydrogen
T4 : Temperature class: Highest permitted surface temperature 135 _C
Figure 1-3 Identifiers of ET 200iSP

A5E00247483-02 1-11
Product Overview
1.4 Integration into the Control System
PCS7
PCS 7 is a high-performance process control system. PCS 7 integrates ET 200iSP
directly into the process control system.
PCS 7 components PC/ Operating and monitoring

with WinCC
PCS 7-OS
Industrial Ethernet
S7-400 Configuring and Configuring

PC/ using GSD file
parameter
PCS 7-ES assignment using Configuring with
STEP 7 SIMATIC PDM
higher-ranking
layer
PROFIBUS DP
RS 485-IS Coupler
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
ET 200iSP in enclosure
lowest layer:
Actuators,
encoders, field
devices
area: Zone 1
Zone 0 m
A
Figure 1-4 Integration into the Control System

1-12 A5E00247483-02
Getting Started with Commissioning 2
2.1 Introduction
Introduction
This manual guides you step-by-step through a practical example until you have
created a functioning application. You will become familiar with the basic hardware
and software functions of your ET 200iSP.
2.2 Requirements
The following requirements must be met:

• You must be familiar with the basics of electrical and electronic engineering and
the procedures relating to Ex areas as well as experience of working with
computers and Microsoft(R) Windows(TM) 2000/XP.
• STEP 7 (version 5.3, Service pack 1 or higher and the current HW update) or
PCS 7 (version 6.1 or higher) is installed on your PG and you have a basic
knowledge of STEP 7. You may also use older STEP 7 versions. See 6
Commissioning and Diagnostics.
• If you implement this example in a potentially explosive area, you must adhere
to all the rules and regulations explained and listed in this manual.
Note
When checking the functions, always observe the guidelines to EN 60 079-17.
This standard also contains the directives of the International Standard
IEC 60 079-17.
Danger
! When laying cables and wiring in potentially explosive areas, make sure that you
adhere to the installation regulations in EN 60 079-14 and local regulations.
When operating the ET 200iSP in combustible atmospheres developing as a result
of dust, you need to observe EN 50281-1-2 as well.

A5E00247483-02 2-1
Getting Started with Commissioning
Warning
! When used in systems, the ET 200iSP is subject to special rules and regulations
depending on the area of application.
Please note and adhere to the valid safety and accident prevention regulations, for
example IEC 204 (EMERGENCY STOP devices).
If you do not adhere to these regulations, this can result in serious injury and
damage to machines and facilities.
2.3 Materials and Tools Required for the

Sample Configuration
Table 2-1 Required Material and Tools
Number Article Order number (Siemens)

1 SIMATIC S7-300, DIN rail L=160 mm 6ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0
2 SIMATIC S7-300, DIN rail L=480 mm 6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0
1 Enclosure for ET 200iSP, type of protection EEx e (for Contact your Siemens
using ET 200iSP in the potentially explosive area Zone 1) representative
1 Terminal module TM-PS-A 6ES7 193-7DA00-0AA0
1 Terminal module TM-IM/EM with bus termination module 6ES7 193-7AA00-0AA0
2 Terminal module TM-EM/EM 6ES7 193-7CA00-0AA0
1 Interface module IM 152 6ES7 152-1AA00-0AB0
1 Power Supply PS 6ES7 138-7EA00-0AA0
2 8 DI NAMUR 6ES7 131-7RF00-0AB0
3 4 DO DC17.4/27mA 6ES7 132-7RD10-0AB0
1 RS 485-IS Coupler 6ES7 972-0AC80-0XA0
2 PROFIBUS connector (for master and RS 485-IS coupler) 6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0
1 PROFIBUS connector RS 485-IS, up to 6ES7 972-0DA60-0XA0
1.5 Mbps, incl. terminating resistor
1 PROFIBUS-DP cable e.g. 6XV1 830-0EH10
2 NAMUR sensor e.g. BERO 3RG 4612-1NA00
1 Single-pole make action pushbutton commonly available
3 LEDs with series resistor commonly available
1 Power supply module PS S7-300 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0
1 Central processing unit CPU S7-315-2 DP 6ES7 315-2AG10-0AB0
1 Programming device (PG) with PROFIBUS DP interface, various
installed STEP 7 software (Version 5.3, Service pack 1 or
higher and the current HW update), communications
processor CP 5611 and PG cable
1 Screwdrivers with 3 mm blade commonly available

2-2 A5E00247483-02
Table 2-1 Required Material and Tools, continued
Number Article Order number (Siemens)

1 Screwdrivers with 4.5 mm blade commonly available
1 Cutting tool for the DIN rails commonly available
1 Side cutters and wire stripping tools commonly available
1 Tool for crimping wire-end ferrules commonly available
1 Cable for grounding DIN rails, 10 mm cross-section with commonly available
M6 cable lug, length to suit local situation
1 M6 cable lug commonly available
1 Flexible lead, 1 mm2 cross-section, with suitable wire-end commonly available
ferrules, design A, length 6 mm

A5E00247483-02 2-3
2.4 Configuration Overview
Overview of the sample configuration (wiring and power sources not shown)
PG with CP 5611 S7-300
8 DI NAMUR 4 DO
RS 485-IS Coupler
Equipotential busbar PA
Figure 2-1 Overview of the Sample Configuration
2.5 Installation of the Sample Configuration
2.5.1 Installation of the ET 200iSP
1. Install the DIN rail (480 mm) in the EEx e enclosure which is mounted on a firm
base. See chapter 4 Installation.
2. Mount the various modules onto the rail, starting from the left. Begin with
terminal module TM-PS-A (suspend – swivel in). Continue with the remaining
modules (suspend – swivel on – slide to left.)
Note the following sequence:
– Terminal Module TM-PS-A
– Terminal module TM-IM/EM
– 2 x terminal module TM-EM/EM
– Bus terminating module

2-4 A5E00247483-02
2.5.2 Mounting the S7-300
1. Install the rack on a stable base. See the S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
operating instructions: Installation.
2. Install the various modules in the rack, starting from the left (fit to the rail – push
in – secure the screws.) Observe the sequence shown below:
– Power supply PS
– Central processing unit CPU 315-2 DP
2.5.3 Installing the RS 485-IS Coupler
1. Install the DIN rail (160 mm) on a stable base.

2. Hang the RS 485-IS coupler onto the rail and then swivel it in.
Note
Install the RS 485-IS coupler in an enclosure outside of the Ex area.

A5E00247483-02 2-5
2.6 Wiring the Sample Configuration
PA
M
L+
Figure 2-2 Wiring TM-PS-A
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
to ET 200iSP
Strain relief
and shielding terminal
LEDs
PROFIBUS
RS 485-IS
connection
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
bus termination switch
PROFIBUS-DP
24 V power connection (X1 DP)
supply
AC PROFIBUS-DP
from CPU 315-2 DP
DC DC 24 V
Figure 2-3 Wiring the RS 485-IS Coupler

2-6 A5E00247483-02
Connect the following:

1. The programming device (PG) and the CPU 315-2 DP (interface: X1 MPI) with
a PG cable.
2. The DIN rail of the S7-300, including the grounding conductor
3. The DIN rail of ET 200iSP, the Power Supply PS and the equipotential busbar
PA. Use the grounding bolt to fasten the components onto the DIN rail.
4. The CPU 315-2 DP (interface: X2 DP) with the RS 485-IS Coupler, as shown in
Figure 2-3. Use a PROFIBUS DP cable (PROFIBUS connector
6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0.)
5. The interface IM 152 with the RS-485-IS coupler, as shown earlier. Use a
PROFIBUS DP cable (PROFIBUS connector 6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0.)
6. The TM PS-A, the RS 485-IS Coupler and the power supply module PS S7-300
to the power supply.
Wire the ET 200iSP as shown below:
2 x 8 DI NAMUR 3 x 4 DO DC 17.4/27 mA
Terminals 1 2 2 1 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2
NAMUR sensor LEDs
Figure 2-4 Wiring the ET 200iSP Module

A5E00247483-02 2-7
2.7 Insert the Interface Module and the Electronic Modules
Insert the modules For further information, refer to chapter 4.4

Installing the Terminal Module for the interface and electronic modules.
Observe the sequence shown below:
– Power Supply PS
– Interface module IM 152
– 2 x 8 DI NAMUR
– 3 x 4 DO DC17.4V/27mA
2.8 Setting the PROFIBUS Address
Set PROFIBUS address 3 on the interface module IM 152. See also 5.7.
Interface module
OFF ON Example:
DP address =
64
32
16
8
4
2 +2
1 +1
* _______
=3
* reserved
Figure 2-5 Setting the PROFIBUS-address 3

2-8 A5E00247483-02
2.9 Configuring the Example
2.9.1 Configuring the S7-300
Step 1
Open STEP 7.
Step 2
If the New Project Wizard opens, close it with Cancel.
Step 3
In SIMATIC Manager, select File > New. A dialog box opens in which you enter
”ET 200iSP” as the name and then close the dialog with OK.
Step 4
Select Insert > Station, then click SIMATIC 300 station on the list. An icon with
the name SIMATIC 300(1) is created in the right-hand pane of the project window.
Step 5
Double-click the icon of the SIMATIC 300 station in SIMATIC Manager. An icon
labeled ”Hardware” now appears in the right-hand pane of the window. Double-click
this icon. HW Config opens.
Step 6
If the component catalog is not shown in the right section of the window, you can
activate it by selecting View > Catalog.
Expand the SIMATIC 300 folder and RACK-300 folder until you can see UR.
Double-click this entry.
Step 7
Select slot 1 (appears on blue background), return to the catalog and open the
folders SIMATIC 300, PS 300 and Standard PS 300 until you can see PS 407 5A.
Double-click this icon. The power supply module now occupies slots 1 and 2.

A5E00247483-02 2-9
Step 8
Next, select slot 3, then go to SIMATIC 300, CPU 300, CPU 315-2 DP and
6ES7 315-2AG10-0AB0. A double-click opens a window titled
”Properties-PROFIBUS interface DP)”. Acknowledge this with OK.
The CPU is assigned to slot 2.
Step 9
In the lower left-hand window, locate the row labeled DP and select it. Right-click
on the row and select Object Properties. The ”Properties DP” dialog opens.
Click the Properties button, and in the next dialog, click New. The system now
creates a new DP subnet operating at 1.5 Mbps. Now confirm by clicking OK three
times in succession.
Step 10
From the main menu, select Station > Save and Compile to save your changes.
Figure 2-6 Configuring the S7-300

2-10 A5E00247483-02
2.9.2 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to ET 200iSP
Step 1
In the upper left-hand window of HW Config, click the stylized PROFIBUS to select
it. Next, go to the catalog and open PROFIBUS DP and ET 200iSP so that you can
see IM 152. Double-click this icon to insert an ET 200iSP station. In the dialog box
that opens, change the address to 3 and confirm with OK. At the bottom left, you
can now see the new slots with an IM 152 in slot 2.
Step 2
Since slot 3 must remain free, select slot 4 and starting from there insert three
NAMUR 4DI modules and three 4 DO DC17.4V27mA modules.
Figure 2-7 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to ET 200iSP

A5E00247483-02 2-11
Step 3
Double-click the first module in the configuration table (slot 4: 8 DI NAMUR).
Select the ”Parameters” tab.
At channels 0 and 1 change the encoder type to ”NAMUR encoder.” ”Deactivate”
all other channels.
Figure 2-8 Deactivating ET 200iSP Channels
Step 4
Follow the same procedure as described in item 3 for each of the ET 200iSP
modules, and make the changes as outlined in the table below.
Table 2-2 Changes
Module Slot Type Channel 0 Channel 1 Channels 2 - 7

1 4 8 x DI NAMUR NAMUR sensor NAMUR sensor Encoder type:
disabled
2 5 8 x DI NAMUR NAMUR sensor Encoder type: Encoder type:
Channel disabled disabled
3 6 4 x DO No change No change ---

2-12 A5E00247483-02
Step 5
Select File > Save to save your configuration, then select PLC > Download to
download it to the PLC.
2.10 Programming the Example
Function principle
The state of the encoders connected to inputs I512.0 , I513.0 and I514.0 is queried
and evaluated. I512.0 increments an internal counter and I513.0 decrements it.
Input I514.0 resets the counter to zero.
Depending on the counter value, outputs Q512.0, Q513.0 and Q514.0 are set or
deleted. Q512.0 is set when the counter value is 0. Q514.0 is set at a counter
value of < 3, and Q513.0 is set at 3.
Programming
Select View > Component view to change to the component view.
Open the following in succession: SIMATIC 300(1), CPU 315-2 DP, S7 Program(1)
and Blocks until you can see OB1. Double-click OB1, and confirm the dialog with
OK.
Enter the following STL program:
Table 2-3 Sample program
STL Explanation
A I 514.0 If button 514.0 is active,
R C 0 set counter to 0
A I 512.0 If BERO 512.0 is active,

CU C 0 increment by 1
A I 513.0 If BERO 513.0 is active,

CD C 0 decrement by 1
AN C 0 Is counter = 0 ?
= Q 512.0 YES, then output 512.0 is active
L C 0 Load counter in ACCU

L 3 Load 3 in ACCU
>=I Is counter => 3 ?
<I Is counter < 3 ?
Select File > Save to save your configuration, then select PLC > Download to
download it to the PLC.

A5E00247483-02 2-13
2.11 Putting the Example into Operation
Turn on the power supply of the ET 200iSP.

Watch the status LEDs on the S7-300 and the ET 200iSP:
• CPU 315-2 DP is lit
DC 5V: lit
SF DP: off
BUSF: off
• ET 200iSP
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lit
PS ON: lit
2.12 Analysis of Diagnostics Data
If an error occurs, OB82 is started. Evaluate the startup information in OB82.

Tip: Call SFC13 in OB82 and evaluate the diagnostic datagram. See chapter 6

2-14 A5E00247483-02
2.13 Removing and Inserting Modules
Removing and Inserting Digital Electronics Module 8 DI NAMUR

1. Remove the first of the three electronics modules 8 DI NAMUR from the
terminal module during operation.
2. Monitor the status LEDs on the IM 152-2:
– SF: lit --> diagnostic message is present.
– BF: off
– ON: lit
– PS ON: lit
Result: The ET 200iSP continues to operate problem-free.
3. Evaluate the diagnostic information.
Result:
– Station status 1 (byte 0): Bit 3 is set –> External diagnostics
– ID-related diagnostics: Bit 3 in byte 7 is set –> slot 4
– Module status: Byte 16.7 / 16.6: 11B –> no module
4. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module.
Result:
– Status LED IM152:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lit
PS ON: lit
– The diagnostic message is deleted.

A5E00247483-02 2-15
2.14 Wire Break of the NAMUR Encoder Connected to the

Digital Input Module
1. Remove the wire from terminal 1 of the first electronic modules 8 DI NAMUR.
2. Watch the status LEDs.
SF: On –> A diagnostics message is queued
– Status LEDs electronic module 8 DI NAMUR:
SF: On –> A diagnostics message is queued
3: off/on
3. Evaluate the diagnostic information.
Result:
– Station status 1 (byte 0): Bit 3 is set –> External diagnostics
– ID-related diagnostics: Byte 7.3 is set –> slot 4
– Channel-specific diagnostics:
Byte 25: 10000011B –> Slot 4
Byte 26: 01000000B –> Channel 0
Byte 27: 00110B –> Wire break
4. Reconnect the BERO wire to terminal 1, then evaluate the diagnostics data
again:
SF: off
– Status LEDs electronic module 8 DI NAMUR:
SF: off
3: off/on
– The diagnostic message is deleted.

2-16 A5E00247483-02
Configuration Options 3
3.1 Modular System
Modular system
Modular in the context of ET 200iSP means: You can adapt the configuration to
your application with 4- and 8-channel electronic modules.
Example
The following schematic shows an example of a possible configuration of the
ET 200iSP distributed I/O station:
Switches, sensors
NAMUR sensor
Counting pulse, frequency
Valves, relays
mA
2-/4-wire measuring transducer
Resistance thermometer
Thermocouples:
Loads on the current output
HART field devices
Figure 3-1 Example of an ET 200iSP Configuration

A5E00247483-02 3-1
3.2 Electronics Modules to Suit Your Application
Which Electronics Module Does What

In the following table, you will find a guide to the applications of the electronics
modules of the distributed I/O station ET 200iSP.
Table 3-1 Electronics Modules to Suit Your Application
Application Electronic module

Evaluating NAMUR sensors 8 input channels 8 DI NAMUR
Evaluation of mechanical contacts with and without R
circuit
Recording counting pulses
Measuring frequencies
Switching solenoid valves, d.c. relays, 4 output channels 4 DO DC23.1V/20mA
indicator lamps, actuators 4 DO DC17.4V/27mA
4 DO DC17.4V/40mA
Measuring currents with 2-wire transducers (standard 4 input channels 4 AI I 2WIRE HART
applications) Input range
Measuring currents with • 4 to 20 mA
HART field devices (2-wire measuring transducers)
• HART
HART communication
Measuring currents with 4-wire transducers (standard 4 input channels 4 AI I 4WIRE HART
applications) Input ranges:
Measuring currents with • 0 to 20 mA
HART field devices (4-wire measuring transducers)
• 4 to 20 mA
HART communication
• HART
Measuring temperatures with 4 input channels 4 AI RTD
resistance thermometers Input ranges:
Measuring resistance • Pt 100, Ni 100
• 600 ohms
Measuring temperatures with thermocouples 4 input channels 4 AI TC
Measuring thermal e.m.f. Input ranges:
• $80 mV
• Type J, K, T, U, E,
L, N, R, S, B
Output of currents with HART field devices 4 output channels 4 AO I HART
HART communication Output ranges:
Output of currents • 0 to 20 mA
• 4 to 20 mA
• HART

3-2 A5E00247483-02
3.3 Electronic Modules Matching the Terminal Modules
Selecting the Terminal Modules

In the following table, you will find information to help you select the terminal
modules you require.
Table 3-2 Modules and Terminal Modules
Modules Terminal Modules

TM-PS-A TM-IM/IM TM-IM/EM 60S TM-EM/EM 60S
TM-PS-B TM-IM/EM 60C TM-EM/EM 60C
Order number 6ES7 193- 7DA00-0AA0 7AB00-0AA0 7AA00-0AA0 7CA00-0AA0
7DB00-0AA0 7AA10-0AA0 7CA10-0AA0
Power Supply PS Ĥ
Interface Module IM 152 Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
8 DI NAMUR Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
4 DO 23.1 VDC/20mA Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
4 AI I 2WIRE HART Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
4 AI RTD Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
4 AI TC Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
4 AO I HART Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
Reserve module Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ

A5E00247483-02 3-3
3.4 Power Supply of ET 200iSP
Power Supply PS
Connect the power supply of ET 200iSP to the TM-PS-A terminal module of the
power supply module PS. The power supply module PS provides the required
output voltages for the ET 200iSP. The output voltages are electrically isolated
from the supply voltage.
Output voltages:
DC 24 V supply voltage Powerbus
IM 152
Grounding busbar PA Backplane bus
Figure 3-2 Power Supply PS
Note
Fuse the power supply module with a 6 A over-current release, tripping
characteristic C (one per ET 200iSP station.)
3.5 Configuration Options in Zones
General Rules
To operation of ET 200iSP in potentially explosive locations or in the safe area,
irrespective of its configuration:
The ET 200iSP distributed IO device may only be operated on the
intrinsically safe PROFIBUS RS 485-IS:
1. An RS 485-IS coupler (field bus isolating transformer) is always required
2. Identification of PROFIBUS DP as EEx i (not only for Ex areas)
3. Marking of the cables/wires to the actuators and sensors as EEx i (for example,
using the color light blue).

3-4 A5E00247483-02
Warning
! All devices connected to PROFIBUS RS 485-IS must be intrinsically safe.
It is not allowed to connect voltage measuring devices, oscillographs and bus
testers to PROFIBUS RS 485-IS.
Rules relating to ET 200iSP configuration for operation in Zone 1:

If you use the ET 200iSP in zone 1, you must adhere to the following rules:
1. Install ET 200iSP in a metal enclosure with degree of protection EEx e
(extended safety.) Order numbers are found in the appendix A.1.
2. Isolation of PROFIBUS DP by means of RS 485-IS Coupler (order number is
found in appendix A). The RS 485-IS Coupler ensures protection class EEx i of
PROFIBUS DP in potentially explosive areas. You can install the RS 485-IS
Coupler in the potentially explosive Zone 2, or in the safe area.
3. In the potentially explosive area, you can use standard PROFIBUS DP cables
(order numbers are found in appendix A.) You must, however, mark these as
”EEx i bus cable” (for example with a blue band/blue heat-shrink sleeve at the
ends, or mark the cable with a blue color).
4. Connecting the PROFIBUS RS 485-IS bus cable to IM 152 via PROFIBUS
connector RS 485-IS (order numbers are found in appendix A.)
5. Terminating PROFIBUS RS 485-IS by means of PROFIBUS bus connector
RS 485-IS: Order numbers are found in appendix A. The transmission rate
determines the maximum length of PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
(cf. RS 485-IS Coupler product information.)

A5E00247483-02 3-5
RS 485-IS coupler
Safe area
PROFIBUS DP
bus cable
PROFIBUS locations: Zone 1
RS 485-IS Enclosure type of protection EEx e
Enclosure type of protection EEx e
ET 200iSP ET 200iSP
Bus connector 1.5 Mbps Bus connector with integrated
Figure 3-3 Configuration Options for the ET 200iSP in Zone 1
Rules relating to ET 200iSP configuration for operation in Zone 21

1. Install ET 200iSP in a metallic, dust-proof and certified enclosure with minimum
degree of protection IP 6x in accordance with directive 94/9/EC for category
2D.) Further requirements (surface temperatures, for example) are found in the
certification document of the relevant enclosure.
Order numbers are found in the appendix A.1.
2. See items 2 to 5: Rules relating to ET 200iSP configuration for operation in
Zone 1

1. The ET 200iSP must be installed in an enclosure, minimum degree of
protection IP 54. The enclosure must have a manufacturer’s declaration for
operation in zone 2 in accordance with EN 50021: Protection from mechanical
damage; degree of protection IP 54; avoidance of ignition due to electrostatic
charge).
Zone 1

3-6 A5E00247483-02

1. Install ET 200iSP in a metallic, dust-proof enclosure with minimum degree of
protection IP 5x in accordance with directive 94/9/EC for category 3D. Further
requirements (surface temperatures, for example) are found in the certification
document of the relevant enclosure.
Zone 1
Danger
! If conductive dust develops in the potentially explosive Zone 22 (metal particles,
for example), the Zone 21 rules apply.
Rules for Configuring the ET 200iSP in the Safe Area:

If you use the ET 200iSP in the safe area, you must adhere to the following rules:
1. Install the ET 200iSP in a metallic enclosure, degree of protection IP 20.
2. See items 2, 4 and 5: Rules relating to ET 200iSP configuration for operation in
Zone 1
Rules for the configuration of sensors, actuators, and HART field devices in the
potentially explosive area.
The verification of intrinsic safety for each field circuit must be made according to
the regulations stipulated by the relevant standards for configuration, selection and
installation.
A simple, intrinsically safe circuit results from attaching a sensor, actuator or HART
field device to an input or output of an electronic module.
The following table describes the conditions for checking the maximum safe values
for a simple, intrinsically safe circuit:

A5E00247483-02 3-7
Table 3-3 Rules for Configuration
Relevant Standard / Conditions for Usable Encoders and Actuators

Electrical Parameters
Standard: EN 60 079-14 The maximum safety values of the
Rules for electrical parameters: encoders and actuators must be adapted
accordingly to the maximum values of the
• U0 vUi
electronics modules. You will find these
• I0vII maximum values
• P0vPi • in the Ex certification of the senors and
• C0vCi+Ccable actuators
• L0vLi+Ccable • in the technical specifications of the
electronic modules of the ET 200iSP
Modules
ET 200iSP
U0 max. output voltage

I0 max. output current
P0 max. output power
C0 max. external C
L0 max. external L
Ccable max. line/cable capacitance

Lcable max. line/cable inductance
Ui max. input voltage

Encoders Ii max. input current
Actuators Pi max. input power
HART field devices Ci max. internal capacitance
L0 max. internal L
Safety information
Note
Always configure the system in accordance with EN 60 079-14 directives. See
table 3-14.

3-8 A5E00247483-02
Warning
! The interconnection of an intrinsically safe sensor, actuator, or HART field device
with the input/output of an electronic module must produce an intrinsically safe
circuit! Always check for resultant safety values when you select the sensors,
actuators and HART field devices for an electronic module.
3.6 Limitation of the Number of Connectable Electronic

Modules
Number of electronic modules at an ambient temperature of

–20 _C to +60_C in horizontal mounting position, and
–20 _C to +40_C in all other mounting positions.
Each ET 200iSP station consists of up to 32 electronic modules. This includes
digital and analog electronic modules.
The actual number of electronic modules may be limited by the current output by
the Power Supply PS (limit value: < 5000 mA). This current value limit may not be
exceeded.
Unrestricted use and combination of modules in ET 200iSP are possible in the
following scenario:
ET 200iSP with up to 16 electronic modules
Verify any configuration containing a higher number of electronic modules (up to
32), or an EM 4 DO 17.4 VDC/40mA, with the help of the calculation table (see
table 3-4.)
Note
At ambient temperatures between +60_C and +70_C (horizontal mounting
position), the output current of Power Supply PS is reduced to max. 3.5 A. For this
scenario, always calculate the number of electronic modules based on this current
value (limit value: < 3500 mA).
Calculation table
Verify the operational current consumption of ET 200iSP based on this calculation
table.

A5E00247483-02 3-9
Note
ET 200iSP always conforms with safety-relevant current consumption limits (limit
value < 15 A, see EC Prototype Test Certification KEMA 04ATEX2242.) The
number of modules available for any configuration scenario is limited only by the
operational current consumption (limit value < 5 A) or by the maximum number
(32.)
Procedure
Check the operational current consumption of your ET 200iSP configuration.
The limit value defined in table column = operational current consumption in mA
may not be exceeded.
1. Multiply the operational current per module by the number of modules, then
enter the values in the column = operational current consumption in mA.
2. Add all modules and enter the value in the Total Modules box (maximum of 32
electronics modules).
3. Add the operational current consumption, and enter the value in the Total
Current Consumption box.
4. Compare the calculated totals with the specified limit values.
Table 3-4 Current Consumption Calculation Table
Electronic modules x Number Operational = Operational

of current per current
Modules module in mA consumption
in mA
Power Supply PS x 15 mA =
IM 152 x 30 mA =
8 DI NAMUR x 80 mA =
4 DO 23.1 VDC/20mA x 290 mA =
4 DO 17.4 VDC/27mA x 260 mA =
4 DO 17.4 VDC/40mA x 380 mA =
4 AI I 2WIRE HART x 280 mA =
4 AI I 4WIRE HART x 27 mA =
4 AI RTD x 19 mA =
4 AI TC x 17 mA =
4 AO I HART x 295 mA =
Reserve x ––– –––
Total Total Current
Modules Consumption
= =
max. 32* < 5000 mA
* without Power Supply PS and IM 152

3-10 A5E00247483-02
Example
An ET 200iSP consists of the following electronic modules, for example:
• 5 x 8 DI NAMUR
• 5 x 4 DO DC17.4V/27mA
• 2 x 4 DO DC23.1V/20mA
• 3 x 4 DI I 2 WIRE HART
• 5 x 4 DI I 4WIRE HART
• 5 x 4 DI RTD
• 4 x 4 DI TC
• 3 x 4 AO I HART
When operating with 32 electronic modules, check the current consumption
(< 5000 mA):
Table 3-5 Current consumption calculation table
Electronic modules x Number Operational = Operational

of current per current
Modules module in mA consumption
in mA
Power Supply PS x1 15 mA = 15 mA
IM 152 x1 30 mA = 30 mA
8 DI NAMUR x5 80 mA = 400 mA
4 DO 23.1 VDC/20mA x2 290 mA = 580 mA
4 DO 17.4 VDC/27mA x5 260 mA = 1300 mA
4 DO 17.4 VDC/40mA x ––– 380 mA = –––
4 AI I 2WIRE HART x3 280 mA = 840 mA
4 AI I 4WIRE HART x5 27 mA = 135 mA
4 AI RTD x5 19 mA = 95 mA
4 AI TC x4 17 mA = 68 mA
4 AO I HART x3 295 mA = 885 mA
Reserve x ––– ––– –––
Total Total Current
Modules Consumption
= 32 = 4348 mA
max. 32* < 5000 mA
* without Power Supply PS and IM 152
Note
The limit values are not exceeded in the example.
Result: ET 200iSP can be operated with this configuration.

A5E00247483-02 3-11
3.7 Maximum Configuration of ET 200iSP
Number of ET 200iSP Stations

You may operate up to 31 ET 200iSP stations on one segment of
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS (via RS 485-IS Coupler).
Current consumption of ET 200iSP in maximum configuration

See Technical Specifications of the Power Supply Module PS.
Width of ET 200iSP
Maximum mounting width of ET 200iSP (power supply + interface module + 32
electronic modules + bus termination module):
• 1.095 m (with a power supply and an IM 152)
• 1.185 m (with two power supplies and two IM 152 interface modules)
Address space
The interface module supports up to 244 input bytes and 244 output bytes. Some
DP masters do not support the entire address space.
3.8 Direct Data Exchange
Requirements
The ET 200iSP can be used as transmitter (publisher) for direct data exchange
(cross traffic). This requires no configuration.
The DP master being used must, of course, also support direct communication.
You will find information on this in the description of the DP master.
Principle of Operation
Direct data exchange is characterized by PROFIBUS DP nodes which “listen” on
the bus and know which data a DP slave returns to its DP master. This mechanism
allows the “listening node” (recipient) direct access to deltas of input data of remote
DP slaves.
In your STEP 7 configuration, define the address area of the recipient in which the
required data of the publisher will be read, based on the peripheral input
addresses.

3-12 A5E00247483-02
Example
The diagram below shows which direct data exchange “relationships” can be
configured with an ET 200iSP as publisher and which nodes can “listen in” as
potential recipients.
DP master system 1 DP master system 2

CPU 31x-2
CPU 31x-2 as CPU 31x-2 as
DP master 1 DP master 2
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
DP slave
ET 200iSP
ET 200iSP ET 200iSP
CPU 31x-2 as
DP slave
Figure 3-4 Example of Direct Data Exchange
3.9 Time Stamping
Features
IM 152 supports time stamping
• in customer applications using FB 62 (FB TIMESTMP)
(see also the STEP 7 Online Help).
• in a PCS 7 system solution at an accuracy of 20 ms
For detailed information on time stamping and time-of-day synchronization,
refer to the PCS 7 function manual “10 ms Time Stamps.”
Function principle
A modified input signal is assigned a time stamp and saved to a buffer (data
record). When time-stamped signals are input, or the data record overflows, the
system generates a process alarm output to the DP master. The buffer is
evaluated with “read data record.” The system generates special messages upon
events influencing the time stamping function (communication with DP master is
down, time master message frame failure, etc).

A5E00247483-02 3-13
Parameter assignment
in this configuration, define the user data of IM 152 to be monitored. With respect
to the time stamping function, these are digital inputs monitored for signal changes.
Parameter Setting Description

Time stamping • disabled Enable time stamping for the
channels of electronic module 8
• enabled
DI NAMUR.
Edge evaluation • positive edge Define which signal changes
event entering state require a time stamp.
• negative edge
3.9.1 Time Stamping at an Accuracy of 20 ms
The time stamping of binary signal changes is supported in the PCS 7 system by
all hardware and software components: from the ET 200iSP over the S7-400 right
to the OS.
Requirements
• Set a synchronization interval of 20 ms for the master and ET 200iSP.
• To enable the time stamping function, you need the electronic module 8 DI
NAMUR with the “8DI NAMUR” configuration. All other configurations of the 8DI
NAMUR electronic module do not support time stamping.
Function principle of time stamping

You can configure the monitoring of digital inputs for signal changes in HW Config.
The following can be monitored: “Signal entering/leaving state” (as “positive or
negative edge”). ET 200iSP adds the current time-of-day stamp to these changed
input signals and saves them as message lists. Such a message list is a data
record with a maximum of 20 messages about time-stamped signal changes. The
IM 152 can store up to 15 data records.
After a certain time and if messages exist or when a data record is full, the IM 152
triggers a hardware interrupt on the DP master (S7-400). The CPU then reads the
data record and passes on the message lists to WinCC on an OS using the driver
block FB90 “IM_DRV”.

3-14 A5E00247483-02
Example of time stamping
Real-time
WinCC transmitter
Operator Station (OS) (SICLOCK)
(system visualization)
Industrial Ethernet
S7-400 CP 443-5
automation system (DP master)
RS 485-IS Coupler ET 200iSP

CP 443-1
PROFIBUS Digital inputs
Figure 3-5 Example of Time Stamping and Edge Evaluation
Time Stamping: Principle of Operation in a Redundant System

Both IM 152s store the messages of the time-stamped signals. In this way, after a
load transfer from the active to the passive IM 152, the “new” active IM 152 can
forward the current messages to WinCC.
Signal changes are not time-stamped during the changeover between the two
IM 152 interface modules. The period during which no time stamping occurred can
be seen in WinCC.

A5E00247483-02 3-15
Time Stamping: Example in a Redundant System
Real-time
WinCC transmitter
Operator Station (OS) (SICLOCK)
(system visualization)
Industrial Ethernet
ET 200ISP
distributed I/O with 2 x IM 152
ET 200iSP
S7-400H
automation
system
RS 485-IS Coupler
Digital inputs
Redundant
DP master
systems
Figure 3-6 Example configuration with 2 IM 152s for redundancy in an H-system
3.9.2 Time Synchronization with Flexible Time Interval
You can set the synchronization interval in the engineering tool.

Longer synchronization intervals reduce time stamping accuracy.

3-16 A5E00247483-02
3.10 Counting
3.10.1 Features
The 8 DI NAMUR electronic module is equipped with a counter function.

• 2 16-bit up counters (standard counting function), or
• 2 16-bit down counters (periodic counting function), or
• 1 32-bit down counter (cascading counter function)
• Setpoint preset by the PIO
• GATE function
• Counter control signals you can configure:
– ”2 Count/ 6 6DI NAMUR” configuration: Two counters are configured. The
control signals are stored in the PIO ( process image of outputs.)
– ”2 Count/ 6 Control” configuration: Two counters are configured. The counter
control signals are stored in the PIO. The counters are also controlled by the
digital inputs of 8 DI NAMUR.
• You configure the counters of the
8 DI NAMUR electronic module and assign the parameters in the engineering
software, for example, HW Config.

A5E00247483-02 3-17
3.10.2 Function Principle
16-bit up counters (standard counting function)

The counting range is always 0 to 65535.
Each counting pulse at the digital input increments the counter value by the count
of 1. When the counting limit is reached, the function resets the counter to 0 and
resumes counting.
When the system detects a counter overflow, it sets the corresponding output in
the PII.
A positive edge of the control signal reset output resets the output in the PII. This
does not influence the current counter value.
In 16-bit up counting operations, the system does not set any PIO outputs. These
are always reset.
A positive edge of the control signal Reset counter sets the counter value 0 and
the set counter output.
The GATE control signal stops the count at a positive edge. Counter pulses are
processed at the digital input again at a negative edge. The Reset counter control
signal remains effective when the GATE function is enabled.
Actual counter value
Counting limit
Counter output in Time

the PII
Control signal Time

reset output
Control signal Time

reset counter
Control signal Time

GATE
Pulses on the digital Time

input
Time
Figure 3-7 Principle of Operation of the 16-bit Up Counter

3-18 A5E00247483-02
16-bit down counters (periodic counting function)

Maximum counter range: 65535 to 0.
The actual value is overwritten with the setpoint value when the counter starts.
Each counting pulse decrements the actual value by the count of 1. When zero is
reached, the system sets the corresponding output in the PII, and then resets the
actual value to the setpoint value. The down count resumes at this value.
A positive edge at the Reset counter control signal resets the actual value to the
setpoint value, and resets the corresponding PII output.
A positive edge of the control signal reset output resets the output in the PII. This
does not influence the current counter value.
The GATE control signal stops the count at a positive edge. The corresponding PII
output is reset at the same time. Counter pulses are processed at the digital input
again at a negative edge. The Reset output and Reset counter control signals also
remain active when the GATE function is enabled.
The counter setpoint is defined and modified by the PIO. A positive edge at the
Reset counter control signal, or a zero transition of the counter, applies the
setpoint.
Actual counter
value
Setpoint
Counter output in Time

the PII
Control signal
Time
reset output
Control signal Time

reset counter
Control signal GATE Time
Pulses on the digital Time

input
Time
Figure 3-8 Principle of Operation of the 16-bit Down Counter
32-bit down counter (cascading counter function)

Maximum counter range: 4294967295 to 0.
The principle of operation is identical to that of the 16-bit down counter. Channel 1
does not have any function.

A5E00247483-02 3-19
3.10.3 Configuring Counters
Procedure in HW Config
Drag-and-drop the relevant “2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” or “2 Count/ 6 Control”
configuration from the HW catalog to the configuration table, or set the relevant
configuration parameters.
”2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” configuration

• Assignment of Digital Inputs at 8 DI NAMUR
For further information on input assignments, refer to the technical data of the 8
DI NAMUR electronic module.
Table 3-6 Assignment of Digital Inputs of 2 Count / 6 DI NAMUR
Digital input Terminal Assignment

Channel 0 1, 2 Counter 1
Channel 1 5, 6 Counter 2 (irrelevant for 32-bit down counters)
Channel 2 9, 10 Digital input 2

3-20 A5E00247483-02
• Assignments of the PII
EB x Bits 15 to 8 Actual value counter 1 Bits 31 to 24

EB x+1 Actual value
Bits 7 to 0 Bits 23 to 16
counter 1
EB x+2 Bits 15 to 8 Actual value counter 2 Bits 15 to 8
(32-bit down
EB x+3 Bits 7 to 0 Bits 7 to 0
counter)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+4
Counter output 1
Counter output 2
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
Digital input 5
Digital input 6
Digital input 7
S7 format
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+5 7 6 5 4 3 2
EB x+6 Unassigned
Value status channels 2 to 7:
1B: Valid input signal
0B: Input signal is invalid
Figure 3-9 PIO with “2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration
• Assignments of the PIO
AB x Bits 15 to 8 Setpoint counter 1 Bits 31 to 24

AB x+1 Bits 7 to 0 Bits 23 to 16 Setpoint counter 1
AB x+2 Bits 15 to 8 Setpoint counter 2 Bits 15 to 8 (32-bit down
AB x+3 Bits 7 to 0 Bits 7 to 0 counter)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AB x+4
Unassigned
Unassigned
Control signal GATE 1
Control signal reset counter 1
Control signal reset counter output 1
Figure 3-10 PIO with “2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration

A5E00247483-02 3-21
”2 Count/ 6 Control” configuration

This configuration also allows you to control the counters by means of digital
inputs.
• Assignment of digital inputs at 8 DI NAMUR
Table 3-7 Assignment of Digital Inputs of 2 Count / 6 Control

Channel 0 1, 2 Counter 1
Channel 1 5, 6 Counter 2 (irrelevant for 32-bit down counters)
Channel 2 9, 10 Control signal GATE 1
Channel 3 13, 14 Control signal GATE 2
Channel 4 3, 4 Control signal reset counter 1
Channel 5 7, 8 Control signal reset counter 2
Channel 6 11, 12 Control signal reset counter output 1
Channel 7 15, 16 Control signal reset counter output 2

The assignment is identical to that of the “2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” configuration
(see Fig. 3-9).
The assignment is identical to that of the “2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” configuration
(see Fig. 3-10).
3.10.4 Configuring Counters
Double-click 8 DI NAMUR in the configuration table to start your configuration.
Parameters
This section describes only the parameters which are relevant for the counter.
These form part of the parameters of 8 DI NAMUR and are based on the selected
configuration:

3-22 A5E00247483-02
Table 3-8 Parameters for the Counters

Encoder type • Channel disabled Select the encoder for the
counter inputs • NAMUR sensor relevant counter for channel
0 or 1.
• Single contact, no load
resistance
Counter 1 mode • Standard counting function Select the counter 1 mode.
• Periodic counting function
• Cascaded counting function
Counter 2 mode • Standard counting function Select counter 2 mode. This
• Periodic counting function parameter is irrelevant if you set
the “Counter 1 mode” parameter
• Cascaded counting function to “Cascading counting
function.”
3.11 Frequency Measurement
3.11.1 Features
8 DI NAMUR supports frequency measurements at channels 0 and 1:

• 2 x frequency counters 1 Hz to 5 kHz
• Configurable measuring window (GATE)
• The frequency counting signals are input to the electronic module at its digital
inputs.
• You configure the frequency counters of the 8 DI NAMUR electronic module
and assign the parameters in the engineering software, for example, HW
Config.
• ”2 Trace/ 6 6DI NAMUR” configuration: This configuration provides two
frequency counters.

A5E00247483-02 3-23
3.11.2 Function Principle
Frequency counting
The signal frequencies are determined based on the input signals at channel 0 or 1
of the electronic module. To calculate the frequency, the signals are measured
within a configurable gate time.
The frequency is visualized as 16-bit value in fixed-point format, and is transferred
to the PII.
The frequency counters calculate the frequency based on the following formula:
Number of negative edges at the digital input

Frequency [Hz] =
GATE [s]
Violation of input frequency limits

If the input frequency exceeds 5 kHz, 7FFFH is returned as actual value. It is no
longer possible to output any correct actual values if the input frequency exceeds
an approx. value of 8 kHz.
3.11.3 Configuring Frequency Counters
Drag-and-drop the relevant “2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR” configuration from the HW
catalog to the configuration table, or set the relevant configuration parameters.
”2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR” configuration

• Assignment of digital inputs at 8 DI NAMUR
Table 3-9 Assignment of digital inputs of 2 Trace / 6 DI NAMUR

Channel 0 1, 2 Frequency counter 1
Channel 1 5, 6 Frequency counter 2

3-24 A5E00247483-02
EB x Bits 15 to 8
Frequency counter 1
EB x+1 Bits 7 to 0
EB x+2 Bits 15 to 8
Frequency counter 2
EB x+3 Bits 7 to 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+4
Unassigned
Unassigned
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
Digital input 5
Digital input 6
Digital input 7
S7 format
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+5 7 6 5 4 3 2
EB x+6 Unassigned
Figure 3-11 PII with “2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration

The PIO is not used.

A5E00247483-02 3-25
3.11.4 Assigning Frequency Counter Parameters
Double-click 8 DI NAMUR in the configuration table to start your configuration.
Parameters
This section describes only the parameters which are relevant for the frequency
counters. These for part of the 8 DI NAMUR parameters:
Table 3-10 Parameters for the Frequency Counters

Encoder type • Channel disabled Select the encoder for the relevant
frequency inputs • NAMUR sensor frequency counter for channel 0 or 1.
• Single contact, no
load resistance
Measuring window • 50 ms Select the relevant GATE for channel
(GATE) • 200 ms 0 or 1.
• 1s Observe the rules shown below in
order to achieve maximum accuracy of
frequency counting:
• high frequencies (>4 kHz): set a
short gate time (50 ms)
• variable/ medium frequency range:
medium gate times (200 ms)
• low frequencies (<1 kHz): high gate
times (1 s)

3-26 A5E00247483-02
3.12 Identification Data I&M
Features
I data: Module information, usually available on a the label of the module
enclosure. I data are read-only.
M data: System-specific information such as the installation location and date.
M data are generated during configuration and written to the module.
I&M data are stored on the module and support you in
• system troubleshooting
• verification of the system configuration
• Detection of HW changes in a system
Reading and writing I&M data in STEP 7

HW Config shows the I&M in the “Module status - IM 152” and
“Properties - DP Slave” tabs. For information, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help.
Reading and writing the I&M in SIMATIC PDM

In SIMATIC PDM, select File > Upload all to PG/PC to read, and Device >
Download all to device to write the parameters and the I&M. See chapter 6.2.
Reading the I&M with SFB 52

The standard function block SFB 52 can be used to read the data records of a
DP slave. In order to read the I&M, download the data records 231 to 234
(see table 2-1.)
Note
At present, the I&M data record objects cannot be read or written to by means of
data record DS 255.

A5E00247483-02 3-27
Identification data I&M
Table 3-11 Identification data I&M
I&M Access Default Explanation

I data 0: Index 1 (data record 231)
MANUFACTOR_ID read (2 bytes) 2A hex (=42 dec) The name of the manufacturer is
stored here.
(42 dec = SIEMENS AG)
ORDER_ID read (20 bytes) depends on the Order number of the module
module
SERIAL_NUMBER read (16 bytes) depends on the The serial number of the module
product version is stored here. This makes
unique identification of the
module possible.
HW_REVISION read (2 bytes) depends on the This provides information on the
product version product version of the module.
This is incremented when the
product version and/or the
firmware of the module
changes.
SW_REVISION read (4 bytes) depends on the This indicates the firmware
product version version of the module. If the
firmware version is incremented,
then the product version
(HW_REVISION) of the module
is incremented as well.
REVISIONS_COUNTER read (2 bytes) ––– Provides information on the
parameter changes on the
module. REVISION_ COUNTER
increments with each change.
PROFILE_ID1) read (2 bytes) Not applicable
PROFILE_SPECIFIC_ read (2 bytes) Not applicable
TYPE1)
IM_VERSION1) read (2 bytes) 10 hex Provides information on the I&M
version (10 hex = version 1.0)
IM_SUPPORTED1) read (2 bytes) 3E hex Provides information on
available I&M data (index 1 to 4)
M data 1: Index 2 (data record 232)
TAG_FUNCTION read / write (32 ––– Enter a unique tag for the
bytes) module here.
TAG_LOCATION read / write (32 ––– Enter the installation location of
bytes) the module here.
DEVICE_INSTALL_ DATE read / write (16 ––– Enter the installation date of the
bytes) module here.
DESCRIPTOR read / write (54 ––– Enter a comment describing the
bytes) module here.
1) The indication of this I&M depends on the engineering software.

3-28 A5E00247483-02
3.13 Redundancy with IM 152
Properties
The ET200iSP is capable of redundant operation
• on S7-DP masters (e. g. S7-400H)
• with software redundancy
Power Supply of the ET 200iSP

To ensure consistently high availability during redundant operation with 2 IM152
interface modules, it is also recommended that you configure the ET 200iSP with a
redundant power supply PS (see section 3.14).
3.13.1 Redundancy with S7 DP Masters
Redundancy on an H-system provides the highest availability. If an interface
module fails, the system switches over to the redundant interface module without
interruption.
Requirements
• H-system (e.g. S7-400H)
• Terminal module TM-IM/IM
• 2 x IM 152 (V2.0 and higher)
• 2 x RS 485-IS coupler
• STEP 7 software package and SIMATIC S7 H systems
• In a redundant system, IM 152s can only be implemented on DP masters that
support the “Fail-Safe” parameter. On DP masters that do not support this
parameter, the IM 152 does not start up, and the BF LED flashes.
Tip: The GSD file of the DP master indicates whether it supports the “Fail-Safe”
parameter.
Warning
! The SYNC/FREEZE function must not be activated during redundant operation.
Violation of this condition can result in invalid process values.
Cross-segment synchronization of SYNC/FREEZE commands does not take place
during redundant operation.

A5E00247483-02 3-29
Installation and Wiring

The H-system is completely set up, configured, and parameterized.
1. Install the ET 200iSP with the terminal module TM-IM/IM.
2. Connect a PROFIBUS RS 485-IS to each bus connector.
Each PROFIBUS RS 485-IS requires a separate RS 485-IS coupler.
3. Fit the TM-IM/IM with two IM 152 interface modules (V2.0 or higher).
Configuration and Parameter Assignment

1. In the “Hardware Catalog” of HW Config, select a suitable DP master interface
and place it in both module racks. In the properties dialog that appears
automatically, create PROFIBUS DP networks with the same parameters for
both DP master interfaces.
2. For each DP master system, insert a DP master system. Result: STEP 7 will
automatically produce a redundant system.
3. Drag one IM 152 (V2.0 and higher) from the “Hardware Catalog” to a
PROFIBUS DP in the station window. Result: STEP 7 will automatically create
the connection to both PROFIBUS DPs.
4. Open the properties window of the IM 152 and activate both PROFIBUS DP
connections in the “Redundancy” tab. “PROFIBUS” and “PROFIBUS-Red”.
5. Save the configuration and download it to the CPU.

3-30 A5E00247483-02
Example-Configuration of a Redundant DP-Master System and IM 152

Figure 3-12 shows an example configuration on an S7-400H. For a detailed
description of H-systems, refer to the manual S7-400H Automation System,
Introduction to the system.
S7-400H TM-IM/IM
ET 200iSP
automation system
Redundant
DP master
RS 485-IS Coupler
systems
Digital inputs
Figure 3-12 Redundancy with 2 x IM 152 in an H-system
S7-400H as DP master
You need STEP 7 V 5.0 or higher and the SIMATIC S7 H-Systems software
package to configure the S7-400H system.
DP master 1 and DP master 2:
• Execute the same user program
• Have the same parameter assignment and configuration for the IM 152

A5E00247483-02 3-31
3.13.2 Software redundancy
Software redundancy can be used anywhere central and particularly important
system devices require increased availability, and a temporary failure (failure of the
system’s own execution cycles) during switchover from one station to another
(master-standby switchover) is tolerated by the process.
Requirements
• Two S7-300 or S7-400 stations (with CPU and DP master)
• Terminal module TM-IM/IM
• 2 x IM 152 (V2.0 and higher)
• 2 x RS 485-IS coupler
• STEP 7 software package and software redundancy

Perform the installation and wiring as described for redundancy on S7 DP master
in section 3.13.1.
Configuration and Parameter Assignment

If you implement the IM 152 with software redundancy, you must configure two
DP master systems in HW Config. For more information, refer to the Description of
Software-Redundancy for S7-300 and S7-400.

3-32 A5E00247483-02
3.14 Redundancy of the Power Supply
Properties
With the ET 200iSP, you can configure a redundant power supply PS. When one
Power Supply PS fails, the system switches over to the second Power Supply PS
without interruption.
Requirements
• Terminal module TM-PS-A
• Terminal module TM-PS-B
• 2 x Power Supply PS
• IM 152 (V2.0 and higher)

1. Begin the installation with the TM-PS-A.
2. Install the TM-PS-B to the right of the TM-PS-A.
3. Now complete the ET 200iSP configuration.
4. Connect a separate power supply to each TM.
5. Finally, fit the TMs with Power Supply PS 1 and PS 2.
TM-PS-B
TM-PS-A
PS PS
1 2
AC
DC
AC
DC
Figure 3-13 Redundancy of the Power Supply

A5E00247483-02 3-33
Parameter Assignment
Only those parameters that are relevant for redundancy of the Power Supply are
explained below. These are part of the parameters of the IM 152 interface module.
Table 3-12 Parameters for Redundancy of the Power Supply PS

Self-diagnosis enabled –––
Redundant Power Redundant Power Supply Diagnostics for failure of Power
Supply diagnostics Supply PS 1 or PS 2
3.15 Configuration Changes in RUN
Features
Certain systems may not be shut down while they are in RUN. The reason for this
may be found in the complexity of automated processes or in high system restart
costs. A modification or removal of system components may nonetheless be
necessary.
Certain system configurations and parameters can be modified in RUN by means
of the CiR function. The process is here halted for a brief time. Within this period,
the process inputs retain their last value
You can modify the ET 200iSP configuration in RUN using the CiR function.
Reference
A detailed description of this function and its configuration is found in the functions
manual Modifying the System during Operation via CiR.
You can download this function manual from the Internet. URL:
Configuration changes in RUN

Note the information in the Modifying the System during Operation via CiR
functions manual showing the steps in reconfiguring the system.
Reaction of the I/O to Configuration Changes in RUN

When reconfiguring certain modules (see the table), make sure that no diagnostic
events are pending for this module (wire break message, for example), because
otherwise it may happen that outgoing diagnostic events are no longer reported.
The effect is that the LEDs on the CPU, IM, or module stay lit even though the
reconfigured module is operating properly. If this situation comes up, the only
remedy is to remove and reinsert the module.

3-34 A5E00247483-02
Table 3-13 Reaction of the I/O
Electronic module Reaction of the I/O- Special features in

reconfiguring
8 DI NAMUR Return the last process SF LED is lit.
value which was valid prior if a diagnostic event was
to the reconfiguration. Inputs reported before you started
not affected return the last to reassign parameters, the
valid value and the value SF LEDs (on the CPU, IM or
status, module) may be lit although
4 DO DC23.1V/20mA Output the last process the module is operating
value which was valid prior properly and the diagnostic
4 DO DC17.4V/27mA
to your configuration. event has been cleared.
4 DO DC17.4V/40mA
Outputs not affected return • Reconfigure the system
their last valid value. only if the module does
not report a diagnostic
4 AI I 2WIRE HART Return the last process
event, or
4 AI I 4WIRE HART value which was valid prior
to the reconfiguration. Inputs • Remove and reinsert the
4 AI RTD module.
not affected return the last
4 AI TC valid value.
4 AO I HART Output the last process

value which was valid prior
to your configuration.
Outputs not affected return
their last valid value.
3.16 Operating the ET200iSP with Older CPUs

The following CPUs cannot be operated in DPV1 mode. The ET 200iSP must be
integrated via the GSD file for projects with these CPUs. Parameters are to be
assigned with SIMATIC PDM.
Table 3-14 Operating the ET200iSP with Older CPUs
CPU Order No. HW FW

Version Version
CPU 412-1 6ES7 412-1XF03-0AB0 8 V3.1.3
CPU 412-2 6ES7 412-2XG00-0AB0 8 V3.1.3
CPU 413-1 6ES7 413 1XG02-0AB0 9
CPU 413-2 6ES7 413 2XG02-0AB0 9
CPU 414-1 6ES7 414-1XG02-0AB0 9
CPU 414-2 with 128 kB 6ES7 414-2XG03-0AB0 8 V3.1.3
CPU 414-2 with 384 kB 6ES7 414-2XJ01-0AB0 9
CPU 414-3 6ES7 414-3XJ00-0AB0 8 V3.1.3
CPU 414-4H 6ES7 414-4HJ00-0AB0 1 V3.1.3
CPU 416-1 6ES7 416-1XJ02-0AB0 9
CPU 416-2 with 800 kB 6ES7 416-2XK02-0AB0 8 V3.1.3

A5E00247483-02 3-35
Table 3-14 Operating the ET200iSP with Older CPUs, continued
CPU Order No. HW FW

Version Version
CPU 416F-2 6ES7 416-2FK02-0AB0 2 V3.1.3
CPU 416-2 with 1.6 MB 6ES7 416-2XL01-0AB0 9
CPU 416-3 6ES7 416-3XL00-0AB0 8 V3.1.3
CPU 417-4 6ES7 417-4XL00-0AB0 6 V3.1.3
CPU 417-4H 6ES7 417-4HL01-0AB0 1 V3.1.3
Sync module 6ES7 960-1AA00-0XA0 3
CPU 416-2 DP ISA Lite 6ES7 616-2PG01-0AB4 1
CPU 416-2 DP ISA 6ES7 616-2PK01-0AB4 2
CPU 412-2 DP PCI 6ES7 612-2QH00-0AB4 1 V3.1.0
CPU 416-2 DP PCI 6ES7 616-2QL00-0AB4 1 V3.1.0
3.17 Date of Production of the Module

The year of production is contained in the serial number of the module (4th digit)
The serial number is found on the rating plate,
Example of a serial number:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011 Digit
S VPS9123456 Serial number
S 2004
T 2005
U 2006 Year of production
V 2007
W 2008
Figure 3-14 Year of production

3-36 A5E00247483-02
Installation 4
4.1 Rules for Installation
Safety information
Danger
! During installation, be sure to observe the stipulations in EN 60079-14. The
conditions for the electrical parameters in the standard apply to simple electrical
circuits. See 3.5.
of dust (Zone 21, Zone 22), you need to observe EN 50281-1-2 as well.
Danger
! Under certain circumstances, sparks or
unacceptable surface temperatures capable of ignition can occur during
installation.
Never install the system when an explosive atmosphere is present!
The following activities/jobs are forbidden when the ET 200iSP is operating and
the 24 VDC power supply is applied to the terminal module TM-PS-A:
• Disconnecting the 24 VDC power supply at the terminal module TM-PS-A.
• Removing the safety screw from the terminating module.
• Uninstalling the bus termination module and any other modifications that affect
the configuration of the terminal modules.

A5E00247483-02 4-1
Installation
Installation Dimensions
Table 4-1 Installation Dimensions
Dimensions
Width Terminal module with power supply module 60 mm
Terminal module with interface module / electronic 60 mm
module
Terminal modules with electronics modules 60 mm
Bus terminating module 20 mm
Height Terminal module with power supply module 190 mm
Terminal module with interface module / electronic 190 mm
module
Terminal modules with electronic modules 190 mm
Bus termination module 155 mm
Depth ET 200iSP on S7-300 mounting rail 167 mm
Enclosure for ET 200iSP in Zone 1

The ET 200iSp must be installed in an enclosure with type of protection EEx e
(increased safety). Order numbers are found in the appendix A.1.
Use the following cable glands:
• Power supply: type of protection EEx e
• PROFIBUS RS 485-IS and EEx i I/O: type of protection EEx i
Zone 1
Enclosur EEx e
e
EEx i
EEx e cable gland
cable gland
Power PROFIBUS EEx i inputs and outputs
supply RS 485-IS
Figure 4-1 Enclosure for ET200iSP in Zone 1

4-2 A5E00247483-02
Installation

Install ET 200iSP in a metallic, dust-proof and certified enclosure with minimum
degree of protection IP 6x in accordance with directive 94/9/EC for category 2D.)
Further requirements (surface temperatures, for example) are found in the
certification document of the relevant enclosure. Order numbers are found in the
appendix A.1.
Remove dust deposits from the enclosure and its immediate environment at
regular intervals (see chapter 7.5), i.e. always install the enclosure in a location
with easy access for cleaning.
Use the following cable glands::
• Power supply: Cable gland with manufacturer’s certification for Zone 21
• PROFIBUS RS 485-IS and EEx i I/O: Cable gland with manufacturer’s
certification for Zone 21
Enclosur IP 6x
e
Cable gland*
Cable gland*

supply RS 485-IS
*Requires a manufacturer’s declaration for Zone 21

A5E00247483-02 4-3
Installation

The ET 200iSP must be installed in a metallic enclosure with at least degree of
protection IP 54. The enclosure must have a manufacturer’s certification for zone 2
(complying with EN 50021). Order numbers are found in the appendix A.1.
• Power supply and PROFIBUS RS 485-IS: Cable gland with manufacturer’s
• Ex i inputs and outputs: type of protection EEx i
Zone 2
Enclosur IP 54
e
Cable
gland* EEx i
cable gland
supply DP EEx i
Figure 4-3 Enclosure for ET 200iSP in Zone 2

4-4 A5E00247483-02
Installation

Install ET 200iSP in a metallic, dust–proof and certified enclosure with minimum
degree of protection IP 5x in accordance with directive 94/9/EC for category 2D).
Further requirements (surface temperatures, for example) are found in the
certification document of the relevant enclosure. Order numbers are found in the
appendix A.1.
Remove dust deposits from the enclosure and its immediate environment at
regular intervals (see chapter 7.5), i.e. always install the enclosure in a location
with easy access for cleaning.
• Power supply and PROFIBUS RS 485-IS: Cable gland with manufacturer’s
• EEx i inputs and outputs: Cable gland with manufacturer’s certification for
Zone 22
Zone 22
Enclosur IP 5x
e
Cable
gland* Cable gland*

supply DP EEx i
ET 200iSP enclosure for the safe area

The ET 200iSP must be installed in a metallic enclosure with at least degree of
protection IP 20.
Mounting position
The preferred mounting position is horizontal on a vertical surface. All other
positions are possible, although there are certain restrictions regarding the ambient
temperature.

A5E00247483-02 4-5
Installation
Minimum Clearances to the Enclosure for Installation, Wiring, and Ventilation
40 mm
20 mm 25 mm
Minimum clearance to the

enclosure lid: 3 mm
40 mm*
* the cable shielding terminal

is not taken into account
Figure 4-5 Minimum Clearances to the Enclosure
Rules for Installation

During installation, make sure that you keep to the following rules:
• The mechanical installation of ET 200iSP begins with terminal module
TM-PS-A. Start this approx. 10 mm on the right side next to the grounding bolt
in order to optimize installation space on the rail.
• The terminal module TM-PS-A is followed by the terminal module TM-IM/EM.
• These are followed by the terminal modules TM-EM/EM.
• The ET 200iSP is completed by the bus termination module. The bus
termination module accompanies the terminal module TM-IM/EM. If your
ET 200iSP configuration leaves you with a gap in the last slot, you must protect
this slot with a slot cover or install a reserve module. The slot cover is
integrated into the terminating module.
• The maximum configuration of the distributed I/O station ET 200iSP contains
1 power supply module, 1 interface module and 32 electronics modules. Note
the maximum current consumption (see the chapter 3.6.)
Note
The terminal modules can only be installed in the order described due to an
integrated coding.

4-6 A5E00247483-02
Installation
4.2 Installing the Mounting Rail
Features
The ET 200iSP distributed I/O device is mounted on a rail for S7 installation
technology (order numbers are found in appendix A.) The mounting rails are ready
for installation with four bore holes and one grounding bolt.
The following configuration is recommended for optimal use of the rail when
mounting the terminal modules.
Fastening hole dimensions

The table below shows the dimensions of the fastening bores for the mounting rail.
Table 4-2 Rail Mounting Diagram
”Standard” Mounting Rail
32.5 mm
Mark for additional bore hole

57.2 mm for applications with increased
vibration and shock stress.
b/2
a b
Length of the mounting Distance a Distance b Maximum number of terminal

rail modules1) within distance b
482.6 mm 8.3 mm 466 mm 6
530 mm 15 mm 500 mm 7
585 mm 8.5 mm 568 mm 8
830 mm 15 mm 800 mm 12
885 mm 8.5 mm 868 mm 13
1) Width of terminal modules: 60 mm
Required Tools
Wrench or screwdriver to match the selected fixing screws.

A5E00247483-02 4-7
Installation
Accessories required
You can use the following screw types for mounting the rail:
Table 4-3 Fixing Screws
For You can use... Explanation

outer fixing screws Cylindrical head screw M6 to Select the screw length to
ISO 1207/ ISO 1580 match your installation.
(DIN 84/DIN 85) You also need 6.4 mm washers
to ISO 7092 (DIN 433)
Hexagonal head screw, M6, to
ISO 4017 (DIN 4017)
Installing the mounting rail

1. Mount the rail in the cabinet so that you have sufficient space for installation
and development of heat at the modules, see Fig. 4-5).
2. If necessary, mark the bore holes on the base of the cubicle, then drill holes
with diameter of 6.5 mm "0.2.
3. Screw the mounting rail onto the base of the enclosure (M6 screws).
Note
You should always maintain a low impedance contact between the rail and the
base of the enclosure.
If the ET 200iSP is subject to increased vibration or shock, it is advisable to bolt
down the mounting rail with an additional screw, at the center position between the
two outer bores (with b/2.) To mount the fixing screws (see table 4-3), provide an
additional M6 bore hole at b/2 on the mounting rail (see table 4-2).
4.3 Installing the Terminal Module for Power Supply PS
Features
• The terminal module TM-PS-A is used to accommodate the Power Supply PS.
• The terminal module TM-PS-B is used to accommodate the redundant Power
Supply PS of the ET 200iSP.
• The terminal modules TM-PS-A and TM-PS-B must be prewired (without Power
Supply PS).
• All other terminal modules are mounted to the right, next to terminal module
TM-PS-A or TM-PS-B.
Requirements
The mounting rail is installed.

4-8 A5E00247483-02
Installation
Required Tools
Screwdriver with 4.5 mm blade (cylindrical)
Mounting Terminal Module TM-PS-A

1. Fit the terminal module onto the rail.
2. Push in the terminal module at the bottom until you can hear the catch lock.
3. Screw fasten the terminal module onto the mounting rail (2 screws, tightening
torque 0.8 N/m to 1.1 N/m). Use a screwdriver with 4.5 mm blade.
Note: Prevent the ET 200iSP from slipping sideways by fixing the terminal
module mechanically (see item 3). The corresponding two screws are located
on the bottom front of the terminal module.
3 3
2 Slider
Figure 4-6 Mounting Terminal Module TM-PS-A

A5E00247483-02 4-9
Installation
Mounting Terminal Module TM-PS-B (Redundant Power Supply PS)

1. Hang terminal module TM-PS-B to the right of the TM-PS-A on the mounting
rail.
2. Swivel the TM-PS-B back until you can hear the catch lock.
3. Push the TM-PS-B to the left until you hear it engage on the first terminal
module TM-PS-A.
4. Bolt the terminal module to the mounting rail. See Mounting Terminal Module
TM-PS-A.
TM-PS-A
TM-PS-B
Figure 4-7 Mounting Terminal Module TM-PS-B
Removing Terminal Modules TM-PS-A and TM-PS-B

The terminal module is wired and there are further terminal modules to the right of
it.
1. Turn off the power supply to terminal module TM-PS-A and, if present, terminal
module TM-PS-B.
2. Disconnect the cables from terminal module TM-PS-A using a screwdriver.
3. Unscrew the retaining screws of the terminal module.
4. Using the screwdriver as a lever, force the slider on terminal module
TM-PS-A to its bottom end stop, then shift the terminal module to the left.
Note: The slider is located below the terminal module (see the figure above).
5. Hold the slider while taking the terminal module off the mounting rail.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for terminal module TM-PS-B, if present.

4-10 A5E00247483-02
Installation
4.4 Installing Terminal Modules for the Interface Module

and Electronic Modules
Properties
• The terminal modules are used to accommodate the interface module and the
electronics modules
– TM-IM/EM: The terminal module for the interface module and electronic
module is located directly next to the right of terminal module TM-PS-A.
– TM-IM/IM: Terminal module for 2 interface modules (IM 152 redundancy),
located to the right of TM-PS-A or TM-PS-B.
– TM-EM/EM: The terminal modules for the electronic modules are located to
the right of terminal module TM-IM/EM or TM-IM/IM.
• The terminal modules can be prewired (without electronics modules).
Requirements
The mounting rail is installed.
Required Tools
Screwdriver with 4.5 mm blade
Mounting Terminal Modules TM-IM/EM, TM-IM/IM, and TM-EM/EM

1. Fit the terminal module onto the rail.
2. Push in the terminal module at the bottom until you can hear the catch lock.
3. Push the terminal module to the left until you hear the click of the mechanism
latching it to the previous terminal module.
Figure 4-8 Installing Terminal Modules TM-IM/EM and TM-EM/EM

A5E00247483-02 4-11
Installation
Removing Terminal Modules TM-IM/EM, TM-IM/IM and TM-EM/EM

The terminal module is wired and there are further terminal modules to the right of
it.
The description below explains how to remove the module, starting from the right:
1. Shut down power to Power Supply PS, or remove it.
2. Strip the terminal module wiring using a 3.5 mm screwdriver.
3. Loosen the retaining screws of the terminating module using a 4.5 mm
screwdriver.
4. Using the screwdriver, lever the slider on the previous (left) terminal module
down to its mechanical stop.
5. At the same time, slide the terminating module to the right.
6. Maintain pressure on the slider when taking the terminating module off the
mounting rail.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for further terminal modules.
Note
You can also remove the distributed I/O station starting from the left.
6
Slider
Figure 4-9 Removing Terminal Module TM-EM/EM, Starting from the Right Side

4-12 A5E00247483-02
Installation
4.5 Installing the Bus Termination Module and the

Slot Cover
Features
• The ET 200iSP distributed I/O device is terminated with the bus termination
module at its right-hand end. If you do not insert a bus termination module, the
ET 200iSP cannot be operated.
• To retain the ET 200iSP mechanically, screw fasten the terminating module
onto the mounting rail.
• If your ET 200iSP configuration leaves you with a gap in the last slot, you must
protect this slot with a slot cover or install a reserve module. The slot cover is
integrated into the terminating module.
• The bus termination module accompanies with terminal modules TM-IM/EM
and TM-IM/IM.
Requirements
The last terminal module of the ET 200iSP has been installed.
Required Tools
Screwdriver with 4.5 mm blade.

A5E00247483-02 4-13
Installation
Installing the bus termination module

1. Fit the bus termination module onto the rail to the right of the last terminal
module.
2. Push in the bus termination module onto the DIN rail.
3. Push the bus termination module to the left until you hear it lock into the last
terminal module.
4. Screw fasten the terminating module onto the mounting rail (one screw,
tightening torque 0.8 N/m to 1.1 N/m). Use a screwdriver with 4.5 mm blade.
Note: Prevent the ET 200iSP from slipping sideways by fixing the terminating
module mechanically (see item 4). The retaining screw is located at the bottom
front of the bus termination module.
Figure 4-10 Installing the bus termination module
Removing the Bus Termination Module

1. Shut down power to Power Supply PS, or remove it.
2. Unscrew the retaining screws of the terminal module.
3. Using the screwdriver, press down the slider on the last terminal module as far
as it will go and shift the bus termination module to the right.
4. Pull the bottom of the bus termination module away from the DIN rail.

4-14 A5E00247483-02
Installation
Installing the Slot Cover

1. Lever the slot cover out of the terminating module using the screwdriver. The
slot cover is mounted on a bracket on the right side of the terminating module.
2. Take this off and insert it into the last slot of the ET 200iSP.
Figure 4-11 Installing the Slot Cover

A5E00247483-02 4-15
Installation
Removing the slot cover

1. To remove the slot cover from the terminal module, insert the screwdriver into
the bottom opening an lever it out.
2. Press the slot cover into the bracket on the terminating module.
Figure 4-12 Installing the Slot Cover
4.6 Installing the Slot Number Labels
Properties
The slot number labels identify the various I/O modules by their slot assignment
(1 to 34).
Requirements
• The terminal modules are installed.
• You can only fit the slot number labels when no electronics modules are
installed.
• Position of terminal module TM-PS-A: One label on top left.
Position of terminal modules TM-IM/EM and TM-EM/EM: Each with one label
on the left, and one on the top right.

4-16 A5E00247483-02
Installation
Required Tools
Screwdriver with 3.5 mm blade (only for removal)
Installing the Slot Labels

1. Break the slot number label (1 to 34) out of the strip.
2. Push the color identification label into the terminal module.
Slot number
labels
1 2 3 4 5
Figure 4-13 Installing the Slot Number Labels
Removing the slot labels

1. Remove the electronic module from the terminal module.
2. Lever the slot number label out of the holder using a screwdriver.

A5E00247483-02 4-17
Installation

4-18 A5E00247483-02
Wiring 5
5.1 General Rules and Regulations for Wiring
Introduction
The distributed I/O station ET 200iSP represents a component in plants or
systems, and is thus subject to special rules and regulations based on its
application. This chapter provides an overview of the most important rules when
integrating the ET 200iSP distributed I/O system into a plant or system.
Specific application
Observe the accident prevention guidelines for specific applications, such as
machine protection guidelines. When laying cables and lines, observe the
installation regulations in EN 60 079-14, as well as country-specific regulations.
EMERGENCY-OFF equipment in the safe area

All EMERGENCY-OFF equipment according to IEC 204 (corresponds to
DIN VDE 113) must remain operative in all states of the plant or system.

A5E00247483-02 5-1
Wiring
System Startup after Certain Events

The following table describes points to remember when your plant starts up
following certain events:
Table 5-1 System Startup after Certain Events
If... then...
Startup after power dips or failure, the system may not assume any dangerous
Startup of ET 200iSP after bus states. If necessary, force an
communication interrupts, EMERGENCY-OFF!
Startup follows unlocking of the must always be controlled and defined.
emergency-stop device
Mains Power in the Safe Area

The table below shows points to observe when handling mains.
Table 5-2 Mains Power in the Safe Area
For... Then...
stationary plants or systems without all-pole the building installation must be equipped
power disconnect switch with a power disconnect switch or a fuse.
load power supplies, power supply modules the set rated voltage range must match the
local power supply.
all power circuits of the distributed I/O the fluctuation/deviation of the power supply
station ET 200iSP from the nominal value must be within the
permitted tolerance (see chapter 8.)
24 VDC Supply in the Safe Area

The following table describes points to remember relating to the 24 VDC supply:
Table 5-3 24 VDC Supply in the Safe Area
For... Make sure of...

buildings external lightning protection (for example, lightning protection
elements)
24 VDC supply lines, internal lightning protection
signal lines
24 VDC supply Reliable Electrical Isolation

5-2 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
Protection from External Electrical Influences

The following table describes points to remember relating to the protection from
electrical influences or faults:
Table 5-4 Protection from External Electrical Influences
For... make sure that...

all plants or systems in which the ET 200iSP the plant or system is connected to a
is installed grounding conductor to divert
electromagnetic interference.
Supply, signal, and bus lines the cables are installed and routed correctly.
Signal and bus lines Any break of a line or conductor does not
result in undefined states of the plant or
system.
5.2 ET 200iSP Operation with Equipotential Bonding PA
Components and Protective Measures

When setting up a system, various components and protective devices are
mandatory. The type of component and the necessity of protective measures
depends on the DIN VDE regulations that apply to your system configuration. The
table below relates to the schematic that follows.
Table 5-5 24 V DC Supply in the Safe Area
Compare... Relates to figure DIN VDE 0100 DIN VDE 0113

Shutdown device for (1) ...Part 460: main ...Part 1: mains
controllers, switch disconnect switch
encoders and final
control elements
Short-circuit and (2) ...Part 725: ...Part 1: single-pole
overload protection Single-pole fusing of fusing of grounded
circuits secondary circuit

A5E00247483-02 5-3
Wiring
Safe electrical isolation

Modules supplied with ≤ DC 60 V or ≤ AC 250 V voltages must be safely isolated,
i.e. the ET 200iSP power supply must be electrically isolated.
ET 200iSP with floating reference potential

The ET 200iSP is installed without connecting the reference potential M of the
power supply to protective ground.
ET 200iSP within the overall system

The following schematic shows the ET 200iSP distributed I/O station within the
entire system in zone 1 (power supply and grounding concept) when powered from
a TN-S system.
L1
L2
L3 Low-voltage distribution – TN-S
N system, for example (3 400 V)
PE
Safe Potentially explosive locations: Zone 1
area
(1) Enclosure EEx e
FE: Functional ground for direct discharge of interference
to the mounting rail by means of spring-loaded contact.
ET 200iSP
Power Supply
PS
Mounting FE: FE: FE: FE: FE:

rail
L+ M PA
(2)
AC
DC rail for terminating
Bus cable cable shielding
Equipotential busbar PA
Figure 5-1 ET 200iSP Operation with Equipotential Bonding PA

5-4 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
Equipotential bonding PA
The following must be connected to the equipotential bonding system
• the mounting rail of the ET 200iSP system (grounding bolt EEx e)
• terminal module TM-PS-A at the PA terminal
• Rail for terminating cable shielding (with one EEx e terminal)
Danger
! It is not permitted to connect the equipotential bonding system to the ground
conductor of the mains system.
The equipotential bonding system PA is compliant with EN 50 079-14 directives for

potentially explosive areas.

A5E00247483-02 5-5
Wiring
5.3 Electrical Installation of the ET 200iSP
Electrical isolation between...

• the load circuits/process and all other circuitry of the ET 200iSP
• the PROFIBUS-DP interface in the interface module and all other circuits
• power supply (auxiliary power) and all output voltages
The following schematic shows the various potentials in the ET 200iSP system.
The figure shows only the most important components:
Power Supply PS IM 152 Electronic module Bus termination module
Auxiliary power Backplane

bus
ET 200iSP
Mounting
rail
Process Process Process

RS 485-IS electronic electronic electronic
components components components
interface
L+ M PA
Potential of auxiliary power
I/O potentials
ET 200iSP potentials
Potential DP interface
Figure 5-2 Potentials in the ET 200iSP System

5-6 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
5.4 Lightning and Overvoltage Protection
5.4.1 Overview
Introduction
One of the most common causes of failure are overvoltages caused by:
• atmospheric discharge, or
• electrostatic discharge
First, will show the basis of the theory of overvoltage protection: the lightning
protection zone concept.
Next, we are going to outline the rules for the transitions between the various
lightning protection zones.
Note
This section can only provide you with the general guide on protecting the
ET 200iSP from overvoltage.
Full protection from overvoltage is only guaranteed if the design of the entire
system includes an overvoltage protection. This applies in particular to structural
measures to be included in the planning of the building.
We therefore recommend that you contact your Siemens representative or a
company specialized in lightning protection if you require more detailed information
about overvoltage.
Further references
The solutions presented in these manuals are based on the lightning protection
zone concept described in IEC IEC 61312-1 ”Protection against LEMP.”

A5E00247483-02 5-7
Wiring
5.4.2 The Lightning Protection Zone Concept
Principal of the Lightning Protection Zone Concept complying with IEC 61312-1/
DIN V VDE V 0185 T4
The principle of a lightning protection zone requires that facilities to be protected
from overvoltage, for example a control room, should be divided into lightning
protection zones based on EMC considerations (see figure below).
The various lightning protection zones (LPZ: Lightning Protection Zone) are formed
by:
Table 5-6 Lightning Protection Zones
Lightning Protection Zones (LPZ: Lightning Protection Zone)

the external lightning protection of the Lightning protection zone 0A
building Lightning protection zone 0B
peripheral parts of the system in which no
galvanic coupling of lightning current peaks
can occur (field side)
the shielding of
• buildings Lightning protection zones 1
• rooms and/or Lightning protection zones 2
• devices Lightning protection zones 3
Effects of lightning stroke

Direct lightning strikes occur in lightning protection zone 0A The effects of the
lightning stroke are high-energy, electromagnetic fields that must be reduced or
weakened from one lightning protection zone to the next through suitable lightning
protection elements/measures.
As described in EN 1127-1, direct lightning strikes ignite explosive atmospheres.
For this reason, our advice is to prevent the effects of direct lightning strokes
(galvanic coupling) reaching hazardous areas by taking suitable building measures.
Lightning protection measures can, for example, prevent direct lightning strikes in
Ex zones or to cables leading into these zones. A closely meshed equipotential
bonding system involving all parts of the plant with a minimum of 16 mm2 Cu
prevents the flow of lightning currents within the plant. If these measures are taken
in the building, lightning protection zone 0B results for installation in the outer area.
Indirect lighting effects (inductive, capacitive) can be reduced to a harmless level
with suitable shielding measures and surge arresters.
Overvoltages
In lightning protection zone 0B, lightning currents can no longer occur. However,
peak pulse voltages of 10 kV and more are to be expected. In lightning protection
zone 1 and higher, in addition to the effects of a lightning strike, overvoltage may
be induced by switching actions and couplings, etc.

5-8 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
Lightning Protection Zone Scheme

The following schematic illustrates the lightning protection zone concept for a
free-standing building.
Lightning protection zone 0 (field side)
Building
external shielding
Lightning Lightning protection zones 1 (steel reinforced)
protection
Room shielding
Lightning protection
power zones 2 (steel reinforced)
system
line Lightning Device shielding
Protective
Zone 3 (metal enclosure)
Device
not
electrical
metal line
part (metallic)
internal
line
Lightning protection
IT cable Equipotential bonding
local
Equipotential bonding
Figure 5-3 Lightning Protection Zones of a Building
Principle of the Interfaces between Lightning Protection Zones

At the junctions between lightning protection zones, you must implement measures
to prevent the transfer of overvoltages.
The principle of a lightning protection zone also requires that at the interfaces
between the lightning protection zones, all metal cables must be included in the
equipotential bonding system.
Metallic lines include:
• the piping (for example, of water, gas and heat),
• active cables
– power cables (for example, system power supply, 24 V power supply)
– signal cables (for example, a bus cable).

A5E00247483-02 5-9
Wiring
5.4.3 Rules for the Interface Between Lightning Protection Zones

0 to 1
Rule for the Interface 0A <–> 1 (Lightning Protection Equipotential Bonding)

The following measures are suitable for lightning protection equipotential bonding
at the interface lightning protection zone 0 <–> 1:
• Keep lightning stroke currents away from Ex areas and cables that lead into
these areas.
• Define the zone transition 0A <–> 1 in the non-Ex area.
Since this zone transition is not relevant for the typical applications of the
ET 200iSP, this will be discussed in no further detail in this manual.
Rule for the interface 0B <–> 1 (high-energy electromagnetic interference)

The following measures are suitable for overvoltage protection at the interface
lightning protection zone 0B <–> 1:
• Use conductive spiral metal bands or metal braids, grounded at both ends as
the cable shields, for example, NYCY or A2Y(K)Y
• and run the cables
– through metal pipes without breaks and grounded at both ends, or
– in conduits of reinforces concrete with interconnected armor, or
– on closed metal cable racks which are grounded at both ends, or
• you may also use fiber-optic cable instead of metal cables.
Additional Measures
If you are not able to take the measures outlined above, provide protection at the
interface 0B <–> 1 with a surge voltage protector. The following table lists the
components you can use to provide coarse protection for your system.
Lightning protection zone 1 can, for example, be defined as the interior of a
building with a shielded outer skin or as the interior of a metal distributor. If the
shielding effect of the building outer skin is uncertain, the metal distributor is
preferable. We recommend that you install overvoltage protection devices for the
signal lines in the metal distributor. The protective devices for the 24 V supply must
be integrated in an explosion-proof enclosure and should also be installed in the
metal distributor.
Danger
! To increase the availability of a cable connection with overvoltage protection, both
ends of the cable should be connected to protective devices.

5-10 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
Overvoltage Protection Components
Table 5-7 Protection of Cables with Overvoltage Protection Components
Succes- Cables for ... ... at interface 0B <–> 1, connect: Order number
sive
no.
1 Power Supply PS for supply 1 Netz-AK/1+1/ÜS/FM/Ex d 4225* (serial
and looping with EEx d enclosure, explosion-proof, number)
• DC 24V ready to connect
2 Interface module IM 152 1 Blitzductor CT type MD HFD Ex 6 919507* and
• PROFIBUS RS 485-IS 2 shielding clamps for the bus cable 919 583*919 508*
3 • 8 DI NAMUR 8 x Blitzductor CT Type MD/Ex 30 919 507* and

919 581*
4 • 4 DO 4 x Blitzductor CT Type MD/Ex 30 919 507* and
919 581*
5 • 4 AI I 2WIRE HART 4 x Blitzductor CT Type MD/Ex 30 919 507* and
919 581*
6 • 4 AI I 4WIRE HART 4 x Blitzductor CT Type MD/Ex 30 919 507* and
919 581*
7 • 4 AI RTD 4 x Blitzductor CT Type MD/Ex 30 919 507* and
919 581*
8 • 4 AI TC 4 x Blitzductor CT Type MD/Ex 30 919 507* and
919 581*
9 • 4 AO I HART 4 x Blitzductor CT Type MD/Ex 30 919 507* and
919 581*
* These components can be ordered directly from:

DEHN +SÖHNE GmbH + Co. KG
Elektrotechnische Fabrik
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt
www.dehn.de
Note
For all the other PROFIBUS-DP components outside the hazardous area, we
recommend that you follow the instructions in the PROFIBUS SIMATIC NET
manual.
Caution
! If you use overvoltage protection devices, the equipotential bonding should be
installed using a minimum cross section of 6 mm2.

A5E00247483-02 5-11
Wiring
5.4.4 Rules for the Interfaces between Lightning Protection Zones

1...2 and higher
Rules of interfaces 1 <–> 2 and higher (local equipotential bonding)

The following rules apply to lightning protection zone interfaces 1 <–> 2 and
higher:
• Implement local equipotential bonding at every other lightning protection zone
interface.
• At all other lighting protection zone interfaces, include all lines (for example:
metal pipes) in the local equipotential bonding circuit.
• Include all metal installations located within the lightning protection zone in the
local equipotential bonding system (for example, metal parts within lightning
protection zone 2 at interface 1 <–> 2).
Additional Measures
We recommend additional protection
• For all lightning protection zone interfaces 1 <–> 2 and higher
• For all cables that run through a lightning protection zone and that are longer
than 100 m
Lightning Protection Elements for the 24 V DC Power Supply
Danger
! To protect the Power Supply PS module, the lightning protection element must be
installed in an EEx d enclosure. The overload of the protective element is indicated
by a floating contact led out to the exterior.
Lightning Protection Element for Signal Modules

The protective devices have a shield connecting clamp and the input and output. If
the bus connection is looped through, two protective devices must be used per IM
module. The overload of a lightning protection element is indicated by the
permanent short-circuit (fail-safe) between the signal cores.
Protective Elements for 1 <–> 2 and higher

When installing the ET 200iSP, zone transition 1 <–> 2 and higher is not normally
used. If required, consult the table above and discuss the required measures with
your Siemens representative.

5-12 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
5.4.5 Example of Protection from Overvoltage for Networked

ET 200iSP Stations
Wiring Example
The schematic below shows an example of how to wire two networked ET 200iSP
stations to achieve effective protection from overvoltages:
Lightning protection zone 0B, field side
Lightning protection zone 1

Enclosure EEx e Enclosure EEx e
Lightning protection zone 1
PS IM EM
PS IM EM

6 mm2
6 mm2

L+ Inputs and outputs
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
PA PA
16 mm2

Figure 5-4 Example of the Wiring of Networked ET 200iSP Stations

A5E00247483-02 5-13
Wiring
Components for the Wiring Example

The following table explains the consecutive numbers in the wiring example.
Table 5-8 Example of a Lightning-Protected Configuration
Cons. no. Component Meaning

from figure
(1) Surge arrestor for 24 V power supply, Protection from indirect lightning effects and
depending on the EEx d enclosure:1 x overvoltages from interface 0B <–> 1
Netz-AK/1+1/ÜS/FM/Ex d onwards
serial no. 4225*
(2) Surge arrestor for PROFIBUS RS 485-IS, Protection from indirect lightning effects and
depending on the looping overvoltages from interface 0B <–> 1
1 x Blitzductor CT Type MD HFD Ex 6 onwards
Order no.: 919 507* and 919 583*
1 x Blitzductor CT Type MD HFD Ex 6
Order no.: 919 507* and 919 583*
(3) I/O surge arrester dependent on the number Protection from indirect lightning effects and
of double cores used, 1 x 1 St. Blitzductor overvoltages from interface 0B<–> 1
CT onwards
Type MD/Ex 30
Order no.: 919 507* and 919 581*
per double core
(4) Shield clamp for bus cable via EMC spring Discharge of interference currents
terminal on the face section of the
Blitzductor CT
Order no.: 919 508*
(5) Equipotential bonding cable 16 mm2 Standardization of reference potentials
(6) Equipotential bonding conductor 6 mm Discharge of interference currents
* These components can be ordered directly from:

DEHN +SÖHNE GmbH + Co. KG
Elektrotechnische Fabrik
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt
www.dehn.de
Installation in potentially explosive areas

Surge arrestors operating in potentially explosive areas must be installed in an
enclosure of the following type:
• Zone 1: type of protection EEx e (increased safety)
• Zone 2: minimum degree of protection IP 54 (with manufacturer declaration for
Zone 2)
• Zone 21: dust-proof (certified), minimum degree of protection IP 6x
• Zone 22: dust-proof (certified), minimum degree of protection IP 5x

5-14 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
5.5 Wiring the ET 200iSP
5.5.1 Rules for Wiring the ET 200iSP
Safety information
Danger
! When laying cables and wiring, make sure that you adhere to the installation
regulations in EN 60 079-14 and any regulations specific to your country.
Danger
! The interconnection of an intrinsically safe sensor, actuator, or HART field device
with the input/output of an electronic module must produce an intrinsically safe
circuit! For this reason:
When you select the sensor, actuator, or HART field device to be connected to the
electronic module, the resulting safety-related values must be checked!
The inductance and capacitance of the cable must also be taken into account! See
chapter 3.5.
Warning
! If the wrong electronic module is used, or the wrong terminals are connected to
the sensor, actuator, or HART field device, the intrinsic safety is jeopardized:
Connect only EEx i circuits to the intrinsically safe inputs and outputs of the
electronic modules!
Check the wiring between the electronic modules and sensors, actuators, and
HART field devices!

A5E00247483-02 5-15
Wiring
Table 5-9 Rules for Wiring the ET 200iSP
Wiring Rules for... TM-PS-A TM-IM/EM,

TM-EM/EM (spring
and screw terminal)
Connectable wire cross-sections for solid-core cables 0.5 to 4 mm2 0.14 to 2.5 mm
Connectable conductor Without wire end 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0.14 to 2.5 mm
cross-sections of flexible ferrule
cables
With wire end ferrule 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0.14 to 1.5 mm
Number of conductors per terminal 1 conductor 1 or combination of 2
wires up to 1.5 mm
(total) in a common
wire-end ferrule
Length of insulation to be stripped 11 mm
Wire-end ferrules to Without insulating Design A, to 12 mm Design A, up to 21 mm
DIN 46228 collar length long
With insulation collar Design E, up to 12 mm Design E, up to 12 mm
0.25 to 1.5 mm long long
Tightening torque 0.5 – 0.7 N/m
5.5.2 Wiring a Terminal Module with Screw Terminals
Features
• When wiring terminal modules with screw terminals, the wires are secured in
the terminal by screwing down the terminal.
• Wire-end ferrules are not necessary.
Requirements
Keep to the wiring rules.
Required Tools
Wiring a Terminal Module with Screw Terminals

1. Strip the cables.
2. Insert the wires into the terminal.
3. Tighten the screw. Result: The wire is clamped into the terminal module.

5-16 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
5.5.3 Wiring a Terminal Module with Spring Terminals
Features
When wiring terminal modules with spring terminals, the wires are secured in the
terminal simply by inserting them into the terminal.
Requirements
Keep to the wiring rules.
Required Tools
Wiring a Terminal Module with Spring Terminals

1. Strip the cables.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the upper (round) opening of the terminal and push it
in.
3. Insert the wire as far as it will go into the lower (square) opening in the terminal.
4. Remove the screwdriver.
Insert the screwdriver
Insert the conductor into the spring

terminal up to its stop.
Remove the screwdriver; the

conductor is firmly clamped in.
Figure 5-5 Wiring with Spring Terminals

A5E00247483-02 5-17
Wiring
5.5.4 Grounding the Mounting Rail
Features
The mounting rail of the distributed I/O station must be connected to the grounding
busbar PA.
Requirements
• Switch off the power supply before you start wiring.
• Terminating the grounding conductor to the EEx e grounding bolt of the
mounting rail.
• To avoid any interference, the cross-section of the grounding conductor for the
mounting rail must be greater than the cross-section of the grounding conductor
on the terminal module TM-PS-A or TM-PS-B.
Required Tools
• 10 mm wrench
• Stripping tool
• Crimp tool
Grounding the Mounting Rail
1. Strip the grounding conductor. Attach an M6 (ring) cable lug to the grounding
conductor. Note: Minimum cross-section of the grounding conduct: 4 mm2.
2. Terminate the grounding conductor at the grounding bolt (M6 nut, washer, and
spring washer) located on the mounting rail on the left of the TM-PS-A.
Tightening torque: 2 N/m to 2.5 N/m.
3. Terminate the other end to the grounding busbar PA.
Figure 5-6 Grounding the Mounting Rail

5-18 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
5.5.5 Wiring Terminal Module TM-PS-A
Safety information
Danger
! Do not put explosion protection to risk in the potentially explosive areas
Zone 1 and Zone 21:
In Zone 1/ Zone 21, always switch off power before you disconnect the power
supply cable on terminal module TM-PS-A or TM-PS-B. In Zone 21, you may only
open the ET 200iSP enclosure in the absence of explosive dust!
Danger
! Do not put explosion protection to risk in the potentially explosive areas
Zone 2 and Zone 22:
In Zone 2/ Zone 22, always switch off power before you disconnect the power
supply cable on terminal module TM-PS-A or TM-PS-B if there is any risk of
explosion.
If there is no risk of explosion, the power supply cables can be disconnected from
terminal module TM-PS-A or TM-PS-B in Zone 2/ Zone 22 while power is on.
Features
Connect the ET 200iSP power supply to the terminal module TM-PS-A.
Connect the power supply for redundancy to the terminal module TM-PS-B.
The active Power Supply PS supplies interface module IM 152 and all electronic
modules with the required voltage.
Requirements
• Wire the terminal module only after you switched off power.
• Observe the wiring rules.
Required Tools
• Screwdriver with 3.5 mm blade.
• Stripping tool

A5E00247483-02 5-19
Wiring
Wiring Terminal Modules TM-PS-A or TM-PS-B

1. Strip the cables of the ET 200iSP power supply.
2. Pull the slide down until it engages.
You can only pull down the slide if both retainer screws of the terminal module
are screwed onto the mounting rail.
3. Tighten the various conductors using a 3.5 mm screwdriver.
Note
Minimum cross-section of the grounding conductor PA: 4 mm2. Connect the other
end of the grounding conductor to the grounding busbar PA.
4. Push the slider up until it automatically moves up.
Terminal module TM-PS-A
PA
M
Slider L+
2
3
Figure 5-7 Connecting the Power Supply and Grounding Conductor PA to the TM-PS-A.

5-20 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
5.5.6 Wiring Terminal Modules TM-IM/EM and TM-IM/IM
Connect the PROFIBUS RS 485-IS connector to terminal module TM-IM/EM. The

connector is located on the left side of the module. Terminal module TM-IM/EM
also forms the interface to the actuators and sensors. The terminals are located on
the right side of the module.
Connect the bus connector for redundant operation of the two IM 152s to terminal
module TM-IM/IM.
Properties
Zone 1 and Zone 21 requirements

Observe the following rules in Zone 1 and Zone 21:
1. Use the RS 485-IS coupler (the order number is found in appendix A).
2. To loop PROFIBUS RS 485-IS to the next ET 200iSP, use the PROFIBUS
connector RS 485-IS (order no. 6ES7 972-0DA60-0XA0). To loop the bus,
connect the bus cable to the second cable outlet of the bus connector.
3. Terminate PROFIBUS RS 485-IS by means of the PROFIBUS connector RS
485-IS. The PROFIBUS connector RS 485-IS (6ES7 972-0DA60-0XA0) is
equipped with an integrated terminating resistor.
4. Use the bus cable specified in appendix A for PROFIBUS RS 485-IS and mark
the bus cable as an ”EEx i bus cable”. If you use a color as the identifier, you
must select light blue.
5. The bus cable shielding must be connected to one of the following locations
providing an absolutely safe grounding connection PA:
– Either at the transition of the bus cable from the safe area to the hazardous
area
– or in the safe area directly at the RS 485-IS coupler. In this case, the shield
must be installed as an active intrinsically save circuit, i.e. the bus cable
shielding must also be touch protected (IP 20.)
Zone 2 and Zone 22 requirements

Observe the following rules in Zone 2:
• See items 1 to 5: Zone 1 and Zone 21 requirements
Requirements for the Safe Area

• See points 1 to 4: Zone 1 and Zone 21 requirements

A5E00247483-02 5-21
Wiring
Wiring Terminal Module TM-IM/EM

Connecting PROFIBUS RS 485-IS (left module)
1. Insert the bus connector into the PROFIBUS RS 485-IS socket.
Note
The shielding of the bus cable is connected in the terminal module TM-IM/EM via
a spring contact to the mounting rail and therefore with the equipotential bonding
PA.
2. Tighten the retainer screws of the bus connector using a 3.5 mm screwdriver
(torque: 0.5 N/m to 0.7 N/m).
3. Mark the bus cable as ”EEx i bus cable”.
Terminal module TM-IM/EM
For terminal
assignments,
refer to chapter 9.3
Connector for IM 152: Connector for the electronic

PROFIBUS RS 485-IS module:
channel 0 to 3, or
channel 0 to 7
Figure 5-8 Wiring Terminal Module TM-IM/EM (PROFIBUS RS 485-IS)
Note
The PROFIBUS RS 485-IS of ET 200iSP is intrinsically safe due to the integration
of the RS 485-IS coupler. The bus connector may thus be removed or inserted in
run in Zone 1 and Zone 2. In Zones 21 and 22, you may only open the ET 200iSP
enclosure in the absence of explosive dust!
Connecting sensors and actuators (right-hand module)

See chapter 5.5.7.

5-22 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
Wiring Terminal Module TM-IM/IM

Close both bus connectors for the redundant IMs. This procedure is explained for
the TM-IM/EM in Connecting PROFIBUS RS 485-IS (Left Module). Repeat the
same steps for the right module.
Terminal module TM-IM/IM
For terminal
assignments,
refer to section 9.4
Connector for IM 152 (a): Connector for IM 152 (b):

PROFIBUS RS 485-IS PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
Figure 5-9 Wiring Terminal Module TM-IM/IM (PROFIBUS RS 485-IS)

A5E00247483-02 5-23
Wiring
5.5.7 Wiring Terminal Modules TM-EM/EM
Properties
Terminal module TM-E forms the interface to the actuators and sensors.
Requirements
• Observe the wiring rules.
Required Tools
Figure Wiring Terminal Module TM-E

1. Strip the sensor / actuator cables.
2. Terminate the various wires in the screw or spring terminals.
Terminal module TM-EM/EM
For terminal assignments

refer to chapter 9.5
Connector for the electronic Connector for the electronic module:

module: channel 0 to 3, or
channel 0 to 3, or channel 0 to 7
channel 0 to 7
Figure 5-10 Wiring the Terminal module TM-EM/EM
Note
The inputs and outputs of the ET 200iSP distributed I/O device are intrinsically
safe. Disconnecting wires to the sensors, actuators, and HART field devices on
the terminal module TM-EM/EM is permitted during operation in zone 1 and
zone 2. In Zones 21 and 22, you may only open the ET 200iSP enclosure in the
absence of explosive dust!

5-24 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
5.5.8 Terminating the Cable Shielding
Features
Connect the shielding of the cables of analog electronic modules to the grounding
busbar PA of the enclosure.
Requirements
• Tinned or galvanized standard mounting rail to EN 50022 (35 x 15/ 35 x 7.5)
and fastening accessories
• Shielding terminals (6ES7 728-8MA11)
• Installation of the grounding conductor on the standard mounting rail:
– Zone 1 and Zone 21: EEx e terminal. Use a Weidmüller terminal WP 16/E
(see the order numbers in appendix A)
– Zone 2, Zone 22 or safe area: standard terminal
• Screwdriver with 4.5 mm blade
• Stripping tool
Terminating the Cable Shielding

The procedure below describes an example of shielding termination: You may also
use the enclosure features to terminate the shielding.
1. Install the standard mounting rail in the cubicle below the ET 200iSP
(clearance to ET 200iSP: approx. 40 mm.)
2. Strip the cable insulation in the area of the standard mounting rail
(approx. 40 mm).
3. Attach the cable to the standard mounting rail by means of the shielding
terminal element (torque: 0.8 N/m to 1.2 N/m.) Make sure that the shielding
terminal element contacts only the cable shielding.

A5E00247483-02 5-25
Wiring
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to terminate further cable shielding.
Standard mounting
rail for shielding
termination
Shielding
EEx e terminal terminals
Equipotential
busbar PA
Figure 5-11 Terminating the Cable Shielding
Connecting the standard mounting rail to the grounding busbar PA

1. Strip the grounding conductor (4 to 16 mm2) and terminate it on the grounding
terminal of the standard mounting rail (torque: 2 to 2.5 N/m.)
2. Terminate the other end to the grounding busbar PA.
5.5.9 Connecting a TC Sensor Module
Properties
The TC sensor module can be used for the internal compensation of the reference
junction temperature. It is supplied with the 4AI TC.
Requirements
The TC sensor module can only be connected to terminal modules with screw
terminals.
Required Tools

5-26 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
How to Connect a TC Sensor Module

1. Insert the TC sensor module into the third terminal row of the terminal module:
conductors in 3, 7, 11; pin in terminal 15.
2. Tighten the TC sensor module using a 3.5 mm screwdriver. Tighten the screws
of terminals 3, 7 and 11.
15
3 7 11
Figure 5-12 TC-Sensor Module
5.6 Inserting and Labeling the Power Supply, Interface Module, and
Electronic Modules
Features
• The modules are mounted onto the relevant terminal modules.
• Using a labeling strip, you can identify the interface module and the electronic
modules.
• When you first insert an interface or electronic module, the coding element
engages into the terminal module. This prevents the wrong module being
inserted.
The interface module and the electronic modules are self-coding.
Requirements
Keep to the insertion rules. See chapter 3.

A5E00247483-02 5-27
Wiring
Required Tools
Installing the Power Supply PS

1. Hang the Power Supply into the top of the bearing of terminal module TM-PS-A.
2. Swivel the Power Supply down until it engages on the terminal module.
3. If your configuration has a power supply for redundancy, repeat steps 1 and 2
on terminal module TM-PS-B.
Figure 5-13 Installing the Power Supply PS
Danger
! Risk of injury!
Despite its extremely compact design, the Power Supply PS is nonetheless quite
heavy with a weight of 2.7 kg, i.e. make sure to keep a firm hold on it.
Removing the Power Supply PS

1. Using a 4.5 mm screwdriver, push the slider on the bottom of terminal module
TM-PS-A or TM-PS-B down until it engages.
2. Swing the power supply out of the bearing of terminal module TM-PS-A or
TM-PS-B.
Caution
! During operation, the temperature of the Power Supply PS enclosure may rise up
to 90 ° C. There is a risk of burns!

5-28 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
Installing and Labeling Interface Modules and Electronic Modules

1. Hang the interface or electronic module into the bearing on top of the terminal
module.
2. Swivel the interface or electronic module down until it engages on the terminal
module.
3. Use the included labeling strips to identify the module.
4. Finally, reinsert the labeling strip in the interface or electronic module.
Figure 5-14 Installing and Labeling Interface Modules and Electronic Modules
Warning
! Ensure the correct assignment between the terminal and electronic module with
respect to their application.
Note
If any gaps (of an electronic module) develop due to the ET 200iSP configuration,
the following rules apply:
• The gap is located at the last slot of ET 200iSP: Insert a slot cover or a reserve
module into this gap. See chapter 4.5.
• The gap is located at another slot (for electronic modules): Insert a reserve
module into this gap.

A5E00247483-02 5-29
Wiring
Removing Interface and Electronic Modules

1. Use a screwdriver to release the interlock on the bottom of the interface or
electronic module.
2. Swivel it up.
3. Take the module off the bearer of the terminal module.
Figure 5-15 Removing Interface and Electronic Modules
Replacing a Defective Interface or Electronics Module

You have already removed the interface or electronic module:
1. Remove the detachable part of the coding element from the new interface or
electronic module. The coding element is located on the bottom of the interface
or electronic module.
2. Mount the new interface or electronic module (same type) onto the terminal
module until you hear it lock in place.
3. Label the new interface or electronic module.
Note
Check the coding element before you install the new interface or electronic
module.

5-30 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
Changing the Type of an Electronic Module

You have already removed the electronics module:
1. Push the coding element out of the terminal module using a screwdriver.
2. Insert these coding elements into the old electronic module.
3. Mount the new electronic module (of a different type) onto the terminal module
until you hear it lock in place.
4. Label the new electronic module.
Danger
! If you make changes to the coding, this can lead to dangerous states in your plant.
In this case, check your system and adapt it accordingly. Observe the safety data
of the electronic module.
Figure 5-16 Changing the Type of an Electronic Module

A5E00247483-02 5-31
Wiring
5.7 Setting the PROFIBUS address
Properties
With the PROFIBUS address, you specify the address at which the ET 200iSP
distributed I/O device will be accessed on PROFIBUS RS 485-IS.
Requirements
• The PROFIBUS DP address for the ET 200iSP is set on the interface module
by means of DIL switches. The DIL switches are located on the front panel of
the interface module, and are protected by a hinged cover.
• The permitted PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 125.
• Each address can only be assigned once on PROFIBUS.
Required Tools
Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address

1. Open the cover to the right.
2. Set the required PROFIBUS DP address at the DIL switches using a
screwdriver.
3. Close the cover again.

5-32 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
Changing the PROFIBUS address

1. Set PROFIBUS DP address ”0” at the DIL switches, using a screwdriver.
2. Cycle power off and on at the ET 200iSP Power Supply PS. The memory is
cleared when the SF LED flashes (0.5 Hz, duration approx. 10 s).
ET 200iSP saves the parameters to retentive flash memory in IM 152. When
you first commission or modify the system, you should therefore delete these
parameters.
3. Now you can set the new PROFIBUS DP address at the DIL switches. Once
again, cycle power off and on at the Power Supply PS.
Interface module
OFF ON Example:
DP address =
64 64
32 + 32
16
8
4
2 + 2
1 + 1
* _______
= 99
* reserved
Figure 5-17 Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address
Note
If you change the PROFIBUS DP address without previously deleting the retentive
parameters in the flash memory, ET 200iSP cannot log on to PROFIBUS DP with
the old or new address.

A5E00247483-02 5-33
Wiring
5.8 Inserting and Changing the SIMATIC Micro Memory

Card (MMC)
Features
• A SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) is used as memory module for IM 152.
The MMC supports firmware updates.
• The useful life of an MMC is determined in particular by the following factors:
– The number of delete or programming cycles
– external influences such as the ambient temperature.
At an ambient temperature of up to 60° C, the life of an MMC is 10 years with a
maximum of 100,000 delete/write cycles.
Caution
! Always ensure that the maximum number of delete/write cycles is not exceeded to
prevent data loss.
Requirements
Memory modules available:
Table 5-10 Available MMCs
Type Order numbers

MMC 2M 6ES7 953-8LL00-0AA0
MMC 4M 6ES7 953-8LM00-0AA0
MMC 8M 6ES7 953-8LP10-0AA0

5-34 A5E00247483-02
Wiring
Inserting and changing the MMC

1. The MMC supports hot-swapping. The chamfered edge of the MMC prevents
faulty insertion and protects from polarity reversal.
IM 152 checks the MMC for the FW update only during startup. The insertion or
removal of an MMC while the power is on therefore does not take effect until
the next time power is cycled at the Power Supply PS.
2. The module slot is equipped with an extractor which allows you to remove the
MMC. Using a small screwdriver or a pen, press down the extractor and then
remove the card.
IM 152
MMC
6ES7 953Ć8Lx00Ć0AA0
Module slot
Card
Memory
Micro
SIMATIC
SIEMENS
Extractor
Figure 5-18 Position of the MMC Slot on the IM 152
Reference
For information on firmware updates by means of MMC, refer to chapter 7.6.

A5E00247483-02 5-35
Wiring

5-36 A5E00247483-02
Commissioning and Diagnostics 6
Function Principle of Configuring
PCS 7-OS
Operating and monitoring
with WinCC
Industrial Ethernet
Configuring and Configuring

parameter using GSD file
CPU
CFC PC assignment using Assigning parameters
S7-400
STEP7 with SIMATIC PDM
PCS 7 driver
1 2 3
PROFIBUS DP
RS 485-IS coupler
PROFIBUS
RS 485-IS 1 Cyclic data exchange
User data of inputs and
outputs / value status
2 Cyclic data exchange

Configuration
Parameters
Reeading identification data
Diagnostics interrupts (only
S7 DP, DPV1)
3 Acyclic data exchange
Parameters
area: Zone 1
Reading and writing
Zone 0 identification data
m
HART accesses
A
Figure 6-1 Function Principle of Configuring

A5E00247483-02 6-1
Configuring
Configuration involves configuring and setting parameters for the ET 200iSP using
a programming device (PG).
Configuring
When you configure your project, you set only the basic properties of the DP slave
(for example, network parameters, module selection in HW Config). You configure
the ET 200iSP with
• STEP 7
• COM PROFIBUS or with suitable configuration software (using the GSD file).
During parameter assignment, you set the parameters for the ET 200iSP and the
HART field devices.
• With STEP 7, you assign parameters for the ET 200iSP from HW Config.
• Outside STEP 7, you assign parameters for the ET 200iSP and the HART field
devices using SIMATIC PDM. SIMATIC PDM must be installed as a
stand-alone version.
• All modules have basic parameter settings when they leave the factory (refer to
the parameter defaults.) After you turn on the power supply for the ET 200iSP,
the modules are initially in a safe state:
– Digital inputs: Input values 0, value status 0
– Digital outputs: off current or voltage (no substitute values)
– Analog inputs: input value 7FFFH
– Analog outputs: off current or voltage (no substitute values)
– All parameters (that you can set with SIMATIC PDM): disabled
Once parameters are assigned correctly (using HW Config or SIMATIC
PDM), they are saved to non-volatile memory in the modules. These
parameters are applied then next time you power up the Power Supply PS.
The parameters will be deleted from the non-volatile memory if you set the
PROFIBUS address to ”0” and then switch the power supply off and on at
Power Supply PS.
Cyclic data exchange via PROFIBUS DP

Data are exchanged between the CPU (for example, S7-400) and the ET 200iSP.
The cyclic user data of the inputs and outputs, including the value status of the
inputs, are transferred.
For plant visualization, these data can be prepared by the PCS 7 driver and the
CFC (Continuous Function Chart) on the CPU and then displayed on the OS with
WinCC.

6-2 A5E00247483-02
Acyclic data exchange via PROFIBUS DP

The ET 200iSP and the PG / PC (SIMATIC PDM) exchange data in acyclic mode.
ET 200iSP receives its parameters using acyclic data exchange. Identification data
is also transferred and indicated in SIMATIC PDM.
• Diagnostics and alarms (with S7 DP slave and DPV1 slave)
• Data records
DPV0, S7 DP, or DPV1 slave

The ET 200iSP can be operated as a DPV0, S7 DP, or DPV1 slave. The table
below shows a comparison of the functions.
Table 6-1 Comparison of DPV1, S7 DP and DPV0
Function DPV0 S7 DP DPV1 Note

slave slave slave
Parameter assignment and configuration with X ––– X
GSD file
Configuration and parameter assignment with X1) X X1)
HW Config
Cyclic data exchange X X X
Acyclic data exchange Class 1 services ––– X X
(read/write data record): (parameter
• Free access to assignment
parameters on the field master, e.g.
device PLC)
• Reassignment of
Class 2 services X X X
parameters of the
(e.g. PG/OP)
application process
Diagnostics One interrupt can be
reported per diagnostic
• ID-specific diagnostics X X X
datagram. For DPV1 and
• Module status X X X S7 DP slaves, an interrupt
consists of a slave
• Channel-specific diagnostics X X X
diagnostic accompanied by
Interrupts an acknowledgment
mechanism not included in
• Diagnostic interrupt ––– X2) X
DPV0.
• Process alarm ––– X2) X
• Remove/insert interrupt ––– X X
• Update interrupt ––– ––– X
• Time stamping ––– X X
1) If you are configuring the ET 200iSP using the GSD file (in HW Config), you will need SIMATIC PDM for
parameter assignment.
2) For the S7 DP slave, diagnostic and process interrupts are only reported when the CPU is in RUN mode.

A5E00247483-02 6-3
Software requirements
Table 6-2 Software requirements
Engineering software Version Notes

used
STEP 7 STEP 7 V5.3, Service Pack The ET 200iSP is available
1 or higher, and current HW in the hardware catalog of
update HW Config. You configure
and assign parameters for
the ET 200iSP in HW
Config.
STEP 7 and SIMATIC PDM STEP 7 V4.02 or higher You need the GSD file for
(SIMATIC PDM is integrated; the ET 200iSP and
it is also available as a configure with HW Config...
stand-alone version)
SIMATIC PDM V6.0 or ... and configure in
higher SIMATIC PDM.
PCS 7 (includes, among V6.1 or higher See the PCS7
other things, STEP 7 and documentation.
SIMATIC PDM)
COM PROFIBUS and COM PROFIBUS Version You need the GSD file for
SIMATIC PDM (SIMATIC 5.0 or higher the ET 200iSP and
PDM is integrated; it is also configure with COM
available as a stand-alone PROFIBUS...
version)
higher SIMATIC PDM.
Other configuration software Other engineering software You need the GSD file of the
and SIMATIC PDM (for information on versions, ET 200iSP and configure
(SIMATIC PDM is integrated; refer to vendors) with a suitable engineering
it is also available as a tool...
stand-alone version)
higher SIMATIC PDM.
Note
If you are configuring the ET 200iSP in STEP 7 using the GSD file, you will need
SIMATIC PDM for parameter assignment.

6-4 A5E00247483-02
6.1 Configuring in STEP 7
Features
• ET 200iSP is included in the hardware catalog of STEP 7
• Diagnostic interrupts, process interrupts, remove/insert interrupts (S7-400 only)
and time stamping are supported.
Requirements
The required software is installed on the PG/PC or PCS 7 ES.
Configuration and parameter assignment procedures

1. Start SIMATIC Manager.
2. Configure the ET 200iSP with HW Config.
– Create a new project.
– Drag-and-drop the modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration
table
3. Configure time stamping (option).
4. Double-click the first module of ET 200iSP in the configuration table and set its
parameters.
5. Configure all other modules of ET 200iSP.
6. Save the configuration, or download it to the DP master.

A5E00247483-02 6-5
6.2 Configuring with GSD File and SIMATIC PDM
Features
ET 200iSP is integrated as a DPV0 or DPV1 slave.
Requirements
• The required software is installed on the PG/PC or PCS 7 ES.
• You need GSD file SI028110.GSG. You require the GSD file from the Internet
URL http//www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd.
The GSD file is integrated into the configuration software as described below:
Note
The GSD file for the ET 200iSP is based on Revision 4. Result: Not all parameters
are available in COM PROFIBUS.
Make sure that your configuration tool supports GSD files with Revision 4 so that
all parameters will be available.
STEP 7 V4.02 or higher COM PROFIBUS Version 5.0 or higher

1. Start STEP 7, open HW Config, then 1. Copy the GSD file from the ET 200iS to
select Options > Install new GSD file. the COM PROFIBUS directory:
2. From the next dialog box, select the ...COMPB5\GSD (default). Copy the bit
GSD file you want to install and confirm map file to the ...COMPB5\BITMAPS
with OK. directory.
Result: The ET 200iSP appears in the 2. Start COM PROFIBUS, then select File
PROFIBUS-DP directory of the > Read in GSD file.
hardware catalog. Result: ET 200iSP appears in the
hardware catalog during the slave
configuration.
• To work online with SIMATIC PDM, you require a PROFIBUS-DP interface,

such as CP 5611 (6GK1 561-1AA00). The CP must be set to the
PROFIBUS-DP interface (in SIMATIC Manager: Options > Set PG/PC
interface).
Warning
! If you are configuring with the GSD file and SIMATIC PDM, create your project in
two steps:
1. Step: Configuring by means of GSD file
2. Step: Assigning parameters with SIMATIC PDM
Always ensure that the configuration (1st step) is consistent to the parameter
assignment in SIMATIC PDM (2nd step). The slot assignment of step 1 must
match the parameters generated in SIMATIC PDM in step 2.

6-6 A5E00247483-02
How to configure the system
STEP 7 V4.02 or higher COM PROFIBUS V5.0 or higher, or any

other engineering tool
1. Start SIMATIC Manager. 1. Run COM PROFIBUS or the
2. Integrate the GSD file into HW Config engineering tool.
(see requirements). 2. Integrate the GSD file into COM
3. Configure the ET 200iSP with HW PROFIBUS or into the engineering
Config. software (see requirements).
– Create a new project. 3. Configure ET 200iSP using COM
PROFIBUS or your engineering tool.
– Drag-and-drop the modules from the
hardware catalog to the 4. Save the configuration, or download it to
configuration table. the DP master.
4. Save the configuration, or download it to
the DP master.
How to assign parameters to the electronic modules

1. Start SIMATIC Manager.
2. Select the process devices network view as the default view with Options >
Settings > View > Process network view.
3. Select File > New to create a new project. The ”New” dialog box opens. Enter
your project name, and confirm with ”OK.”
4. Next, select the Networks icon, then right-click and select Insert new object >
PC and Insert new object > PROFIBUS DP network.
5. From the left-hand pane of the window, select the PC icon. An icon labeled DP
Interface now appears in the right-hand pane of the window. Right-click this
icon, then select ”Object Properties.” From the dialog box, select ”PROFIBUS
DP Networks” under networks. Confirm with ”OK”.
6. Now select the icon labeled ”PROFIBUS DP Network”, right-click and select
Insert new object > Remote I/O. On the next dialog box, enter:
Name: Name of the ET 200iSP station (ET 200iSP, for example).
Address: The PROFIBUS address you set at the interface module.
Number of ”Remote I/O” objects: Number of ET 200iSP stations you
configure.
Confirm with ”OK.” Result: The ET 200iSP station is now shown on the
right-hand pane of the window.
7. Select the remote I/O object (ET 200iSP) you created in the previous step, then
right-click and select Insert new object > Remote I/O module. On the next
dialog box, enter:
Name: Name of the module (8 DI NAMUR, for example).
Address: Slot of the first electronic module in the ET 200iSP station (4).
Number of ”Remote I/O” objects: Number of electronic modules in the
ET 200iSP station.
Confirm with ”OK.” Result: The electronic modules are now displayed on the
right-hand pane of the window.

A5E00247483-02 6-7
8. Select the first remote I/O object (electronic module in the left pane of SIMATIC
Manager), then right-click and select the Open Objects menu command. On the
next dialog dialog, ”SIMATIC PDM Select Device”, select SIEMENS >
ET 200iSP > Modules, then confirm with ”OK.”
9. From the next dialog box, select ”Specialist” as the user and confirm with ”OK.”
In this mode, you can assign parameters. Result: SIMATIC PDM is started.
10.Once SIMATIC PDM has started, select the relevant electronic module as the
”module type.” Next, click in one of the gray fields to update the window. Result:
The parameters and identification data of the electronics module are indicated.
11. Next, set the parameters of the electronic module. Select File > Save to save
your changes, then select Device > Download to Device to download the
parameters to the electronic module. Close SIMATIC PDM.
12.Follow the procedure described in items 8 through 11 for each of the ET 200iSP
objects (electronic modules).
How to program the interface module

1. Select the remote I/O object (ET 200iSP in the left pane of SIMATIC Manager),
then right-click and select Open Objects. On the next dialog, ”SIMATIC PDM
Select Device”, select SIEMENS > ET 200iSP > Head-End, then confirm with
”OK”.
2. From the next dialog box, select ”Specialist” as the user and confirm with ”OK.”
In this mode, you can assign parameters. Result: SIMATIC PDM is started.
3. Now set the parameters of the interface module. Select File > Save to save
your changes, then select Device > Download to Device to download the
parameters to the interface module. Close SIMATIC PDM.
How to assign parameters to all modules of ET 200iSP

1. Select the remote I/O object (ET 200iSP in the left pane of SIMATIC Manager),
then right-click and select Open Objects. On the next dialog, ”SIMATIC PDM
Select Device”, select SIEMENS > ET 200iSP > Head-End, then confirm with
”OK”.
2. In the next dialog, select ”Specialist” as the user and confirm with ”OK.”
3. Upload all parameters of the modules by selecting File > Full upload to
PG/PC.
4. Set the parameters for all required modules. From the left-hand pane of the
SIMATIC PDM window, you can select all the modules of the ET 200iSP.
5. Select File > Save to save your changes and update the files.
6. Select Device > Full download to device to download all parameters to the
modules. Close SIMATIC PDM.
Reference
For more information on assigning parameters, refer to the documentation and
online help for SIMATIC PDM.

6-8 A5E00247483-02
6.3 Commissioning and Startup of ET 200iSP
Safety information
Note
Always observe national regulations when you commission the system.
Note
Always observe the guidelines according to EN 60 079-17 when performing
operation checks. This standard also contains the directives of international
standard IEC 60 079-17.
Performing tests
Note
You must provide for the safety of your facility. Before a system undergoes final
commissioning, you should perform a complete function test and the necessary
safety tests.
Incorporate foreseeable errors when planning the tests. This will enable you to
avoid endangering persons or property during operation.
6.3.1 Requirements for Commissioning
Table 6-3 Requirements for Commissioning
Step Prior Activity See...

1 ET 200iSP is installed Chapter Installation
2 PROFIBUS address is set on the ET 200iSP Chapter Wiring
3 ET 200iSP is wired Chapter Wiring
4 Zone 1, Zone 21, Zone 2 and Zone 22:
Additional check of the installation and wiring of
the ET 200iSP, connections, enclosure, and
supply lines.
5 ET 200iSP is configured and the parameters are Chapter Commissioning and
set diagnostics
6 Supply voltage for DP master is switched on Manual for DP master
7 DP master switched to RUN mode Manual for DP master

A5E00247483-02 6-9
6.3.2 Commissioning the ET 200iSP
Table 6-4 Commissioning the ET 200iSP
Step Procedure See ...

1 Switch on the power supply to ET 200iSP. Chapter Wiring
2 Observe the STATUS LEDs on the ET 200iSP • Chapter Commissioning and
and on the DP master. diagnostics
• Manual for DP master
Note
ET 200iSP supports default startup mode.
In this case the following conditions apply:
• Parameters already transferred will be saved, and are used after you switch on
the Power Supply PS.
• You can configure the system based on the AKF (general identification format
to PROFIBUS standard.)

6-10 A5E00247483-02
6.3.3 Startup of ET 200iSP
Parameter ”Operation if preset

configurationtuactual configuration”
disabled
Switch on the supply
voltage for the DP slave
DP slave sets outputs to ”0” and accepts the

set PROFIBUS address
”ON” LED is lit, and ”BF” LED flashes or ”BF”

LED is lit (no DP master found)
DP slave receives configuration data from

the DP master
Configuration data no
correct
yes
LED ”BF” is switched off, and the inputs are
enabled. Outputs when DP master is in STOP Remedy: Alignment of online and
mode: Substitute values; when DP master is in offline configuration data
RUN mode; current output values; data
exchange is possible.
ET 200iSP is configured
(last valid configuration)
Figure 6-2 Startup of ET 200iSP

A5E00247483-02 6-11
6.3.4 Startup of ET 200iSP with IM 152 redundancy
Principle of operation
When redundancy is configured, the two inserted IM 152 modules start up
independently.
Figure 6-3 illustrates the startup of the IM 152 (a). For the IM 152 (b), the following
flow chart applies with the designations reversed accordingly.
ET 200iSP
TM-PS-A TM-IM/IM TM-EM/EM TM-EM/EM
Power IM 152 IM 152 EM EM EM EM

Supply PS
(a) (b)

6-12 A5E00247483-02
Switch on the supply voltage

for IM 152 (a)
All LEDs illuminate for a

few seconds during internal tests
The ”ON” and ”BF” LEDs illuminate
IM 152 (a)
No Startup as in
checks whether it is Redundancy
inserted on not configured Figure 6-2
TM-IM/IM
Yes
IM 152 (a) checks No ... Then the

whether the IM 152 (b) IM 152 (a) is the
is inserted active module
Time
synchronization
Yes
Has the
IM 152 (b) already
received configuration data
No IM 152 (a) receives the
from the DP master, checked it against
configuration data from
the ET 200iSP configuration,
the DP master
and started to exchange
data with the
DP master?
Configuration
Yes data agree with the No
... Then the IM 152 (a) is
actual configuration?
the passive module
IM 152 (a) receives all data of

Yes
the ET 200iSP from the IM 152
(b) (if available)
- Actual configuration The ”BF” LED is Data are exchanged only
- PROFIBUS state extinguished; the ”ACT” with the EMs corresponding
- Pending interrupts LED illuminates. Data to the preset configuration
- Time stamp messages exchange is possible (the IM 152 reports the EMs
that are different or missing
in the identifier-related
IM 152 (a) receives diagnostic data)
the configuration data from
the associated DP master
Do the
No Configuration data are
configuration data agree
rejected, error message
with those of the
sent to DP master Time
IM 152(b)?
synchroni-
Yes zation
”BF” LED is extinguished. IM 152 (a)
Adjust configuration data in
is ready for data exchange and waits
the DP master
in standby mode if a switchover is
required
Figure 6-3 Startup of the ET 200iSP with IM 152 redundancy

A5E00247483-02 6-13
6.3.5 Start up for time synchronization / time stamping of signal

changes
Principle of operation
Startup of the ET 200iSP is

complete.
IM 152 is ready to exchange data
with the DP master.
Clock in IM 152
Reading the time datagram

Do the
time stamp parameters
No match the configuration Setting the IM 152 clock
available?
current time-of-day
Yes
Clock
Error message sent to DP in IM 152 No
master; is set?
digital input signals will not be The time is set to
time stamped. 01.01.1984; 00:00 h
Yes
This has no influence on
”standard” data exchange with
the DP master.
Generate startup data:
read the states of the configured digital Redundancy?
inputs;
process interrupt sent to DP master so
that the message buffer will be read
Monitoring of configured digital inputs:

if a change occurs, generation of the Redundancy?
message and entry in the message
buffer
Diagnosis of the time datagram:

upon failure or if time difference Redundancy?
exceeds the tolerance range,
generate a special message and
entry in the message buffer
Process interrupt sent to DP master If redundancy is configured, the

so that the message buffer will be read passive IM 152 always has an image
of the time stamp messages.
Figure 6-4 Starting Up Time Synchronization / Time Stamping

6-14 A5E00247483-02
6.4 Assigning Parameters for the ET 200iSP during

Operation using SIMATIC PDM
Properties
• When you configure the system in SIMATIC PDM, you can edit module
parameters in RUN. Each new parameter setting that is correct is accepted by
the module and saved to non-volatile memory.
• Faulty parameter will be ignored. In this case, the module retains its current
parameter status.
• If the modules are restarted (after turning the supply voltage of the ET 200iSP
off –––> on), the current parameter assignment in the non-volatile memory of
the modules is applied (SF LED of the modules is off).
• The parameter assignment in the non-volatile memory of the modules is applied
regardless of the communication between the ET 200iSP and the DP master.
• The outputs of the modules are controlled by the class 1 DP master.
Requirements
SIMATIC PDM Version 6.0 or higher (integrated or stand-alone version)
Procedure for Reassigning Parameters

1. Run SIMATIC PDM.
2. Open the project.
3. Change the view in SIMATIC Manager: select View > Process Network View.
4. From the left-hand pane of the window, select the required ET 200iSP module.
Right-click the module, then select Open Objects from the menu. Result:
SIMATIC PDM is started.
5. Upload the parameters and/or I&M of the module to the PG/PC.
6. Edit the parameters and/or the I&M.
7. Save the changes, then download the parameters and/ or identification data to
the module.
8. Check: Upload the parameters and/or identification data of the module to the
PG/PC once again and check that the new parameter settings.
Reference
For more information on parameter assignment, refer to the documentation and
online help for SIMATIC PDM.

A5E00247483-02 6-15
6.5 Diagnostics by Means of the Process Input Image
Features
In addition to the diagnostic information provided by the LED and module/DP
diagnostics, the module also provides information about the validity of every input
signal, i.e., the value status. The value status is entered in the process image
along with the input signal.
Value Status of the Digital Input Modules

The value status is additional binary information of a digital input signal. The value
status is entered in the process image input table at the same time as the process
signal and provides information on the validity of the input signal.
The value status is influenced by the functions wire break/short-circuit detection,
flutter monitoring, pulse stretching and plausibility check of changeover contacts.
• S7 format with value status
– Input signal is valid ”1B”
– Input signal is invalid ”0B”
Value Status of the Analog Input Modules

The input values of the analog input modules are written to the PII. If a measured
value is invalid, the following value status is entered as the input value:
• S7 format
– Input signal is valid No value status
– Input signal is invalid ”7FFFH” (bits 0 to 15 of the analog value)
Assignment of Inputs and Value Status in the PII

Each channel of the module is assigned a value status in the PII. For information
on this assignment, refer to Chapter D.
Evaluation of the Value Status in PCS 7

The value status is evaluated using the PCS 7 channel driver.
1. The PCS 7 channel driver reads the value status from the PII...
2. ...and forms the quality code for PCS 7.
Reference
For a detailed information on evaluating and processing the respective input
signals, refer to the PCS 7 documentation.

6-16 A5E00247483-02
6.6 Status and Error LEDs on the ET 200iSP
IM 152 Interface Module
SF Group fault (red)

BF Bus error (red)
ACT Active IM in redundant system (yellow)
ON Power supply (green)
PS1 Power Supply PS 1 status (green, right-hand PS)
PS2 Power Supply PS 2 status (green, left-hand PS)
Figure 6-5 LED Display on IM 152 Interface Module
Status and Error LEDs on the IM 152

• LED PS1: a ––> power supply is switched on at Power Supply 1
• LED PS2: ON ––> For Power Supply PS when redundancy is configured:
power supply is switched on at Power Supply 2
Table 6-5 Status and Error LEDs on the IM 152
LEDs Meaning Remedy

SF BF ACT ON
off off off off No voltage. Switch on the power at the Power
Supply PS.
Defective Power Supply PS or Replace the Power Supply PS or
IM 152. IM 152.
on on on on Hardware test after power on. –––
off off * on Data exchange between the –––
ET 200iSP and the DP master.
Preset and actual configuration
are consistent, no diagnostics.
on off * on Data exchange between the Check the process wiring.
ET 200iSP and the DP master, at Check the electronic modules.
least one diagnostic event and/or
Check the preset and actual
one inconsistency in the preset
configuration (wrong or missing
and actual configuration is
module).
present.

A5E00247483-02 6-17
Table 6-5 Status and Error LEDs on the IM 152, continued
LEDs Meaning Remedy

SF BF ACT ON
* on * on No connection with the DP master Check the bus installation (correct
(transmission rate detection). seating of the bus connector).
Cause: Check the terminating resistor and
PROFIBUS DP communication is the RS 485-IS coupler.
down.
* flashes * on IM 152 is not configured properly - Check the configuration
no data exchange is occurring (PROFIBUS DP address).
between the DP master and the Check the preset and actual
ET 200iSP. configuration (wrong or missing
Causes: module).
wrong PROFIBUS DP address. Check the bus configuration (bus
Inconsistent preset and actual connector, terminating resistor,
configuration. RS 485-IS coupler).
Disturbance on PROFIBUS DP.
on off * on Illegal PROFIBUS DP address. Assign IM 152 a valid PROFIBUS
Causes: DP address.
PROFIBUS DP address 126 or After you change the PROFIBUS
127 is set. DP address, always delete the
retentive data.
PROFIBUS DP address was
changed without having deleted
retentive data.
on on * off Deleting retentive data (power on –––
with PROFIBUS DP address ”0”,
no MMC found).
off flashes * off Retentive data are deleted, switch Set the required PROFIBUS DP
at off power. address before you power on the
0.5 Hz system.
on on * off Operating system update with –––
MMC is busy.
off flashes * off Operating system update MMC –––
at completed, remove the MMC and
0.5 Hz shut down.
on flashes * off Error when updating the operating Use a compatible operating
at system with MMC (incompatible system. Do not remove the MMC
0.5 Hz OS or wrong MMC, for example). during the update.
on flashes * off Internal error when updating the Repeat the update operation. The
at operating system with MMC. internal memory is defective if the
0.5 Hz LEDs show the same error
pattern.
* off on on The IM 152 is exchanging data –––
with the DP master and the
electronic modules of the
ET 200iSP.
If redundancy is configured, this
IM 152 is the active interface
module of the ET 200iSP.

6-18 A5E00247483-02
Table 6-5 Status and Error LEDs on the IM 152, continued
LEDs Meaning Remedy

SF BF ACT ON
* off off on The IM 152 is receiving power. If –––
redundancy is configured, this
IM 152 is the passive interface
module, that is, no data are
exchanged with the electronic
modules.
flashes off off on If redundancy is configured, this Bring the H-system to the
at IM 152 is the passive interface redundant state.
0.5 Hz module and is not ready for a
** bumpless switchover (for
example, the particular CPU is in
STOP mode).
* irrelevant
** After the transition to redundant operation, the SF LED continues to flash for another 20 s.

A5E00247483-02 6-19
1
5 I/O status (green)
9
13
3
7 Input status (green)
11
15
Figure 6-6 LED Displays on the Digital Electronic Modules
Status and Error LEDs on the Digital Electronic Modules
Table 6-6 Status and Error LEDs on the Digital Electronic Modules
LEDs Meaning Remedy

SF 1 5 9 13 3 7 11 15
on Wrong module present or a Evaluate the
diagnostic message is queued. diagnostic
information.
on Input DI0 or counter output 1 or
output DO0 enabled
on Input DI1 or counter output 2 or
output DO1 enabled
on Input DI2 or GATE 1 or
output DO2 enabled
on Input DI3 or GATE 2 or
output DO3 enabled
on Input DI4 or Reset
counter 1 enabled
counter 2 enabled
output 1 enabled
output 2 enabled

6-20 A5E00247483-02
Figure 6-7 LED Displays on the Analog Electronic Modules
Status and Error LEDs on the Analog Electronic Modules
Table 6-7 Status and Error LEDs on the Analog Electronic Modules
LEDs Meaning Remedy

SF
on Wrong module present or a Evaluate the diagnostic information.
diagnostic message is queued.
6.7 Diagnostics in STEP 7
6.7.1 Introduction
Introduction
The slave diagnostics function is compliant with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
Depending on the DP master, diagnostic information can be read out for all DP
slaves that comply with the standard using STEP 7.
The reading out and structure of the slave diagnostics is described in the following
sections.

A5E00247483-02 6-21
6.7.2 Reading Diagnostics Data
Options of reading diagnostic data
Table 6-8 Reading Diagnostics Data Using STEP 7
Automation Block or tab in STEP 7 Application See .

system with
DP master
SIMATIC S7 ”DP Slave Diagnostics” Slave diagnostics in plain ”Hardware Diagnostics” in the
tab text on the STEP 7 user STEP 7 online help
interface
SFC 13 ”DPNRM_DG” Reading out slave For information on the structure,
diagnostics (store in data refer to the Structure of Slave
area of the user program) Diagnostics section; for
information on SFCs, refer to the
SFC59 ”RD_REC” Reading out data records
System and Standard Functions
(DS0/1) of the S7
reference manual.
diagnostics (store in the
data area of the user
program)
Example of Reading Out S7 Diagnostics with SFC 13 ”DPNRM _DG”

Here, you will find an example of how you can read out the slave diagnostics for a
DP slave in the STEP 7 user program using SFC 13.
Assumptions
For this STEP 7 user program, the following is assumed:
• The diagnostic address of the ET 200iSP is 1022 (3FEH).
• The slave diagnostics are stored in DB 82: starting at address 0.0, length 96
bytes.
• The slave diagnostic information consists of 96 bytes.
STEP 7-user program
STL Explanation
Call SFC 13
REQ :=TRUE Read request
LADDR :=W#16#3FE Diagnostics address of ET 200iSP
RET_VAL :=MW 0 RET_VAL of SFC 13
RECORD :=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 96 Data record for the diagnostic
BUSY :=M2.0 information in DB82
Read operation runs over several OB1
cycles

6-22 A5E00247483-02
6.7.3 Diagnostic Messages of the Electronics Modules
Introduction
You can configure diagnostics message for the following modules:
• Digital Input Modules
• Digital Output Modules
• Analog Input Modules
• Analog Output Modules
Digital Input Modules
Table 6-9 Digital Input Modules
Diagnostic Message Applicability Programmable

Short-circuit Channel Yes
Wire break Channel Yes
Error Module No
Parameter assignment error Module No
External fault Channel No
Digital Output Modules
Table 6-10 Digital Output Modules

Error Module No
Actuator shutdown Channel Yes1)
1) Enable shutdown of actuators by means of the group diagnostics parameter

A5E00247483-02 6-23
Analog Input Modules
Table 6-11 Analog Input Modules

Short-circuit1) Channel Yes
Value exceeded high limit of measuring range Channel Yes
Value exceeded low limit of measuring range Channel Yes
Error Module No
Reference channel error Module No
1) Not supported by 4 AI TC and 4 AI I 4WIRE HART
Analog Output Modules
Table 6-12 Analog Output Modules
Diagnostics message1) Applicability Programmable

Error Module No
1) Diagnostics message only with currents > 1 mA.
Actions Following a Diagnostic Message in STEP 7 or DPV1 mode

Every diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
• In S7 or DPV1 mode, diagnostics are reported as diagnostic interrupts.
• In DPV1 mode, diagnostics are also reported when the CPU is in STOP mode.
• A diagnostic message is
– written to the diagnostics datagram as diagnostics interrupt block (only one
interrupt)
– written to the diagnostics buffer of the CPU
– written to channel-specific diagnostics data.
• The SF LED on the IM 152 is lit.
• OB82 is called. If OB82 is not found, the CPU changes to STOP mode.
• Acknowledgment of the diagnostic interrupt (following this a new interrupt is
possible).

6-24 A5E00247483-02
Actions Following a Diagnostic Message in DPV0 Mode

The error is entered in the channel-related diagnostic information in the diagnostic
frame:
• The SF LED on the IM 152 is lit.
• There can be more than one diagnostic message at the same time.
Causes of Errors and Remedies

The causes of errors and corrective actions for diagnostic messages are described
in Section 6.7.11.
6.7.4 Evaluating Interrupts of the ET 200iSP (S7 DP Slave/ DPV1

Slave)
Introduction
Interrupts are triggered by the DP slave when certain errors occur. Interrupt
evaluation differs depending on the DP master used.
Evaluating Interrupts with an S7 DP Master or DPV1 Master

Requirement: You have configured the ET 200iSP with STEP 7 (Version 5.3
Service Pack 1 or higher), i.e., interrupts are only supported if you integrate the
ET 200iSP as an S7-DP slave or DPV1 slave.
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of
the DP master (see the System Software for S7-300/S7-400, Program Design
programming manual).
Evaluating Interrupts with a Different DP Master

If you operate ET 200iSP with a different DP master or as a DP standard slave, no
interrupts are generated.
Triggering a Diagnostic Interrupt

When an event (for example wire break) enters all leaves the state, the module
triggers a diagnostic interrupt if ”Enable: Diagnostic interrupt” is set.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and runs the diagnostic block
OB82. The event that led to the interrupt been triggered is entered in the startup
information of OB82.

A5E00247483-02 6-25
Triggering a Process Interrupt

When the CPU receives a process alarm, it interrupts execution of the user
program and executes process alarm block OB40.
The channel of the module that triggered the process alarm is entered in the
startup information of OB40 in the OB40_POINT_ADDR tag. The schematic below
shows the assignment of local data double word 8 to the bits.
• Analog input modules
LB 8 LB 9 LB 10 LB 11
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 Bit no.
19 18 17 16 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LD 8
Violation of the lo limit at channel 0

Violation of the hi limit at channel 0
Figure 6-8 Interrupts from Analog Input Modules
Note
You will find a description of OB40 in the System and Standard Functions
reference manual.
Triggering of a Remove/Insert Interrupt

Remove/insert interrupts are supported only for the S7-400 and in DPV1 mode.
The CPU (S7-400) interrupts execution of the user program and runs diagnostic
block OB83. The event that led to the interrupt been triggered is entered in the
startup information of OB83.
Triggering an Update Interrupt

Update interrupts are supported only in DPV1 mode.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and runs the diagnostic block
OB56. The event that led to the interrupt been triggered is entered in the startup
information of OB56.

6-26 A5E00247483-02
6.7.5 Structure of the Slave Diagnostics
Structure of Slave Diagnostics
DPV0 S7 DP DPV1
Byte 0
Byte 1 Station status 1 to 3 (see Section 6.7.6)
Byte 2
Byte 3 Master PROFIBUS address

(see Section 6.7.7)
Byte 4 High byte Manufacturer’s ID
Byte 5 (see Section 6.7.8)
Low byte
Byte 6
Identifier-related diagnostic data1)
Byte 12
Module status1)
Byte 25
Channel-specific
diagnostics
(3 bytes per channel)1)
(see Section 6.7.11)
Byte z
Max. of 6 bytes H-status only with the S7-400H and standard
redundancy (see Section 6.7.12)
up to Interrupts2)
max. max. 48 bytes
(only 1 interrupt per slave diagnostics frame is possible)
byte 95 (see Section 6.7.13)
1) If you use the GSD file to configure your system, you can deselect these diagnostics functions.
2) Interrupts are only supported if you configure the ET 200iSP as an S7 DP or DPV1 slave using STEP 7.
Figure 6-9 Structure of Slave Diagnostics
6.7.6 Station Status 1 to 3
Definition
Station status 1 to 3 provides an overview of the status of a DP slave.

A5E00247483-02 6-27
Station Status 1
Table 6-13 Structure of Station Status 1 (byte 0)
Bit Meaning Cause / Remedy

0 1: The DP slave cannot be • Correct PROFIBUS address set on
addressed by the DP master. The the DP slave?
bit is always ”0” in the DP slave. • Is the bus connector plugged in?
• Voltage at DP slave?
• RS 485 repeater set correctly?
• Has there been a RESET on the DP
slave (off/on)?
1 1: The DP slave is not yet ready for • Wait while the DP slave starts up.
data exchange.
2 1: The configuration data sent by The DP slave is okay, but the preset and
the DP master to the DP slave does actual slave configurations are
not match the configuration of the inconsistent. Compare the preset and
DP slave. actual configurations.
Note:
If the last slot is not used, install the slot
cover. The cover is available in the bus
termination module.
3 1: External diagnostic information Evaluate the channel-related diagnostic
exists. information, the module status and/or
the channel-related diagnostic
information. As soon as all errors have
been eliminated, bit 3 will be reset. The
bit will be set again when there is a new
diagnostic message in the bytes of the
diagnostic information.
4 1: The requested function is not Check the configuration.
supported by the DP slave
(for example, changing the
PROFIBUS address using the
software).
5 1: The DP master cannot interpret Check the bus configuration.
the response from the DP slave.
6 1: Faulty DP parameter assignment Correct the preset and actual
frame (incorrect slave type or configurations.
parameter)
7 1: Parameters have been assigned The bit is always 1 if, for example, you
to the DP slave by a different DP are currently accessing the DP slave
master (not the one that currently with the programming device or a
has access to the DP slave). different DP master.
The PROFIBUS address of the DP
master that assigned parameters for the
DP slave is located in the ”master
PROFIBUS address” diagnostic byte.

6-28 A5E00247483-02
Station Status 2
Bit Meaning
0 1: Parameters have to be reassigned to the DP slave.
1 1: A diagnostic message exists. The DP slave will not work until the fault has
been corrected (static diagnostic message).
2 1: The bit is always set to ”1” in the DP slave.
3 1: Response monitoring has been enabled for this DP slave.
4 1: The DP slave has received the ”FREEZE” control command.
5 1: The DP slave has received the ”SYNC” control command.
6 0: Bit is always ”0”.
7 1: Bit is always ”0”. Note: When reading the station status from the DP master,
the bit is ”1” if the DP slave was disabled in the DP master, i.e., it is excluded
from the current execution.
Station Status 3
Bit Meaning
0 to 6 0: Bits are always ”0”.
7 1: There are more channel-related diagnostic messages than can be shown in
the diagnostic frame
6.7.7 Master PROFIBUS address
Definition
The master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte contains the PROFIBUS address
of the DP master that:
• Assigned parameters for the DP slave and
• Has read and write access to the DP slave
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.
DP Slave not Assigned Parameters by the DP Master (Class 1)

If byte 3 contains the value FFH as the master PROFIBUS address, the DP slave
was not assigned parameters by the DP master.
No cyclic data exchange.

A5E00247483-02 6-29
6.7.8 Manufacturer’s ID
Definition
The manufacturer’s ID contains a code that describes the type of the DP slave.
Manufacturer’s ID
Table 6-16 Structure of the Vendor ID
Byte 4 Byte 5 Vendor ID for

81 10 IM 152

6-30 A5E00247483-02
6.7.9 ID-related Diagnostics
Evaluation of the Slave Diagnostics

The figure below shows a systematic approach to evaluating slave diagnostics.
Start with ID-specific diagnostics.
7 6 Bit no.
Byte 6 Identifier-related diagnostics, see Figure 6-11 (byte 6)
0 1 See Section 6.7.9

1 0 See Section 6.7.11
0 0
7 Bit no.
Byte 13/ Module status, see Figure 6-12 (byte 13); interrupts,
x+1 see Figure 6-15 (x+1)
1 See Section 6.7.10

0 See Section 6.7.13
Figure 6-10 Evaluation of the Slave Diagnostics
Definition
The ID-related diagnostic information indicates whether any modules of the
ET 200iSP are faulty or not. ID-related diagnostic information starts at byte 6 and
comprises 6 bytes.

A5E00247483-02 6-31
Identifier-Related Diagnostics
The ID-related diagnostic information for the ET 200iSP has the following
structure:
7 0 Bit no.
Byte 6 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0
Length of the identifier-related diagnostics including byte 6 (= 6 bytes)
Code for ID-related diagnostics
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Entries for IM 152 on slot 2, and modules on slots 4 to 8

Byte 7 8 7 6 5 4 2
Byte 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Entries for modules on slot 9 to 16
Byte 11 35 34 33 Entries for modules on slot 33 to 35
Legend of the entry for modules on slot x:
The bit is set when

- a module is removed
- a module is inserted that was not configured
- an inserted module cannot be accessed
- a module reports a diagnostics event
Non-existing slots are assigned a ”0” value by default.
Figure 6-11 Structure of the ID-Related Diagnostic Information for ET 200iSP

6-32 A5E00247483-02
6.7.10 Module Status
Definition
The module status functions returns the status of the configured modules and
shows details of ID-related diagnostics with respect to the configuration or module
errors. The module status starts after the ID-related diagnostics and comprises 13
bytes.
Module Status
The module status for ET 200iSP is structured as follows:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte 12 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
Length of the module status including byte 12 (= 13 bytes)
Code for device-specific diagnostics
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte 13 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Status type: Module
Status
2H = module status
Code for status message
7 0
Byte 14 0H Always ”0”
Byte 15 0H Always ”0”
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte 16 4 Slot 4
Byte 17 8 7 6 5 Slots 5 to 8
Byte 18 12 11 10 9 Slots 9 to 12
Byte 19 16 15 14 13 Slots 13 to 16
Byte 20 20 19 18 17 Slots 17 to 20
Byte 21 24 23 22 21 Slots 21 to 24
Byte 22 28 27 26 25 Slots 25 to 28
Byte 23 32 31 30 29 Slots 29 to 32
Byte 24 35 34 33 Slots 33 to 35
Legend of the entry for module status on slot x:
00B: Module OK; valid data

01B: Module error; invalid data
10B: Wrong module; invalid data
11B: No module found (or module failure); invalid data
5 4 Bit no.
Example: Slot 35 1 0 10B: Wrong module; invalid data
Figure 6-12 Module Status

A5E00247483-02 6-33
6.7.11 Channel-Specific Diagnostics
Definition
Channel-specific diagnostics provides information about channel errors of
modules and provides details of the ID-related diagnostics.
For each channel-specific diagnostic information, 3 bytes are added as per
IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
Channel-specific diagnostics starts after the module status.
Channel-related diagnostics does not influence the module status.
Important: Group diagnostics must be activated for each module.
Channel-specific diagnostics
The maximum amount of channel-specific diagnostic information is limited by the
maximum total length of the slave diagnostic information (i.e., 96 bytes) for the
IM 152. The length of the slave diagnostic information depends on the amount of
channel-specific diagnostic information currently pending. If the channel-specific
diagnostic information exceeds the amount that can be represented in the slave
diagnostic information, bit 7 ”diagnostics overflow” is set in station status 3.

6-34 A5E00247483-02
starts at
byte 25* 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte x 1 0
000001B to 100010B: ID number of the module

which provides the channel-specific diagnostics data.
Example: Slot 4 has the ID number 3;
Slot 5 has the ID number 4 etc.
Code for channel-specific diagnostics (for 00B, see Figure 6-15)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte x+1
00000B to 11111B: Number of the channel or

channel group providing the diagnostics data
Input/Output: 01B: Input

10B: Output
11B: Input/Output
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte x+2
Error type as defined in the

PROFIBUS standard
Channel type
001B: Bit
010B: 2 bits
011B: 4 bits
100B: Byte
101B: Word
110B: 2 words
Byte x+3 Next channel-specific diagnostics message

up to x+5 (assignment as bytes 25 to 27)
max. byte 95 with IM 152
* without deselection of diagnostics in the configuration
Figure 6-13 Structure of Channel-Specific D iagnostics

A5E00247483-02 6-35
Types of Error of the Electronic Modules
Table 6-17 Types of error of the electronic modules

Error type Error text Meaning Remedy
00001B 1D Short-circuit • Encoder cable Correct the process wiring
short-circuited to P
potential
• Encoder cable
short-circuited to M
potential
• Output cable short-circuited
to P potential
• Output cable short-circuited
to M potential
Defective encoder Replace the encoder
Incorrect encoder type Correct the parameter
assigned assignment
Output overload Eliminate overload
00010B 2D Undervoltage HART analog output current is –––
(HART defined (HART diagnostics)
diagnostics)
00100B 4D Overload HART analog output current is –––
(HART saturated (HART diagnostics)
diagnostics)
00110B 6D Wire break • Break on the signal line to Correct the process wiring
an encoder
• Break on the signal line
from an actuator
• Break on the encoder
power supply cable
Fault on the external circuit Eliminate the problem
(resistor)
Defective encoder Replace the encoder
Incorrect encoder type Correct the parameter
assigned assignment
Input/output channel is unused Deactivate the ”group
(open) diagnostics” parameter for
this output channel
Load impedance too high Use an actuator with a lower
load impedance
00111B 7D Violation of hi limit The value is above the • Correct the
overshoot range module/actuator tuning
• Change the measuring
range in the parameter
assignment
01000B 8D Violation of lo limit The value is below the • Correct the
undershoot range module/actuator tuning
• Change the measuring
range in the parameter
assignment
01001B 9D Error Encoder signal flutters Eliminate the cause of error
Hardware fault on the module Replace the module
EMC interference Eliminate the cause of error

6-36 A5E00247483-02
Table 6-17 Types of error of the electronic modules, continued

Error type Error text Meaning Remedy
10000B 16D Parameter Faulty parameters Correct the parameter
assignment error assignment
10001B 17D Sensor or load • Power Supply PS voltage is • Check the power supply
voltage missing missing or too low on the Power Supply PS
• Power Supply PS is faulty • Replace the Power
Supply PS
10011B 19D HART • HART field device does not • Check the process wiring
communication respond • Correct the parameter
error (HART • Timing fault settings
diagnostics)
10101B 21D Reference channel • Internal reference junction: • Replace or connect the
error TC sensor module TC sensor module
defective or not present • Correct the parameter
• Remote reference junction assignment
(RTD): The parameter
assignment does not point
to the RTD module
10110B 22D Additional HART ––– –––
status available
(HART warning)
10111B 23D reserved for HART ––– –––
(HART warning)
11000B 24D Actuator Intrinsically safe switching –––
disconnection signal active at 4 DO
11010B 26D External fault • Encoder fault • Replace the
• Faulty encoder power encoder/actuator/HART
supply field device/MMC
• Changeover contact fault • Correct the process wiring
• Actuator fault
• Error in the HART field
device
• MMC error
11011B 27D HART ––– –––
configuration
changed (HART
warning)
11101B 29D HART primary ––– –––
variable outside
the limits
(HART
diagnostics)
11110B 30D HART secondary ––– –––
variable outside
the limits
(HART
diagnostics)

A5E00247483-02 6-37
6.7.12 H-Status (Only with the S7-400H and Standard Redundancy)
The IM 152 supplies the H-status only if it is running on an S7-400H DP master or

is operated redundantly according to the standard.
In the structure of the slave diagnostics, the H-status is represented by an
additional block, typically following the manufacturer’s ID.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte z 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Length of the H-status including byte x (= 8 bytes)

7 0
Byte z+1 1
1EH = Parameter assignment status (switchover by DP master)

1FH = H-status
Code for status message
7 0
Byte z+2 0H Always ”0”
Byte z+3 Not applicable
Byte z+4 Not applicable
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte z+5 0 0 0 H-status of the IM 152 that is sending the status
Disabled
Enabled
Hardware defect
IM 152 is exchanging data
Master-State-Clear
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte z+6 0 0 0 H-status of the other IM 152
Disabled
Enabled
Hardware defect
IM 152 is exchanging data
Master-State-Clear
Byte z+7 0H Always ”0”
Figure 6-14 Structure of the H-Status of the IM 152 (for S7-400H only)

6-38 A5E00247483-02
6.7.13 Interrupts
Definition
The interrupt section of the slave diagnostics provides information on the interrupt
type and the reason that the interrupt was triggered. The maximum length of the
interrupt section is 48 bytes.
Position in the diagnostic datagram

The interrupt section is located after the channel-related diagnostic information or
after the ID-related diagnostic information (with STEP 7)
Example: If there are three items of channel-related diagnostic information, the
interrupt section starts at byte 34.
When an alarm is output, the channel-specific diagnostics is truncated in order to
be able to receive the interrupt information.
Contents
The content of the interrupt function depends on the interrupt type:
The system transfers 4 bytes of interrupt header and up to 44 byte additional
interrupt information at each diagnostic interrupt (diagnostics data record 1) to the
SIMATIC S7 station.
Process alarms consist of 4 bytes in the alarm header and 4 bytes of status
information.
For remove/insert interrupts, the length consists of 4 bytes of interrupt header and
5 bytes of supplementary interrupt information.
For update interrupts, the length consists of 4 bytes of interrupt header and 2 bytes
of supplementary interrupt information.
The following pages describe the significance of these bytes.

A5E00247483-02 6-39
Interrupts
The interrupt section for the ET 200iSP is structured as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit no.
Byte x 0 0
Length of the interrupt section including byte x (= max. 48 bytes)

Code for interrupt diagnostics (for 10B, see Figure 6-13)
7 6 0
Byte x+1 0
Interrupt 0000001B: Diagnostic interrupt

type: 0000010B: Process alarm
0000011B: Remove interrupt
0000100B: Insertion interrupt
0000110B: Update interrupt
7 0
Byte x+2 Slot number
02: IM 152 outputs the interrupt (diagnostics interrupt, process alarm with
time stamping)
04 to 35: Slot of the module returning the interrupt
7 3 1 0
Byte x+3
Interrupt sequence 00B: Process, remove/insert, or update interrupt

01B: at least one error is pending
number (1 to 31) 10B: outgoing error
11B: reserved
as of byte x+4 to ... ...Byte x+4 ...Byte x+4 ...Byte x+4 ...Byte x+4
Diagnostics Process Remove/insert Update

interrupt? interrupt? interrupt? interrupt?
Continue with Continue Continue at Continue
Figure 6-16 at Figure Figure 6-24 at Figure
6-22 6-25
Figure 6-15 Structure of the Interrupt Status of the Interrupt Section

6-40 A5E00247483-02
Diagnostic Interrupt, Bytes x+4 to x+7

Bytes x+4 to x+7 correspond to diagnostic data record 0 in STEP 7.
Bytes x+8 to x+43 correspond to diagnostic data record 1 in STEP 7.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte x+4 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Module error detected

Internal module fault
External fault
Module can no longer be addressed
Channel error in module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+5 0 0 1 1
Module class:
0100 for IM 152; set with the time stamp / self-diagnosis
message
1001 for an electronic module as of byte x+8
Channel information available
User information available
7 0
Byte x+6 Always ”0”
7 0
Byte x+7 Always ”0”
Byte x+8... Interface module 152-1 = 55H? Continue at Figure 6-17

Input or output modules without HART = 7BH/ 7CH? Continue at Figure 6-18
Input or output modules with HART = 65H? Continue at Figure 6-19
Figure 6-16 Structure of bytes x+4 to x+7 for Diagnostic Interrupts

A5E00247483-02 6-41
Diagnostics Interrupt from Interface Module IM 152
Byte x+8 55H: Self-diagnosis
Byte x+9 Length of each channel-specific diagnostic

information in bits
Byte x+10 Number of channels per

module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+11 1 1
Diagnostic event at channel 0 of the module

Byte x+12 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Error type at channel 0: Bytes x+12 to x+19
Error at Power Supply 1 (17) The corresponding error type number of

the channel-specific diagnostics is
Error at Power Supply 2 (17) shown in parentheses.
For further information on the meaning and
Byte x+13 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 remedies, refer to Table 6-17 (Error Types
of Electronic Modules) in Section 6.7.11
Byte x+14 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 (Channel-Specific Diagnostics).
Illegal MMC content (26)
Byte x+15 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
Byte x+16 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
Byte x+17 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
Byte x+18 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
Byte x+19 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
Byte x+20 to x+27 Error type at channel 1: see bytes x+12 to x+19:
Only available with redundant IM 152
Figure 6-17 Structure Starting at Byte x+8 for Diagnostics Interrupt from Interface Module

6-42 A5E00247483-02
Diagnostic Interrupt from Input or Output Modules without HART
7BH: Input channel

Byte x+8
7CH: Output channel
Byte x+9 Length of each channel-specific diagnostic

information in bits
Byte x+10 Number of channels per module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


The set bit (0 to 31) corresponds with the
Short-circuit
Wire break error type number
Upper measuring For further information on the meaning and

range exceeded remedies, refer to Table 6-17 (Error Types
(Channel-Specific Diagnostics).
Byte x+13 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Violation of measuring range lo limit
Error
Byte x+14 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Parameter assignment error
Byte x+15 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
Actuator shutdown in safety-oriented mode
External fault
Bytes x+16 to x+19 Error type at channel 1: see bytes x+12 to x+15
Figure 6-18 Structure Starting at Byte x+8 for Diagnostic Interrupt (Input / Output Modules
without HART)

A5E00247483-02 6-43
Diagnostic Interrupt from Input or Output Modules with HART
Byte x+8 65H: HART input or output channel
Length of each channel-specific diagnostic

Byte x+9 1 information in bits
=16 bits
Byte x+10 Number of channels per

module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+11

Parameter fault (16)

HART communication error (19)
Short-circuit to P (1)
Short-circuit to M (1)
Wire break (6) The corresponding error type number of
Load voltage missing (17) the channel-specific diagnostics is
Overflow (7) shown in parentheses.
Underflow (8)
For further information on the meaning and
remedies, refer to Table 6-17 (Error Types
Byte x+13 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 (Channel-Specific Diagnostics).
HART master tag out of limits (29)

HART auxiliary tag out of limits (30)
HART analog output current in saturation (4)
HART analog output current is determined (2)
Further HART status available (22)
reserved for HART (23)
HART configuration changed (27)
Error in the HART field device (26)
Figure 6-19 Structure Starting at Byte x+8 for Diagnostic Interrupt (Input or Output Module
with HART)

6-44 A5E00247483-02
Example of a Diagnostic Interrupt
Example:
Electronic module 8 DI NAMUR outputs a diagnostic interrupt ”wire break”
at channel 2
Byte x 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
Length of the interrupt section = 44 bytes

Byte x+1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Diagnostic
interrupt
Code for interrupt
Byte x+2 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
Slot number 10
Byte x+3 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
At least one error is pending
Interrupt sequence number = 1
Byte x+4 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Channel error
Byte x+5 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
Digital electronic module

Channel information available
Bytes x+6 and x+7 always ”0”
Byte x+8 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
Input module = 7BH
Figure 6-20 Example of a Diagnostic Interrupt

A5E00247483-02 6-45
Byte x+9 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Length of channel-specific diagnostics = 32 bits
Byte x+10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Number of channels per module = 8
Byte x+11 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Diagnostics event at channel 2
Bytes x+12 to x+15 ”0” (channel 0)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+20 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit x+20.6 = error type 6 at channel 2 = wire break
Figure 6-21 Example of a Diagnostic Interrupt (Continued)

6-46 A5E00247483-02
Process Interrupt for Analog Input Modules
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+4
1: Violation of the hi limit at channel 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+5
1: Violation of the lo limit at channel 0

Bytes x+6 and x+7: are always 00H
Figure 6-22 Structure Starting at Byte x+4 for Hardware Interrupts (Analog Input)
Time Stamp Process Interrupt for Slot 2 (IM 152)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+4 Status of time stamping
1: Message buffer available for transfer on IM 152

1: Overflow of the ”external” message buffer: permissible
message buffers are full.
1: Overflow of the ”internal” message buffer: messages
may be lost.
Redundancy: active IM 152
0: the right-hand IM of the TM-IM/IM is the active module
1: the left-hand IM of the TM-IM/IM is the active module
Redundancy: Redundant mode enabled / disabled
0: no redundant mode
1: redundant mode
Restart the time stamp
0: no restart occurs
1: Currently being restarted
Not applicable
Status of synchronization by means of time
datagram
0: no synchronization
1: Synchronized
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+5 Data record number, if a data record is to be
fetched
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+6 Number of message block in the data record, 1 to 20
Byte x+7 reserved
Figure 6-23 Structure Starting at Byte x+4 for Process Alarms (Time Stamping)

A5E00247483-02 6-47
Remove/insert interrupt
Bytes x+4 to x+8 contain the ID of the module that was removed or inserted. The
IDs of the modules can be found in the GSD file.
You can recognize whether the modules were removed or inserted by the interrupt
type in byte x+1. (See Structure of the Interrupt Status of the Interrupt Section)
Byte x+4
Byte x+5 Not applicable
Byte x+6
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+7 Type detection of the module; high byte SKF identifier
(STEP 7)
Byte x+8 Type detection of the module; low byte See table 6-18
Figure 6-24 Structure Starting at Byte x+4 for Remove/Insert Interrupts
Table 6-18 SKF Identifiers (STEP 7)
Modules SKF-Identifier
8 DI NAMUR 79 CAH
4 DO DC23.1V/20mA 79 D1H
4 DO DC17.4V/27mA 79 D2H
4 DO DC17.4V/40mA 79 D3H
4 AI I 2WIRE HART 79 EBH
4 AI I 4WIRE HART 79 ECH
4 AI RTD 79 EFH
4 AI TC 79 EEH
4 AO I HART 79 F2H
Reserve module 8F C0H
Removed module DE C0H
Reserve identifier (CiR) B6 40H

6-48 A5E00247483-02
Update Interrupt
The update interrupt is signaled when the following conditions are met:
• The parameter assignment is a free of errors.
• The parameter settings for the ET 200iSP differ from the parameters and
identification data stored in retentive memory on the modules.
Data record index: Represents the number of

Byte x+4 parameter data record which has led to the
update interrupt.
Byte x+5 Number of updates which could not be

reported to the CPU.
Figure 6-25 Structure Starting at Byte x+4 for Update Interrupt

A5E00247483-02 6-49
6.7.14 Diagnostics for Incorrect Module Configuration States of the

ET 200iSP
Incorrect Module Configuration

The following incorrect module configurations in the ET 200iSP station lead its
failure or prevent startup of data exchange. These reactions are independent on
the enable status of the IM 152 parameter ”Operation with online / offline<>
configuration”
• 2 missing electronic modules
• Bus termination module missing
• Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration
• Backplane bus fault (for example, defective terminal module)
Note
If only one module is missing (gap), you can cycle power to startup the ET 200iSP.
Startup is not possible if more than one module is missing.
If more than one electronic module is missing, a safe startup following insertion of
the ET 200iSP can only be guaranteed after POWER OFF/ POWER/ON has been
performed.
Diagnostics
You can recognize all faulty module configuration states based on the following
diagnostic information:
Table 6-19 Diagnostics of Faulty Configuration of the ET 200iSP
ID-related diagnostics Module Status

All bits of slot 4 to 35 are set 01B: ”Module error, invalid user data” up to
the slot that caused the failure
11B: ”no module; invalid user data” starting
at the slot that caused the failure

6-50 A5E00247483-02
Maintenance 7
7.1 Actions in Run
Features
The table below describes the actions allowed at ET 200iSP in Zone 1, Zone 2,
Zone 21 and Zone 22 in RUN.
Requirements
Warning
! Potentially explosive area Zone 1 and Zone 2: You may open the ET 200iSP
enclosure briefly for the purpose of authorized maintenance work.
Potentially explosive area Zone 21 and Zone 22: You may not open the ET 200iSP
enclosure in environments containing combustible dust.
Permitted Actions / Tasks in the Potentially Explosive Areas
Table 7-1 Permitted actions / tasks in the potentially explosive areas

Activities / tasks Zone Zone Zone Zone See chapter ...
1 2 21 22
Inserting and removing modules during operation X X Maintenance
(hot swapping) in Zone 1 and Zone 2
Maintenance during operation (visual checks) X X X1) X1) Maintenance
Cleaning X X Maintenance
Removing and inserting the bus connector at X X Wiring
terminal module TM-IM/EM in Zone 1 and Zone 2
Isolating and disconnecting the cables to the X X Wiring
encoders, actuators, and HART field devices at
terminal module TM-EM/EM in Zone 1 and
Zone 2
Editing parameter settings and modifying the X X Commissioning
diagnostics functions of ET 200iSP and Diagnostics
IM 152 firmware update via PROFIBUS-DP X X X1 X1) Maintenance
1) You may not open the ET 200iSP enclosure in areas containing combustible dust for the purpose of
carrying out this task.

A5E00247483-02 7-1
Maintenance
Permitted Activities in Zone 2

In addition to the activities permitted in zone 1, the following activity is also
permitted:
Caution
! Disconnecting and connecting cables for the 24 VDC supply voltage at terminal
module TM-PS-A during operation. This activity is permitted only when there is no
risk of explosion or when there is no power applied at terminal module TM-PS-A.

7-2 A5E00247483-02
Maintenance
7.2 Removing and Inserting Electronic Modules During

Operation (Hot Swapping)
Features
• The ET 200iSP distributed I/O station supports the removal and insertion of one
electronic module (1 gap) during operation (RUN mode).
• If only one electronic module is removed the ET 200iSP remains in the RUN
mode.
• If you remove more than one electronics module, this leads to an ET 200iSP
station failure. After you have reinstalled all the electronic modules, restart the
ET 200iSP, i.e. cycle the power supply module PS off and on.
• If you install only one electronics module in an ET 200iSP, removing this
electronics module will lead to an ET 200iSP station failure. When you insert
the electronics module, the ET 200iSP starts up again.
• All current parameters and identification data of the ET 200iSP are stored in an
internal flash memory in the IM 152. After you changed a module, IM 152
automatically transfers these data to the new module. This function is always
active on the ET 200iSP and cannot be influenced by the user.
– The current parameters and identification data are retained on the IM 152-2
even if the power supply to the ET 200iSP fails.
– The default parameters of an electronics module are overwritten.
Parameters and identification data are

securely stored in the flash memory
IM 152 New electronic module
The parameters and identification data

are automatically transferred to a
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
replaced module.
Figure 7-1 Automatic Parameter Assignment after Replacing a Module

A5E00247483-02 7-3
Maintenance
Note
If you reduce an existing configuration and then expand it again, you should clear
the Flash memory before expanding.
Note
The flash memory (parameters and identification data) of the IM 152 will be
cleared if you set the PROFIBUS address to ”0” and then switch the supply
voltage of the ET 200iSP off and on at the Power Supply PS.
Requirements
• When the ET 200iSP starts up, all modules must be inserted.
• Removing and inserting electronics modules during operation (RUN mode) is
possible only if you have enabled the IM 152 parameter Operation with offline
<> online configuration.
• Only one electronic module may be removed at any given time.
• The following table describes which modules you can remove and insert during
operation:
Table 7-2 Requirements
Module replacement Removal and Effects on the ET 200iSP

insertion
Power Supply PS yes Removal: Failure of the ET 200iSP (status as
with shut down power supply.)
Insertion: Startup of ET 200iSP
Interface module IM yes Removal: Failure of the ET 200iSP
152 Insertion: Configuration of ET 200iSP required
by means of PG (in STEP 7 only the I&M data)
Electronic module yes Removal: Failure of the sensor/actuator
Insertion: Sensor/actuator in operation
Removing and inserting electronic modules

Remove and insert the electronics modules as described in chapter 5.6.
Note
Check the coding element before you insert the new electronic module into the
terminal module.

7-4 A5E00247483-02
Maintenance
7.3 Exchanging the Interface Module
Properties
The IM 152 saves the parameters and I&M data to an internal flash memory. The
contents are retained even if the ET 200iSP experiences a power failure.
After the IM 152-1 is replaced, STEP 7 automatically assigns parameters to the
ET 200iSP. You only have to download the I&M data (if needed) to the ET 200iSP
with HW Config or SIMATIC PDM.
Requirements
Replacement interface module
Replacing an Interface Module without MMC

1. Remove the (defective) IM 152 from the terminal module.
2. Set the PROFIBUS DP address to ”0” on the new IM 152, and insert the new
interface module into the terminal module.
3. Switch the supply voltage of the ET 200iSP off and then on.
4. Wait until the retentive data of the interface module are deleted
(BF LED flashes at 0.5 Hz).
5. Switch off the supply voltage of the ET 200iSP.
6. Now, set the PROFIBUS DP address of the (defective) old IM 152 on the new
interface module.
7. Switch on the supply voltage of the ET 200iSP.
8. Assign parameters for the ET 200iSP:
– If you are using STEP 7, parameters will be automatically reassigned to the
ET 200iSP. The ET 200iSP will then switch to data exchange with the DP
master. If you need I&M data, you must download these data as well to the
ET 200iSP (HW Config Target System > Download Module
Identification).
– If you are using SIMATIC PDM, you must download all parameters and I&M
data to the ET 200iSP (Device > Complete Download to Device).

A5E00247483-02 7-5
Maintenance
7.4 Maintenance during Operation
Features
Maintenance of the ET 200iSP is restricted to visual inspections. This may be
carried out while the ET 200iSP is in RUN.
Requirements
A visual check in potentially explosive areas should be carried out at intervals of 6
months.
Procedure
1. Verify that the cable inlets in the enclosure are seal-tight and intact.
2. Verify that there is no ingress of water or liquid. If there is, locate the cause.
3. Verify that all cables are securely wired (connectors, lines.)
7.5 Cleaning
Safety information for Zone 1 and Zone 2
Warning
! Plastic parts can become electrostatically charged when they are cleaned. When
operating the ET 200iSP in Zone 1 or Zone 2, this may represent a danger:
Clean the ET 200iSP only with damp cloths.
A sign with the warning ”Clean the ET 200iSP only with damp cloths” must be
placed inside the enclosure.
After you cleaned it, run a function check on the ET 200iSP.
Safety information for Zone 21 and Zone 22
Warning
! The dust layer on and at the ET 200iSP enclosure may not exceed a thickness of
5 mm.
Remove the dust layers on and around the enclosure at regular intervals. Any
explosion risk must be excluded when you clean the module.

7-6 A5E00247483-02
Maintenance
7.6 IM 152 Firmware Update
Features
• After you have implemented (compatible) functional expansions or performance
enhancements, you should update the IM 152 interface module to the latest
firmware version.
• The latest firmware versions are available from your Siemens representative or
can be downloaded from the Internet at:
Tip:
– Make a note of your actual firmware version before you start the update. You
can read out the version number with HW Config or with SIMATIC PDM.
– If you then meet any problems with the new firmware, you can always
download the previous (current) firmware from the Internet and restore it on
the interface module.
• There are two ways to update the module:
– from the PG/PC via PROFIBUS DP and CPU
– by means of SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Requirements
Update via PROFIBUS DP
• STEP 7 V5.3, ServicePack 1
• The IM 152 of the station requiring the update must be online.
• The files containing the current (new) firmware version must be available in the
PG/PC file system.
• To update the firmware, you receive the *.UPD files containing the current
firmware.
Update by means of MMC
• STEP 7 V5.3, ServicePack 1
• The update files must be available on the MMC.
• To carry out a firmware update, you need MMCs with 2, 4, or 8 MBytes of
memory.
Note
If the ET 200iSP is part of a redundant configuration, you must not update the
firmware for both IM 152 interface modules simultaneously!
If you have updated the firmware simultaneously, the ET 200iSP will not start up.
In this case, you must clear the flash memory of both IM 152 interface modules
(set PROFIBUS address to ”0” and then switch the supply voltage of the
ET 200iSP off and on).

A5E00247483-02 7-7
Maintenance
Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP

Connect the PG/PC containing the update files to the MPI interface of the CPU or
via the PROFIBUS DP interface. ET 200iSP is interconnected with the system via
PROFIBUS DP.
For information on this procedure, refer to the online help for STEP 7.
Firmware update by means of MMC

1. Use STEP 7 and your programming device to transfer the update files to a
blank MMC ( 2 MB).
2. Switch off the supply voltage at terminal module TM-PS-A.
3. Insert the MMC containing the FW update in the slot of the IM 152.
4. Switch on the supply voltage again at TM-PS-A.
Result:
– The IM 152 automatically detects the MMC containing the FW update and
then starts the FW update.
– The SF and BF LEDs are lit during the FW update.
– When the update is complete, the BF LED flashes at 0.5 Hz.
For information on the LED displays during the update, refer to Section 6.6.
5. Switch off the power supply to the IM 152, then remove the update MMC from
the module slot. To remove the MMC, push in the extractor in the lower section
of the module slot using a small screw driver or a pen.

7-8 A5E00247483-02
Maintenance
Restart after update

Update via PROFIBUS DP
On the STEP 7 user interface you can set
• an automatic rest of IM 152 after the update in order to restart the module with
the new firmware.
Caution
If the ”Update firmware after download” box is set, a brief failure of the ET 200iSP
station is triggered. If you have not made any provisions for this situation, the
update will cause to CPU to go to STOP mode due to a rack failure.
• Reset the IM 152 by cycling the power supply in order to restart it with the new
firmware.
Update by means of MMC
The IM 152 status after an update can only be exited by shutting down power.
After the update is completed, IM 152 restarts with the new firmware after you
power it up.
Update
If the update fails, the IM 152 always restarts with its current (”old”) FW version
after the supply voltage is switched off and then on.
See Table 6-5 Status and Error LEDs on the IM 152.

A5E00247483-02 7-9
Maintenance

7-10 A5E00247483-02
General Technical Data 8
8.1 General Technical Data
What are general technical data?

The general technical data contain the standards and test values to which the
ET 200iSP distributed I/O station complies and adheres, and the criteria under
which the ET 200iSP distributed I/O station was tested.
8.2 Standards and Certifications
CE certification
The ET 200iSP distributed I/O system meets the requirements and protection
objectives of the following EC Directives and complies with the harmonized
European Standards (EN) for programmable logic controllers published in the
Official Gazettes of the European Community:
• 73/23/EEC” Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage
Limits” (low-voltage directive)
• 89/336/EEC “Electromagnetic Compatibility” (EMC Directive)
• 94/9/EC “Equipment and Protective Systems for Use in Explosive
Atmospheres.”

A5E00247483-02 8-1
ATEX certification
KEMA 04ATEX2242 (ET 200iSP system)
in accordance with EN 50014:1997+A1+A2, EN 50018:2000+A1,
EN 50019:2000, EN 50020:2002, and EN 50284:1999
The module identifiers are found in the technical data and in appendix E of this
manual.
The EC declarations of conformity are kept available for the responsible authorities
at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
A&D AS ST PLC
PO Box 1963
D-92209 Amberg
C-Tick mark (Australia)

The distributed I/O device ET 200iSP meets the requirements of the
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A) standard.
IEC 61131
The ET 200iSP distributed I/O station meets the requirements and criteria of
IEC 61131-2 (Programmable Logic Controllers, Part 2: equipment requirements
and tests.)
PROFIBUS standard
The ET 200iSP distributed I/O device is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
Marine Approval (requested)

Classification societies:
• ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
• BV (Bureau Veritas)
• DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
• GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
• LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
• Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

8-2 A5E00247483-02
8.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility and Shipping and

Storage Conditions
Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of electrical equipment to function
properly in its electromagnetic environment without influencing this environment.
The ET 200iSP distributed I/O device meets EMC requirements, including those of
the EMC law for the single European market. This is only possible if the ET 200iSP
distributed I/O station corresponds to the regulations and directives for electrical
installation.
Pulse-shaped disturbances
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200iSP
distributed I/O station with relation to pulse-shaped disturbances.
Pulse-shaped disturbance Tested with Corresponds to the

degree of severity
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV 3 (air discharge)
according to IEC 61000-4-2 4 kV 2 (contact discharge)
Burst pulses (rapid transient 2 kV (power supply 3
disturbances) according to line)
IEC 61000-4-4. 2 kV (signal line) 3
High-energy single pulse (surge) according
to IEC 61000-4-5
Only with lightning protection elements
(see the chapter Wiring)
• asymmetrical coupling 2 kV (power supply
line)
2 kV (signal/data 3
line)
• symmetrical coupling 1 kV (power supply
line)
1 kV (signal/data
line)

A5E00247483-02 8-3
Sinusoidal disturbances
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200iSP
distributed I/O station with relation to sinusoidal disturbances.
RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3 RF interference according

Electromagnetic RF field to
IEC 61000-4-6
amplitude modulated pulse modulated
80 MHz to 1000 MHz/ 900 MHz "5 MHz 0.15 to 80 MHz

1.4 GHz to 2 GHz
10 V/m 10 Vrms unmodulated
80% AM (1 kHz) 50% ED 80% AM (1 kHz)
200 Hz repetitive frequency 150 W source impedance
Emission of Radio Interferences

Emission of electromagnetic fields to EN 55011: Limit class A, group 1 (measured
at a distance of 10 m.)
Frequency Noise emission

from 30 to 230 MHz < 40 dB (mV/m)Q
from 230 to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (mV/m)Q
Shipping and Storage Conditions

The ET 200iSP distributed I/O device surpasses the requirements for shipping and
storage conditions defined in IEC 61131-2. The following specifications apply to
modules that are transported and stored in their original packaging.
Type of condition Permitted range

Free fall v1m
Temperature from – 40 _C to + 70 _C
Temperature drift 20 K/h
Air pressure From 1080 hPa to 660 hPa (corresponds to
an altitude of -1000 m to 3500 m)
Relative humidity from 5 to 95 %, without condensation

8-4 A5E00247483-02
8.4 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions
Conditions of use
ET 200iSP is designed for use in weather-proof stationary applications. The
conditions of use surpass the requirements in DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
• Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
• Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
Climatic Environmental Conditions

The following climatic ambient conditions apply:
Ambient conditions Fields of application Comments

Temperature from –20 to 70_C 1) 2) for horizontal installation
from –20 to 40_C 1) 3) for all other mounting positions
Temperature drift 10 K/h
Relative humidity from 5 to max. 95 % without condensation
Air pressure from 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of
–1000 m to 2000 m
Contaminant concentration SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test:
rel. humidity < 60 %, no dewing 10 ppm; 4 days
H2S: < 0.1 ppm;
rel. humidity < 60 %, no dewing 1 ppm; 4 days
1) MMC (SIMATIC Micro Memory Card): Operational temperature range 0 to 60_C
2) Output current of Power Supply PS (6ES7 138-7EA00-0AA0)
at an ambient temperature of –20_C to +60_C: max. 5 A
at an ambient temperature of +60_C to +70_C: max. 3.5 A
3) Output current of Power Supply PS (6ES7 138-7EA00-0AA0): max. 5 A
Mechanical Environmental Conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions are shown in the following table in the form of
sinusoidal vibration.
Frequency range Continuous Infrequently

5 v f v 9 Hz 1.75 mm amplitude 3.5 mm amplitude
9 v f v 150 Hz 0.5 g constant 1 g constant
acceleration acceleration

A5E00247483-02 8-5
Test of mechanical ambient conditions

The following table contains information on the type and scope of the test of
mechanical ambient conditions.
Testing for ... Test standard Terminal- and Electronic Modules

Vibration Vibration test ac- Type of oscillation: Frequency sweep with a rate of change of
cording to 1 octave/minute.
IEC 60068-2-6 5 Hz v f v 9 Hz, constant amplitude 3.5 mm
(sine) 9 Hz v f v 150 Hz, constant amplitude 1 g
Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of
the 3 mutual vertical axes
Shock Shock tested to Type of shock: Half-sine
IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: 15 g peak value, duration of 11 ms
Type of shock: 33 shocks each in +/– direction in each of the 3
mutually vertical axes
8.5 Information on Dielectric Tests, Class of Protection,

Degree of Protection, and Rated Voltage of the
ET 200iSP
Test voltage
Insulation resistance is demonstrated in the type test with the following test voltage
in accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with rated voltage Uin measured against Test voltage

other circuits or ground
< 50 V 500 V DC
< 150 V 2500 V DC
< 250 V 4000 V DC
Degree of Pollution / Overvoltage Category to IEC 61131

• Degree of pollution 2
• Overvoltage category
– at Vr = 24 V DC: II
Class of protection
Class of protection I to IEC 60536

8-6 A5E00247483-02
Degree of protection IP30

Degree of protection IP 30 to IEC 60529 for all modules of the ET 200iSP, i.e.:
• Protection against contact with standard test probes
• Protection against foreign bodies with a diameter greater than 2.5 mm
• No particular protection against water
Rated operational voltage

The ET 200iSP distributed I/O device operates with the rated voltage specified in
the table below and within the corresponding tolerances.
Rated voltage Tolerance range

24 V DC 20 V DC to 30 V DC

A5E00247483-02 8-7

8-8 A5E00247483-02
Terminal Modules 9
9.1 Overview of Contents
Modules and Terminal Modules

The table below shows you which modules you can use on the various terminal
modules.
Table 9-1 Modules and Terminal Modules
Modules Terminal Modules

TM-PS-A TM-IM/IM TM-IM/EM 60S TM-EM/EM 60S
TM-PS-B TM-IM/EM 60C TM-EM/EM 60C
Order number 6ES7 193- 7DA00-0AA0 7AB00-0AA0 7AA00-0AA0 7CA00-0AA0
7DB00-0AA0 7AA10-0AA0 7CA10-0AA0
Power Supply PS Ĥ
Interface module IM 152 Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
8 DI NAMUR Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
4 DO DC23.1V/20mA Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
4 AI RTD Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
4 AI TC Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
4 AO I HART Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ
Reserve module Ĥ Ĥ Ĥ

A5E00247483-02 9-1
Terminal Modules
9.2 Terminal Modules TM-PS-A and TM-PS-B
Order number
Type Order No.

TM-PS-A 6ES7 193-7DA00-0AA0
TM-PS-B 6ES7 193-7DB00-0AA0
Features
• Terminal module for Power Supply PS
• Power supply for the entire ET 200iSP station
• Connected using screw terminals
• 3 terminals for connection to the power supply/grounding busbar PA
• Prewiring of the terminal module is possible
• Automatic discharge of interference from the interface module to the mounting
rail via spring contact
• Polarity reversal protection guaranteed by the power supply module.
Terminal assignment
Table 9-2 Pinout on Terminal Modules TM-PS-A and TM-PS-B
View Terminal Name

L+ Power supply to the inserted Power
Supply Module (DC 24 V)
PA Equipotential bonding
L+
M
PA

9-2 A5E00247483-02
Terminal Modules
Block diagram
TM-PS-A TM-PS-B
Powerbus
IM 152
Backplane bus
PS PS
Equipotential Equipotential
Power supply Supply voltage
bonding bonding
terminals terminals
Figure 9-1 Block Diagram of Terminal Modules TM-P-A and TM-PS-B
Technical data
Dimensions and weight Safety data
Dimensions W x H x D 60 x 190 x 52 See EC Prototype Certifi- KEMA 04ATEX2242
(mm) cate
Weight Approx. 235 g * Observe the wiring rules in Section 5.5.1.
Module-specific data
Number of terminals 3 x power supply /
PA
Conductor cross-section 0.5 to 4 mm2*
Type of protection
• CENELEC
II2 G (1) GD EEx deƪia/ibƫ IIC T4
0344

A5E00247483-02 9-3
Terminal Modules
9.3 Terminal modules TM-IM/EM 60S and TM-IM/EM 60C
Order number
6ES7 193-7AA00-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7 193-7AA10-0AA0 (spring terminal)
Features
• Terminal module for one interface module (left side) and one electronic module
(right side)
• PROFIBUS RS 485-IS connection via 9-pin Sub D socket
• Connection of actuators and sensors by means of screw terminals for
TM-IM/EM 60S
• Connection of actuators and sensors by means of spring terminals
for TM-IM/EM 60C
• Self-generating interference leakage from the terminal module to the mounting
rail by means of a spring contact
Note
The spring contact to the mounting rail connects the cable shield of the
PROFIBUS-DP cable with the equipotential bonding under normal operating
conditions.

9-4 A5E00247483-02
Terminal Modules
Terminal assignment
Table 9-3 Pinout on the TM-IM/EM
View Terminal Name

1 PA Equipotential bonding
2 – –
3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
5
9 4 – –
4
8
3
7 2 5 ISGND Bus termination ground
6 1
6 ISP Bus termination P
7 – –
8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
9 –
1 5 9 13 For the pinout, refer to Section

Digital and Analog Electronic Modules
2 6 10 14
3 7 11 15
4 8 12 16

A5E00247483-02 9-5
Terminal Modules
Block diagram
Power bus
IM 152 power supply
Backplane bus
IM EM
1 5 9 13
2 6 10 14
Terminals with connection to the
3 7 11 15 electronic module
A
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS 4 8 12 16
connection B:
Figure 9-2 Block diagram of Terminal Module TM-IM/EM
Technical data
Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D 60 x 190 x 52
(mm)
Weight Approx. 235 g
Terminal element 9-pin Sub D socket
for PROFIBUS
RS 485-IS
Number of terminals 4x4
Cable cross-sections 0.14 mm to
2.5 mm1)
Safety data
See EC Prototype Certifi- KEMA 04ATEX2242
cate
1) Observe the wiring rules. See chapter 5.5.1.

9-6 A5E00247483-02
Terminal Modules
9.4 Terminal module TM-IM/IM
Order number
6ES7 193-7AB00-0AA0
Features
• Terminal module for two interface modules (left and right side) for use when the
IM 152 is configured for redundancy
• PROFIBUS RS 485-IS connection via 9-pin Sub D sockets
rail by means of spring contacts
Note
The spring contact to the mounting rail connects the cable shield of the
PROFIBUS-DP cable with the equipotential bonding under normal operating
conditions.
Terminal assignment
Table 9-4 Pinout on the TM-IM/IM
View Terminal Name

1 PA Equipotential bonding
2 – –
3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
5
9 4 4 – –
8 3
7 5 ISGND Bus termination ground
2
6 1 6 ISP Bus termination P
7 – –
8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
9 –

A5E00247483-02 9-7
Terminal Modules
Block diagram
Power bus
IM 152
Backplane bus
IM IM
A A
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
connection (a) B
connection (b)
B
Figure 9-3 Block diagram of Terminal Module TM-IM/IM
Technical data

(mm)
Weight Approx. 195 g
Terminal element Two 9-pin Sub D
sockets for
PROFIBUS
RS 485-IS
Safety data
cate

9-8 A5E00247483-02
Terminal Modules
9.5 Terminal modules TM-EM/EM 60S and TM-EM/EM 60C
Order number
6ES7 7CA00-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7 7CA10-0AA0 (spring terminal)
Properties
• Terminal module for two electronic modules
• Connection of actuators and sensors by means of screw terminals
for TM-EM/EM 60S
• Connection of actuators and sensors by means of spring terminals
for TM-EM/EM 60C
rail by means of a spring contact
Pinout
Table 9-5 Pinout of Terminal Module TM-EM/EM
View Terminal Name
1 5 9 13 1 5 9 13
2 6 10 14 2 6 10 14
For the pinout, refer to Section

3 7 11 15 3 7 11 15 Digital and Analog Electronic Modules
4 8 12 16 4 8 12 16

A5E00247483-02 9-9
Terminal Modules
Block diagram
Power bus
Backplane bus
EM EM
1 5 9 13 1 5 9 13
2 6 10 14 2 6 10 14
Terminals with connection to the
3 7 11 15 3 7 11 15 electronic module
4 8 12 16 4 8 12 16
Figure 9-4 Block Diagram of Terminal Module TM-EM/EM
Technical Data

(mm)
Weight approx. 275 g
Number of terminals 8x4
Cable cross-sections 0.14 mm to
2.5 mm1)
Safety data
cate
1) Observe the wiring rules. See chapter 5.5.1.

9-10 A5E00247483-02
Power Supply PS 10
Order number
6ES7 138-7EA00-0AA0
Features
• supplies galvanically isolated output voltages required by ET 200iSP:
– Powerbus
– Interface module power supply
– Backplane bus
• Handles the safety-related limitation of the output voltages
Block diagram
Output voltages:
L+ Powerbus
M Power supply IM
PA Backplane bus
Figure 10-1 Block Diagram of the Power Supply PS

A5E00247483-02 10-1
Power Supply PS
Technical data
Dimensions and weight Isolation tested

Dimensions W x H x D 60 x 190 x 136.5 • between supply voltage 1500 VAC
(mm) and all output voltages
Weight approx. 2700 g • between all output 500 VAC
voltages
Current consumption
Type of protection of the
module • from L+ power supply max. 4 A
• CENELEC Power loss of the module 20 W
II2 G EEx de [ib] IIC T4
Permitted input power max. 78.6 W
Output current at ambient
0344
temperature
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials • from –20_C to +60_C max. 5 A
Rated supply voltage 24 VDC 1) with horizontal
installation, and
• Polarity reversal yes –20_C to +40_C with all
protection other mounting
• Power failure buffering at least 0.25 ms positions
Powerbus • from +60_C to +70_C max. 3.5 A
• Power failure buffering at least 15 ms with horizontal
IM 152 installation
• Power failure buffering at least 0.25 ms Status, interrupts, diagnostics
backplane bus Status display yes (on IM 152)
Electrical isolation Interrupts No
• between the supply yes Diagnostic functions
voltage and Powerbus
• Group error display No
• between the supply yes
voltage and backplane • Reading of diagnostic yes (via IM 152)
bus as well as IM data
supply Safety data
cate
UM 60 VDC
1) Fusing with 6 A automatic circuit breaker and
tripping characteristic C (for each ET 200iSP station)
Note
Take appropriate measures to ensure that Um = 60 VDC is not exceeded.
Always use power supply modules with safe electrical isolation for the 24 VDC
power supply of the ET 200iSP.

10-2 A5E00247483-02
Interface Module 11
11.1 Interface module IM 152
Order number
6ES7 152-1AA00-0AB0
Features
Features of interface module IM 152:
• Connects the ET 200iSP with the PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
• Prepares the data for the assembled electronic modules
• PROFIBUS address setting by means of switch
• Switching off the 24 VDC supply voltage at terminal module
TM-PS-A also switches off the IM 152 interface module.
• The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs, and 244 bytes for outputs.
• Operation as DPV0, S7 DP, and DPV1 slaves
• Module slot for MMC
• Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP or from MMC
• Backup of electronic module parameters:
– The parameters / data are stored in IM 152 flash memory.
– After you power on the ET 200iSP, the IM 152 distributes the stored
parameter / data to the electronic modules (substitution values at output
modules, for example).
– Then, PROFIBUS DP is enabled and the automation system is put into
operation by the DP master.
– Once the ET 200iSP begins exchanging data with the DP master, the
substitute values (in the flash memory) in the output are replaced with the
current data of the DP master.
• Redundancy of IM 152 (V2.0 and higher)

A5E00247483-02 11-1
Interface Module
Block diagram
PROFIBUS
address
SF BF ACT ON PS1 PS2

Electrical PROFIBUS-DP
ET 200iSP isolation connection
Backplane bus
backplane A1
Electronic circuit A2
bus
B1
interface B2
Powerbus
Figure 11-1 Block Diagram Interface Module IM 152

11-2 A5E00247483-02
Interface Module
Technical data
Dimensions and weight Type of protection of the module
Dimensions • CENELEC
W x H x D (mm) 30 x 129 x 136.5 II2 G EEx ib IIC T4
0344
Module–specific data
Transmission rate 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
187.5; 500 kbps,
1.5 Mbps Electrical isolation
Bus protocol PROFIBUS RS 485-IS • between backplane No

bus and electronic
Interface RS–485 (intrinsically circuits
safe)
• between PROFIBUS yes
SYNC capability yes RS 485-IS and
FREEZE capability yes electronic circuits
Vendor ID 8110H Current consumption max. 30 mA

from power supply
PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 125 permitted (Powerbus)
Direct Data Exchange yes, slave to slave as Power loss of the 0.5 W
publisher module
Clock synchronization No Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Time stamping yes (STEP 7 only) Interrupts yes
• Accuracy class 20 ms Diagnostics function yes
• Time resolution 1 ms • Group error red LED ”SF”
• Number of digital max. 64 at accuracy • Bus monitoring red LED ”BF”
input signals class 20 ms • Redundancy yellow LED ”ACT”
• Message buffer 15 message buffers, • Monitoring of the green LED ”ON”
each for 20 messages power supply of the
• Time interval for 1s electronic system
sending the • Monitoring of the green LED ”PS1”
message buffers supply voltage at
when a message is Power Supply PS 1
queued
• Monitoring of the green LED ”PS2”
• Time stamp per digital input supply voltage at
per digital input module Power Supply PS 2
entire ET 200iSP
• Time stamp at positive / negative edge
as coming or going
event
• Time–of–day format RFC 1119 Internet (ISP)
Acyclic functions yes
• Interrupts yes
• Diagnostics yes
• Parameters yes
• Data records yes

A5E00247483-02 11-3
Interface Module
Safety data
See EC Prototype KEMA 04ATEX1243
Certificate
Maximum values for PROFIBUS RS 485-IS
interface:
• Vo $3.9 V
• Io $136 mA
• Po 132 mW
• Vi $4.2 V
11.2 Parameters for IM 152
Parameters
For information on parameter assignment, refer to chapter 6.
Table 11-1 Parameters for Interface Module IM 152-2
IM 152 parameters Range of values Default Effective range

Operation if Preset - <> • disable disable ET 200iSP
Actual configuration • enabled
Self-diagnostics • disable disable ET 200iSP
• enabled
Redundant Power • No redundant Power No redundant Power ET 200iSP
Supply diagnostics Supply Supply
• Redundant Power
Supply
• Redundant Power
Supply required
Diagnostics interrupts1) • disable disable ET 200iSP
• enable
Process interrupts1) • disable disable ET 200iSP
• enable
Time stamping • yes No ET 200iSP
(enable parameter)2) • No
Edge signal evaluation • Rising edge (0-->1) Rising edge (0––>1) ET 200iSP
coming event2) • Falling edge (1-–>0)
• channel–specific
Data format • SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S7 ET 200iSP
Interference frequency • 50 Hz 50 Hz ET 200iSP
suppression • 60 Hz
Unit of temperature • Celsius Celsius ET 200iSP
• Fahrenheit

11-4 A5E00247483-02
Interface Module
Table 11-1 Parameters for Interface Module IM 152-2, continued

Slot reference junction 1 • None None ET 200iSP
to 2 • 4 to 35
Input reference junction • RTD on channel 0 RTD on channel 0 ET 200iSP
1 to 4 • RTD on channel 1
• RTD on channel 2
• RTD on channel 3
1) These parameters can be edited or not, depending on the configuration tool used.
2) Can only be assigned in HW Config and if the ET 200iSP is being operated as an S7 DP slave.
11.3 Description of the Parameters for IM 152
11.3.1 Operation if Preset-<> Actual configuration
When this parameter is enabled, and

• a module is inserted or removed in runtime, the ET 200iSP station will not fail
• the actual configuration differs from the preset configuration, the ET 200iSP
continues to exchange data with the DP master.
When this parameter is disabled, and
• a module is inserted or removed in runtime, the ET 200iSP station will fail
• The actual configuration differs from the preset configuration, no data exchange
takes place between the DP master and the ET 200iSP.
11.3.2 Self–diagnostics
If this parameter is enabled, the diagnostic data for the redundant Power Supply
PS are evaluated.

A5E00247483-02 11-5
Interface Module
11.3.3 Redundant Power Supply diagnostics
This parameter specifies the diagnostic behavior for the redundant Power Supply:
• ”No redundant Power Supply”: no diagnostics; station failure in event of Power
Supply failure.
• ”Redundant Power Supply”: Diagnostics for failure of Power Supply PS 1 or
PS 2.
This setting is required if you are using two Power Supply units in a redundant
configuration.
• ”Redundant Power Supply required”: Diagnostics and station failure in event of
Power Supply failure.
11.3.4 Diagnostics Interrupts
You can use this parameter to enable or disable diagnostics interrupts (”master
switch” for ET 200iSP). Diagnostic interrupts are supported only if the ET 200iSP is
in S7 DP or DPV1 mode.
11.3.5 Process Alarms
You can use this parameter to enable or disable process alarms (”master switch”
for ET 200iSP). Process interrupts are supported only if the ET 200iSP is in S7 DP
or DPV1 mode.
11.3.6 Time Stamping / Edge Evaluation
For information on time stamping, refer to chapter 3.9.
11.3.7 Data Format
Set the file format for all electronic modules of ET 200iSP at this parameter.

11-6 A5E00247483-02
Interface Module
11.3.8 Interference Frequency Suppression
The frequency of your AC power system can interfere with the measured value,
particularly when measuring in low voltage ranges and using thermocouples. Here,
enter the mains frequency in your system (50 Hz or 60 Hz).
The interference frequency suppression parameter applies to all analog electronic
modules. With this parameter, you also specify the integration and conversion
times of the individual modules. See Technical Specifications of the Analog
Electronics Modules13.
11.3.9 Unit of temperature
With this parameter, you set the unit of temperature for the temperature sensors
and thermocouples.
”S7 Format” data format: Unit of temperature ”Celsius” or ”Fahrenheit” can be
selected
The unit of temperature parameter is used for the 4AI RTD and 4AI TC analog
electronic modules.
11.3.10 Slot Reference Junction / Reference Junction Input
How to connect thermocouples is described in chapter 13.2.1.
11.4 Identification and Message Functions (I&M)
For information on I&M functions, refer to chapter 3.12.

A5E00247483-02 11-7
Interface Module

11-8 A5E00247483-02
Digital Electronic Modules 12
12.1 Digital Electronic Module 8 DI NAMUR
Order number
6ES7 131-7RF00-0AB0
Features
• Digital electronic module with eight inputs
• Encoder power supply 8 VDC
• Suitable for NAMUR encoders and wired and unwired mechanical contacts
• Counting and frequency measurements

A5E00247483-02 12-1
Pinout for NAMUR Encoders or Encoders According to DIN 19234
Table 12-1 Pinout for NAMUR Encoders or Encoders According to DIN 19234
Terminal assignment and view Comments

Encoder 1:
Channel channel 0: Terminals 1 and 2
Connection example of
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 channel 0 Encoder 2:
1 5 9 13 channel 1: Terminals 5 and 6
DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 Encoder 3:
1 1 channel 2: Terminals 9
2 6 1014 1k and 10
VS VS VS VS 10 k Encoder 4:
2 2
3 7 1115 channel 3: Terminals 13
and 14
DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7
Encoder 5:
4 8 1216 channel 4: Terminals 3 and 4
VS VS VS VS Encoder 6:
channel 5: Terminals 7 and 8
4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7
Encoder 7:
Channel channel 6: Terminals 11
and 12
Encoder 8:
channel 7: Terminals 15
and 16
DI: Input signal
VS: Encoder supply

12-2 A5E00247483-02
Pinout for NAMUR Changeover Contacts or Encoders According to DIN 19234

Changeover Contacts
Table 12-2 Pinout for NAMUR Changeover Contacts or Encoders According to DIN 19234
Changeover Contacts

Changeover contact 1
Example of a channel 0 and Channel 0: Terminals 1 and
Channel channel 1 connection 2
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
1 5 9 1 NO contact channel 1: Terminal 5
3 10 k Changeover contact 2
DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 1 1 1k
5 5 Channel 2: Terminals 9 and
2 61 1 10
0 4 channel 3: Terminal 13
VS VS VS VS 2 2
3 7 1 1 NC contact
DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 or 4
4 81 1 channel 5: Terminal 7
2 6 Changeover contact 4
VS VS VS VS
Channel 6: Terminals 11
and 12
4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7
channel 7: Terminal 15
Channel
DI: Input signal
VS: Encoder supply

A5E00247483-02 12-3
Terminal Assignment of Single Contact with 10 kW

Load Resistance (Mechanical NO Contact)
Table 12-3 Terminal Assignment of Single Contact with 10 k Load Resistance (Mechanical NO
Contact)

Single contact 1
Channel Channel 0: Terminals 1
Example of a channel 0 and 2
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
connection
1 5 9 13 Single contact 2
DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 1 and 6
2 6 10 14 10 k Single contact 3
VS VS VS VS Channel 2: Terminals 9
2 and 10
3 7 1115
Single contact 4
DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7
4 8 1216 and 14
VS VS VS VS Single contact 5
4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7 and 4
Channel Single contact 6
and 8
Single contact 7
and 12
Single contact 8:
Terminals 15 and 16
DI: Input signal
VS: Encoder supply

12-4 A5E00247483-02
Terminal assignment of changeover contact with 10 kW load resistance

(mechanical NO contact)
Table 12-4 Terminal Assignment of Changeover Contact with 10 k Load Resistance

(Mechanical Changeover Contact)

Channel Example of a channel 0 and Channel 0: Terminals 1
channel 1 connection and 2
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
1 5 9 1 channel 1: Terminal 5
3 10 k Changeover contact 2
DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 1 Channel 2: Terminals 9
5
2 61 1 and 10
VS VS VS VS
2 Changeover contact 3
3 7 1 1
1 5 Channel 4: Terminals 3
DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 and 4
VS VS VS VS
and 12
4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7
Channel
DI: Input signal
VS: Encoder supply

A5E00247483-02 12-5
Terminal Assignment of a Single Contact without Load Resistance

(Mechanical NO Contact with Single Contact)
Table 12-5 Terminal Assignment of a Single Contact without Load Resistance

(Mechanical NO Contact with Single Contact )

Single contact 1
Channel Channel 0: Terminals 1 and
Example of a channel 0 2
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
1 5 9 1 connection Single contact 2
3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and
DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 1 6
2 61 1 Single contact 3
0 4
VS VS VS VS Channel 2: Terminals 9 and
2 10
3 7 1 1
1 5 Single contact 4
DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7
Channel 3: Terminals 13 and
4 81 1 14
2 6
VS VS VS VS Single contact 5
4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7 4
Channel Single contact 6
8
Single contact 7
12
Single contact 8:
Terminals 15 and 16
DI: Input signal
VS: Encoder supply

12-6 A5E00247483-02
Terminal Assignment of a Changeover Contact without Load Resistance

Table 12-6 Terminal Assignment of a Changeover Contact without Load Resistance


Example of a channel 0 and Channel 0: Terminals 1 and
Channel channel 1 connection 2
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
1 5 9 1 channel 1: Terminal 5
DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 1 Channel 2: Terminals 9 and
5
2 61 1 10
VS VS VS VS
3 7 1 1
DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 4
VS VS VS VS
and 12
4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7
Channel
DI: Input signal
VS: Encoder supply
Block Diagram
Input
wiring
1
Backplane 5
bus C
Backplane bus
9
interface
13
DI:
3
7
11
15
2
6
Powerbus
10
14
Vs:
4
8
12
16
Figure 12-1 Block Diagram of 8 DI NAMUR

A5E00247483-02 12-7
Technical Data
Dimensions and weight Safety data

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 30 x 129 x 136.5 See EC Prototype Certificate KEMA
Weight approx. 255 g 04ATEX1248
Module-specific data Data for selecting an encoder
Number of inputs 8 Input current for NAMUR to NAMUR or
encoder EN 50227
Cable length
• shielded max. 200 m
• for ”1” signal min. 2.1 mA
Type of protection • for ”0” signal max. 1.2 mA
• CENELEC Input current for 10 k wired
contact
II2 G (1) GD EEx ibƪiaƫ IIC T4
• for ”1” signal min. 2.1 mA
0344
• for ”0” signal max. 1.2 mA
Input current for an
non-switched contact
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
• for ”1” signal (channel 0,1) typically 9.5 mA
Number of inputs 8
• for ”1” signal typically 7.5 mA
Electrical isolation
(channels 2 to 7)
• Between channels and yes
• permitted quiescent 0.5 mA
backplane bus
current
• Between the channels No
Input delay
Permitted potential difference
• ”0” to ”1” transition 2.8 ms to 3,5 ms
• Between different circuits 60 VDC, 30 VAC • ”1” to ”0” transition 2.8 ms to 3.5 ms
Current consumption
Tolerated settling time for 300 ms
• From supply voltage max. 70 mA changeover contacts
(power bus) with 8 x
Parallel wiring of inputs No
NAMUR encoders
Counter
• from power supply max. 90 mA
(Powerbus), open contact Standard or periodic counting
functions
Power loss of the module
• with 8 x NAMUR 0.84 W
• Number 2
encoders • Channel 0, 1
• with open contact 1.1 W Cascaded counting function
Status, interrupts, diagnostics • Number 1
Status display • Channel 0
• Inputs green LED per Cascaded counting function
channel Encoder (max. frequency)
Interrupts • Pulse-no-pulse ratio 1:1
• Process alarm no • Edge steepness min. 100 ms
• Diagnostic interrupt yes, configurable • Line resistance Rcable 1 k
Diagnostic functions Input frequency
• Group error display red LED ”SF” • max. cable length 20 m 5 kHz
• Reading of diagnostic yes • max. cable length 100 m 1 kHz
data • max. cable length 200 m 500 Hz
Monitoring function Pulse duration 200 s
• Short-circuit Rload < 1501)
• Wire break Iload < 0.2 mA2)

12-8 A5E00247483-02
Frequency counter
Number 2
Channel 0, 1
Measuring frequency (GATE 50 ms, 200 ms,
time) 1s
Frequency resolution
• at a GATE time of 50 ms 20 Hz
• at a GATE time of 200 ms 5 Hz
• at a GATE time of 1 s 1 Hz
Input frequency 3)
• max. cable length 20 m 5 kHz
• max. cable length 100 m 1 kHz
• max. cable length 200 m 500 Hz
1) Applies to NAMUR encoders/ encoders

according to DIN 19234 and NAMUR
changeover contacts / encoders according to
DIN 19234 changeover contacts.
2) Applies to NAMUR encoders/ encoders
according to DIN 19234/ wired single contact
with 10 k and to NAMUR changeover contacts/
encoders according to DIN 19234 changeover
contacts/ wired changeover contacts with 10 k.
3) The system is unable to output the correct actual
values if the input frequency exceeds approx.
8 kHz.

A5E00247483-02 12-9
Diagnostics with the changeover encoder type

With the diagnostic functions for the changeover encoder type, the digital
electronic module monitors the changeover between two input channels. If there is
no signal transition at the NC contact when the specified changeover time (see
technical specifications) has expired, the module outputs diagnostics information.
Purpose
You can use the diagnostics function to
S analyze the encoder
S verify that the switch has changed between the NO contact and the NC contact.
Principle
If the digital inputs of a channel group are set to ”changeover contact”, the module
runs diagnostics for the changeover encoder type for this channel group. The
tolerated changeover time between the two channels is set to the fixed value of
300 ms.
If the plausibility check returns a negative result,
S the module indicates an ”invalid” value status of the NO channel,
S creates a diagnostic entry for the NO contact channel, and
S triggers a diagnostics interrupt.
The digital input signal and the value status are updated only for the NO channel
(channel 0, 2, 4, 6). For the NC channel (channel 1, 3, 5, 7), the digital input signal
is set to the fixed value ”zero,” and the value status is ”invalid” because this
channel is used only for the validation of the sensor.
Note the following points in the diagnosis for the changeover contact type of
sensor:
• If there is already an error on the NO contact channel (wire break, for example),
the module no longer carries out a diagnosis for changeover contact errors.
Changeover errors are still monitored on the other channels.
• You will find further details in the table below:
Table 12-7 Changeover Contact Diagnostics
Changeover contact Negative check means ...

Changeover switch as • Short-circuit or Also:
NAMUR • Wire break Changeover error or
external error (in DP
changeover switch with • Encoder defective or short-circuit
diagnostics)
load resistance Here, no distinction between a defective encoder
and short-circuit is possible.
changeover switch without Caution: no differentiation possible between
R-circuit • ”0” signal and wire break
• ”1” signal and short-circuit

12-10 A5E00247483-02
12.2 Digital Electronic Module 4 DO
Order number
Type Order number

4 DO DC23.1V/20mA 6ES7 132-7RD00-0AB0
4 DO DC17.4V/27mA 6ES7 132-7RD10-0AB0
4 DO DC17.4V/40mA 6ES7 132-7RD20-0AB0
Features
• 3 versions of digital output modules (see above)
• 4 outputs per module
• Rated load voltage 23.1 VDC or 17.4 VDC
• Outputs support EEx i magnetic solenoid valves, DC relays and actuators
• To enhance performance, you can connect in parallel two digital outputs of the
4 DO 17.4 VDC/27 mA (6ES7 132-7RD10-0AB0) or 4 DO 17.4 VDC/40 mA
(6ES7 132-7RD20-0AB0) electronic module for one actuator. This power
increase measure is only allowed on the same module and between the
following channels:
– Channel 0 and channel 1: bridge between terminal 3 and 7
– Channel 2 and channel 3: bridge between terminal 11 and 15
• You can connect an intrinsic switching signal to the actuator disable input. This
allows a simultaneous shut-down of all outputs of the electronic module. The
switching signal must be routed across a safety barrier. This function does not
influence the process image of outputs (PIO).

A5E00247483-02 12-11
Terminal assignment
Pinout with inserted electronic module 4 DO (6ES7 132-7RD00-0AB0,
6ES7 132-7RD10-0AB0, 6ES7 132-7RD20-0AB0)
Table 12-8 4 DO Terminal Assignment

Actuator connections:
Channel channel 0: Terminals 1 and 2
Example of
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 a channel 0 connection Channel 1: Terminals 5 and
1 5 9 1 6
3 Channel 2: Terminals 9 and
DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 1
10
2 61 1
M M M M 14
2
3 7 1 1 Power increase by wiring channel Power increase:
1 5 0 and 1 in parallel parallel wiring of channels 0
DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3
3 7 and 1: bridge between
4 81 1 terminal 3 and 7
2 6 Actuator shutdown
SI+ SI+ SIM SIM parallel wiring of channel 2
4 16
and channel 3: bridge
between terminal 11 and 15
Actuator shutdown at all
outputs channel 0 to
channel 3:
terminal 4 or 8: positive
voltage (intrinsically safe),
see Figure 12-6
terminal 12 or 16 Chassis
ground
DO: Digital outputs
M: Chassis ground
SI+: Signal input for channel
shutdown
SIM: Chassis ground

12-12 A5E00247483-02
Block Diagram
1 DO0
Backplane 3
bus C
Backplane bus
5 DO1
interface
7
9 DO2
11
13 DO3
15
4 SI+
8
Powerbus
2 M
6 M
10 M
12 SIM
14 M
16 SIM
Figure 12-2 Block Diagram 4 DO

A5E00247483-02 12-13
Technical Data
Dimensions and weight Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 30 x 129 x 136.5 Status display
Weight approx. 255 g • Outputs green LED per
channel
Interrupts
Number of outputs 4
• Process alarm No
Cable length
• Diagnostic interrupt yes, configurable
• Unshielded max. 200 m
Diagnostic functions
• Group error display red LED ”SF”
Type of protection
• Reading of diagnostic yes
• CENELEC data
II2 G (1) GD EEx ibƪiaƫ IIC T4
Monitoring function
0344 • Short-circuit R < 80 (one
output)
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials R < 40 (outputs
wired in parallel)
• Wire break R1) > 10 k
I < 100A
backplane bus
Safety data
• Between the channels No
See EC Prototype Certificate KEMA
04ATEX1249
load voltage (Powerbus)
Limit values for intrinsic switching signal SO:
Permitted potential difference
• Between different circuits 60 VDC, 30 VAC
• Vi 28 V
Current consumption from

• Ii irrelevant
power supply (Powerbus) • Pi 1.2 W
• 4 DO DC23.1V/20mA max. 340 mA • Ci 3 nF
• 4 DO DC17.4V/27mA max. 300 mA • Li 0 mH
• 4 DO DC17.4V/40mA max. 400 mA
Power loss of the module
• 4 DO DC23.1V/20mA 2.5 W
• 4 DO DC17.4V/27mA 2.1 W
• 4 DO DC17.4V/40mA 2.8 W

12-14 A5E00247483-02
Data for Selecting an Actuator Trend limit values E for

4 DO DC17,4/40mA
No-load voltage UAO
• Voltage UE min. 11.0 V
• 4 DO DC23.1V/20mA min. 23.1 V
• Current Ii min. 40 mA
• 4 DO DC17.4V/27mA min. 17.4 V
(one output)
• 4 DO DC17.4V/40mA min. 17.4 V min. 80 mA
Internal resistance Ri (outputs in
parallel)
• 4 DO DC23.1V/20mA 275
Output delay (with ohmic
• 4 DO DC17.4V/27mA 150
load)
• 4 DO DC17.4V/40mA 150
• ”0” to ”1” transition 2 ms
Trend limit values E for
• ”1” to ”0” transition 1.5 ms
4 DO DC23.1/20mA
Connecting 2 outputs in yes
• Voltage UE min. 17.1 V
parallel
• Current IE min. 20 mA
Switching frequency No
(one output)
• with ohmic load 100 Hz
Trend limit values E for
4 DO DC17.4/27mA • with inductive load 2 Hz
• Voltage UE min. 13.2 V Short-circuit protection of the yes
output
• Current IE min. 20 mA
(one output) Residual current of the output max. 25 A
min. 54 mA Data for selecting an encoder for the safety
(outputs in barrier2)
parallel)
Minimum switched voltage 15 V
Minimum switched current 2 mA
1) R=load resistance+ line resistance

2) Contact without load resistance required when
operated as input

A5E00247483-02 12-15
Output Characteristics 4 DO DC23.1V/20mA
one output
30
25
23.1
20
17.1 V
U [V] 15
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
I [mA]
Figure 12-3 Output Characteristics 4 DO DC23.1V/20mA
one output
two outputs in parallel
30
25
20
17.4
U [V] 15
13.2 V 13.2 V
10
0
0 10 20 27 30 40 50 54 60
I [mA]

12-16 A5E00247483-02
one output
two outputs in parallel
30
25
20
17.4
U [V] 15
11.0 V 11.0 V
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
I [mA]

A5E00247483-02 12-17
Actuator Shutdown by Means of Intrinsically Safe Switching Signal

(Safety Barrier)
An intrinsic signal routed across a safety barrier can be used to switch off one or
several digital output modules.
Enable this function by connecting the terminals of the safety barrier to terminals
4/8 (+) and 12/16 (–) of the digital output module. Terminals 12/16 are wired
internally to chassis ground of the electronic module.
You can also disconnect several digital output modules connected in parallel,
depending on the maximum output current of the safety barrier (see Figure 12-6.)
Note the maximum current of Imax = 4.4 mA per digital output module.
If an intrinsically safe switching signal is not input, the digital output module
operates in standard mode.
Safety barrier
4
4 DO 8
UO = 28 V + 24 V
12
16
/ PA
4
4 DO 8
12
16
4
4 DO 8
12
16
PA
Figure 12-6 Actuator Shutdown by Means of Intrinsically Safe Switching Signal (Safety
Barrier)
Notice
You may only use safety barriers with equipotential ground PA!
Make sure you safely connect the safety barrier and the (last) digital electronic
module controlled by the switching signal to the equipotential busbar PA. This
automatically interconnects ground of all outputs with the equipotential busbar PA.

12-18 A5E00247483-02
12.3 Parameters of the Digital Electronics Modules
12.3.1 Digital Electronic Module 8 DI NAMUR
Configuration with STEP 7 Version 5.3, Service Pack 1 or higher, and current
HW update
For a description, refer to the online help for STEP 7.
Configuration with GSD file

Several configuration options for the digital electronic module 8 DI NAMUR are
available in the HW catalog of the engineering software:
• ”8 DI NAMUR” configuration: 8 digital inputs
• ”2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” configuration: 2 counters and 6 digital inputs
• ”2 Count/ 6 Control” configuration: 2 counters and 6 control signals
• ”2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR” configuration: 2 frequency counters and 6 digital inputs

A5E00247483-02 12-19
Parameter 8 DI NAMUR, configuration ”8 DI NAMUR”

Table 12-9 ”8 DI NAMUR” parameters

Parameters Range of values Default Effective range
Time stamping1) • enabled disabled channel
• disabled
Edge signal evaluation • Rising edge (0––>1) Rising edge (0––>1) channel
coming event1) • Falling edge (1––>0)
Encoder type • Channel disabled NAMUR encoder channel
• NAMUR encoder
• Single contact, no
load resistance
• Single contact with
10k load
resistance
• NAMUR changeover
contact
• Changeover contact
without load
resistance
• Changeover contact
with 10k load
resistance
Pulse stretching • none none channel
• 0.5 s
• 1s
• 2s
Group diagnostics • enabled enabled channel
• disabled
Wire break diagnostics • enabled enabled channel
• disabled
Short-circuit diagnostics • enabled enabled channel
• disabled
Flutter error diagnostics • enabled disabled channel
• disabled
External error • enabled disabled channel
(faulty changeover • disabled
contact or encoder
power supply)
Flutter monitoring: • 0.5 s 2s channel
Monitoring window2) • 1 s to 100 s
(resolution
adjustable in steps
of 1 s)
Flutter monitoring: 2 to 31 5 channel
Number of signal
transitions2)
1) Can only be assigned in HW Config and if the ET 200iSP is being operated as an S7 DP slave.
2) This parameter can only be edited if flutter error diagnostics is enabled.

12-20 A5E00247483-02
Parameter 8 DI NAMUR, configuration ”2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR”

and ”2 Count/ 6 Control”
In addition to the ”8 DI NAMUR” configuration, you can set the following counting
parameters:
Table 12-10 Parameters for ”2 Count/ 6 DI NAMUR” and ”2 Count/ 6 Control”

Encoder type counter • Channel disabled NAMUR encoder channel
inputs • NAMUR encoder
resistance
Counter 1 mode • Standard counting Standard counting channel 0
function function
• Cascaded counting
function
Counter 2 mode • Standard counting Standard counting channel 1
function function
Parameter 8 DI NAMUR, configuration ”2 Count/ 6 Control”

In addition to the ”8 DI NAMUR” configuration, you can set the following counting
parameters:
Table 12-11 ”2 Count/ 6 Control” Parameters

Control channel • Channel disabled NAMUR encoder channel
• NAMUR encoder
resistance
Parameter 8 DI NAMUR, configuration ”2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR”

In addition to the ”8 DI NAMUR” configuration, you can set the following frequency
counting parameters:
Table 12-12 Parameters for ”2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR”

Encoder type frequency • Channel disabled NAMUR encoder channel
inputs • NAMUR encoder
resistance
Measuring window • 50 ms 1s channel
(GATE) • 200 ms
• 1s

A5E00247483-02 12-21
12.3.2 Digital electronic module 4 DO
Parameters 4 DO
Table 12-13 Parameters for 4 DO

Parallel connection of • yes no channel 0
channels* • no channel 2
Response when CPU/ • apply substitute apply substitute value channel
Master goes to STOP value
mode • Hold last value
Substitute value • 0 0 Channel
• 1
Group diagnostics • enabled enabled Channel
• disabled
Wire break diagnostics • enabled enabled Channel
• disabled
Short-circuit diagnostics • enabled enabled Channel
• disabled
* Not possible for 4DO DC23.1V/20mA
Danger
! The substitution values are store in flash memory of IM 152. These are output at
the next startup of the ET 200iSP until it starts exchanging data with the DP
master (see Section 11.1).
Make allowances for this reaction when you assign the ET 200iSP to a different
configuration environment.
Remedy: Delete flash memory in IM 152 (see chapter 7.2).
12.4 Parameters of the Digital Electronics Modules
12.4.1 Time Stamping
Use this parameter to enable tie stamping separately for each digital input of the
module. The time stamp will be passed from the ET 200iSP to the S7-400 or OS if
you also enable the ”Time Stamp” parameter in the IM 152.

12-22 A5E00247483-02
12.4.2 Pulse Stretching
The pulse stretching is a function used to modify a digital input signal. A pulse at a
digital input is stretched to at least the length set in the parameters. If the input
pulse is already longer than the selected length, it is not changed
Principle of Pulse Stretching

The figure below shows a few examples of input pulse modification.
Pulse stretching parameter = T1

T1 for 0 > 1 edge T1 for 1 > 0 edge
Process signal
”processed”
input signal
Pulse is shorter than T1, Pulse is longer than T1 and

and is stretched to T1 . is thus not changed.
Process signal
”processed”
input signal
The second pulse output during active Short pulses output within a pulse
pulse stretching is shifted until the stretching cycle are ignored.
current stretching period has expired.
Figure 12-7 Principle of Pulse Stretching
Note
If you set pulse stretching for an input channel, this also affects the flutter
monitoring enabled for this channel. The ”pulse stretched” signal is the input signal
for flutter monitoring. You should therefore adapt the pulse stretching parameters
and flutter monitoring functions to each other. Select appropriate parameter values
in order to tune the functions to your process.

A5E00247483-02 12-23
12.4.3 Flutter Monitoring
Flutter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects
and reports unusual process control signal patterns, for example, frequent
fluctuation of the ”0” and ”1” input signal. Such signal activities are an indication
that a sensor is defective or that the process is unstable.
Enabling flutter monitoring

Enable flutter monitoring by setting the number of signal transitions to a value other
than ”0.”
Detection of unusual signal patterns

A configurable monitoring window is available for each input channel. The
monitoring window is started at the first transition of the input signal. If the number
of input signal transitions within the monitoring window exceeds the set number,
the system detects a flutter error. If a flutter error is not detected within the
monitoring window, the monitoring window is started again at the next signal
change.
Reporting a Flutter Error

If a flutter error occurs, the current signal state is entered in the process image and
the value status of the signal is set to ”invalid”. The diagnostic information ”flutter
error” is entered and a diagnostic interrupt entering the state is triggered.
You must evaluate and process the value status and the diagnostic information in
the user program.
Resetting a Flutter Error

If no further fluttering of the input signal is detected during the triple monitoring
window, the diagnostic entry is removed and an outgoing diagnostic interrupt is
triggered. The value status of the current signal in the process image is set to
”valid”.

12-24 A5E00247483-02
Principle
The following figure illustrates the principle behind flutter monitoring.
Parameter for the number of signal transitions = 9
Parameter for monitoring window t = x 3 x monitoring window t = 3x
Process
signal
Detection
Diagnostics
Module diagnostics ”Flutter error” Module diagnostics

incoming ”Flutter error” going
= report = reset
Figure 12-8 Principle of Flutter Monitoring
12.4.4 Counting Parameters
The counting function is described in chapter 3.10.
12.4.5 Frequency Counting Parameters
The frequency counting function is described in chapter 3.11.

A5E00247483-02 12-25

12-26 A5E00247483-02
Analog Electronic Modules 13
13.1 Analog Value Visualization
Electronic modules with analog inputs

With the electronics module with analog inputs, continuously variable signals, such
as those occurring in temperature measurement and pressure measurement, can
be acquired, evaluated, and converted to digital values for further processing.
Electronic modules with analog outputs

With the electronics modules with analog outputs, digital values set by a controller
can be converted to a corresponding analog signal (current) in an analog output
module and used to control suitable actuators (setpoint input for speed controllers,
temperature controllers and similar).
Measured Values in the Event of Wire Break Dependent on Enabled Diagnostics

For the measuring range tables
• 4 to 20 mA
• Temperature sensor Pt100 standard and climatic, Ni100 standard and climatic
• Thermocouples type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U
the following supplements and rules apply:

A5E00247483-02 13-1
Format of Analog Values S7
Table 13-1 Measured Values in the Event of Wire Break Dependent on Enabled Diagnostics (Format S7)
Module Parameter Assignment Measured Values Explanation

decimal hexadecimal
4 AI I • ”Wire break” diagnostics 32767 7FFFH • Diagnostics message
enabled ”wire break”
• ”Wire break” diagnostics –32768 8000H • Measured value after
disabled1 leaving the undershoot
• ”Overflow/ range
underflow” diagnostics • ”Value under low limit”
enabled diagnostic message
• ”Wire break” diagnostics – – • Measured value after
disabled1 leaving the undershoot
• ”Overflow/ range
underflow” diagnostics
disabled
4 AI RTD • ”Wire break” diagnostics 32767 7FFFH • Diagnostics message ”
4 AI TC enabled wire break”
• ”Wire break” diagnostics – – • Open input:
disabled Undefined measured
value
1 Measuring range limits for detecting wire break in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA: at 3.6 mA
13.1.1 Analog Value Representation for Measuring Ranges with

SIMATIC S7
Analog value visualization

With the same nominal range, the digitized analog value is the same for input and
output values. Analog values are represented in two’s complement.
The following table shows the analog value representation of the analog
electronics modules.
Table 13-2 Analog Value Representation (SIMATIC S7 Format)
Resolution Analog Value

Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Significance of the bits S 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

13-2 A5E00247483-02
Sign
The sign (S) of the analog value is always in bit number 15:
• ”0”
• ”1”
Examples
Table 13-3 Examples
Analog Value
decimal binary hexadecimal
–1 1111 1111 1111 1111 FFFFH
–32768 1000 0000 0000 0000 8000H
Measured Value Resolution

The following table shows the representation of the binary analog values and the
corresponding decimal and hexadecimal representation of the units of the analog
values.
Table 13-4 presents the 11, 12, 13, and 15 bit + sign resolutions. Each analog
value is entered left aligned in the ACCU. The bits marked with ”x” are set to ”0”.
Table 13-4 Measured Value Resolution of the Analog Values (SIMATIC S7 Format)
Units Analog Value

Resolution in Bits decimal hexadeci- High byte Low byte
mal
11+S 16 10H S0000000 0001xxxx
12+S 8 8H S0000000 00001xxx
13+S 4 4H S0000000 000001xx
15+S 1 1H S0000000 00000001
Note
This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature
values are the result of a conversion in the analog electronics module (see
following table)

A5E00247483-02 13-3
13.1.2 Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules in S7 Format
Introduction
The tables in this section contain the digitized analog values for the measuring
ranges of the analog input modules.
Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, these
tables contain only a comparison of the measuring ranges with the units.
Voltage measuring ranges: 80 mV
Table 13-5 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range 80 mV
Measuring range Units

80 mV Range
decimal hexadecimal
> 94.071 32767 7FFFH Overflow
94.071 32511 7EFFH
: : : Overshoot range
80.003 27649 6C01H
80.000 27648 6C00H
60.000 20736 5100H
: : : Nominal range
– 60.000 –20736 AF00H
– 80.000 –27648 9400H
– 80.003 –27649 93FFH
: : : Undershoot range
– 94.074 –32512 8100H
< – 94.074 –32768 8000H Underflow

13-4 A5E00247483-02
Current measuring ranges: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Table 13-6 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Measuring Measuring Units

range range Range
0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA decimal hexadecimal
> 23.5178 > 22.8142 32767 7FFFH Overflow

23.5178 22.8142 32511 7EFFH
: : : : Overshoot
range
20.0007 20.0005 27649 6C01H
20.0000 20.0000 27648 6C00H
15.0000 16.0000 20736 5100H
: : : : Nominal range
0.0000 4.0000 0 0H
3.9995 –1 FFFFH
Negative values : : Undershoot
are not possible range
1.1852 –4864 ED00H
< 1.1852 –32768 8000H Underflow
Measuring ranges for resistive sensors: 600 absolute
Table 13-7 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges 600Ω Absolute
Measuring range 600 Units

Range
decimal hexadecimal
> 705.53 32767 7FFFH Overflow
705.53 32511 7EFFH
600.02 27649 6C01H
600.00 27648 6C00H
450.00 20736 5100H
: : : Nominal range
0.00 0 0H
–1 FFFFH
: : Undershoot range1
(negative values are not
physically possible) –4864 ED00H
–32768 8000H Underflow1
1 with faulty connection

A5E00247483-02 13-5
Measuring range of resistive thermometer Pt 100 Standard
Table 13-8 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges Pt 100 Standard in °C and °F
Pt 100 Units Pt 100 Units

Standard in Standard in
C
C decimal hexa F
F decimal hexa Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = 0.1 decimal
0.1C) F)
> 1000.0 32767 7FFFH > 1832.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H
: : : : : : Overshoot range
850.1 8501 2135H 1562.1 15621 3D05H
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 3D04H
: : : : : : Nominal range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH
: : : : : : Undershoot range
–243.0 –2430 F682H –405.4 –4054 F02AH
< – 243.0 –32768 8000H < – 405.4 –32768 8000H Underflow
Measuring range of resistive thermometer Pt 100 Climatic
Table 13-9 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges Pt 100 Climatic in in °C and °F
Pt 100 Units Pt 100 Units

Climatic Climate
in C
C decimal hexa in F
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.01C) 0.01 F)
155.00 15500 3C8CH 311.00 31100 797CH
130.01 13001 32C9H 266.01 26601 67E9H
130.00 13000 32C8H 266.00 26600 67E8H
–120.00 –12000 D120H –184.00 –18400 B820H
–120.01 –12001 D11FH –184.01 –18401 B81FH
–145.00 –14500 C75CH –229.00 –22900 A68CH
< – 145.00 –32768 8000H < – 229.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

13-6 A5E00247483-02
Measuring range of resistive thermometer Ni 100 Standard
Table 13-10 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges Ni 100 Standard in °C and °F
Ni 100 Units Ni 100 Units

Standard in Standard in
C
C decimal hexa F
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = 0.1 decimal
0.1C) F)
295.0 2950 B86H 563.0 5630 15FEH
250.1 2501 9C5H 482.1 4821 12D5H
250.0 2500 9C4H 482.0 4820 12D4H
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FDA8H
–60.1 –601 FDA7H –76.1 –761 FD07H
–105.0 –1050 FBE6H –157.0 –1570 F9DEH
< –105.0 –32768 8000H < –157.0 –32768 8000H Underflow
Measuring range of resistive thermometer Ni 100 Climate
Table 13-11 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Ranges Ni 100 Climate in °C and °F
Ni 100 Units Ni100 Units

Climate Climate
in C
C decimal hexa in F
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.01C) 0.01 F)
295.00 29500 733CH 327.66 32766 7FFEH
250.01 25001 61A9H 280.01 28001 6D61H
250.00 25000 61A8H 280.00 28000 6D60H
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
–60.01 –6001 E88FH –76.01 –7601 E24FH
–105.00 –10500 D6FCH –157.00 –15700 C2ACH
< – 105.00 –32768 8000H < – 157.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

A5E00247483-02 13-7
Measuring Range for Thermocouple: Type B
Table 13-12 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type B in °C and °F
Units Units
Type B Type B Range
in C decimal hexa in F decimal hexa
decimal decimal
2070.0 20700 50DCH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
1820.1 18201 4719H 2786.6 27866 6CDAH
1820.0 18200 4718H 2786.5 27865 6CD9H
0.0 0 0000H 32 320 0140H
–0.1 –1 FFFFH 31.9 319 013FH
–120.0 –1200 FB50H –184.0 –1840 F8D0H
< –120.0 –32768 8000H < –184.0 –32768 8000H Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple type E
Table 13-13 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type E in °C and °F
Units Units
Type E Type E Range
decimal decimal
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H
1000.1 10001 2711H 1832.1 18321 4791H
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H
< –270.0 – 32768 8000H < –454.0 – 32768 8000H Underflow

13-8 A5E00247483-02
Measuring range for thermocouple type J
Table 13-14 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type J in °C and °F
Units Units
Type J Type J Range
decimal decimal
1450.0 14500 38A4H 2642.0 26420 6734H
1200.1 12010 2EEAH 2192.1 21921 55A1H
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H
–210.0 –2100 F7CCH –346.0 –3460 F27CH
< –210.0 – 32768 8000H < –346.0 – 32768 8000H Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple type K
Table 13-15 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring range type K in °C and °F
Units Units
Type K Type K Range
decimal decimal
1622.0 16220 3F5CH 2951.6 29516 734CH
1372.1 13721 3599H 2501.7 25062 61B9H
1372.0 13720 3598H 2501.6 25061 61B8H
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H
< –270.0 – 32768 8000H < –454.0 – 32768 8000H Underflow

A5E00247483-02 13-9
Measuring range for thermocouple type L
Table 13-16 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type L in °C and °F
Units Units
Type L Type L Range
decimal decimal
1150.0 11500 2CECH 2102.0 21020 521CH
900.1 9001 2329H 1652.1 16521 4089H
900.0 9000 2328H 1652.0 16520 4088H
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H
< –200.0 –32768 8000H < –328.0 –32768 80000H Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple type N
Table 13-17 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type N in °C and °F
Units Units
Type N Type N Range
decimal decimal
1550.0 15500 3C8CH 2822.0 28220 6E3CH
1300.1 13001 32C9H 2372.1 23721 5CA9H
1300.0 13000 32C8H 2372.0 23720 5CA8H
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H
< –270.0 –32768 8000H –32768 8000H <EE44H Underflow

13-10 A5E00247483-02
Measuring range for thermocouple type R, S
Table 13-18 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type R, S in °C and °F
Units Units
Type R, S Type R, S Range
decimal decimal
2019.0 20190 4EDEH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
1769.1 17691 451BH 3216.3 32163 7DA3H
1769.0 17690 451AH 3216.2 32162 7DA2H
–50.0 –500 FE0CH –58.0 –580 FDBCH
–50.1 –510 FE0BH –58.1 –581 FDBBH
–170.0 –1700 F95CH –274.0 –2740 F54CH
< –170.0 –32768 8000H < –274.0 –32768 8000H Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple type T
Table 13-19 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type T in °C and °F
Units Units
Type T Type T Range
decimal decimal
540.0 5400 1518H 1004.0 10040 2738H
400.1 4001 0FA1H 752.1 7521 1DC1H
400.0 4000 0FA0H 752.0 7520 1D60H
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H
< –270.0 –32768 8000H < –454.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

A5E00247483-02 13-11
Measuring range for thermocouple type U
Table 13-20 SIMATIC S7 Format: Measuring Range Type U in °C and °F
Units Units
Type U Type U Range
decimal decimal
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 3D04H
600.1 6001 17771H 1112.1 11121 2B71H
600.0 2000 1770H 1112.0 11120 2B70H
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H
< –200.0 –32768 8000H < –328.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

13-12 A5E00247483-02
13.1.3 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules in S7 Format
Introduction
The table in this section contains the digitized analog values for the measuring
ranges of the analog output modules.
Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, these
tables contain only a comparison of the measuring ranges with the units.
Current output ranges: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Table 13-21 SIMATIC S7 Format: Output Ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Output range Output range Units

0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Range
decimal hexadecimal
0 0 > 32511 > 7EFFH Overflow
23.5178 22.8100 32511 7EFFH
: : : : Overshoot
range
20.0007 20.0005 27649 6C01H
20.0000 20.0000 27648 6C00H
: : : : Nominal range
0 4.0000 0 0H
0 3.9995 –1 FFFFH
: : : : Undershoot
range
0 0 –6912 E500H
0 0 < –6913 < E4FFH Underflow

A5E00247483-02 13-13
13.2 Basics of Analog Value Processing
13.2.1 Connecting Thermocouples
Introduction
This section contains additional information on connecting thermocouples.
Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature

There are several ways in which you can measure the reference junction
temperature to obtain an absolute temperature value from the difference in
temperature between the reference junction and the measurement junction.
Table 13-22 Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature
Option Explanation Reference junction

parameter
No compensation You obtain not only the temperature none
of the measurement junction. The
temperature of the reference junction
(transition from copper line to
thermocouple line) influences the
thermoelectromotive force as well.
The measured value is thus faulty.
Use of a You can measure the reference The parameters of IM152 and
resistance junction temperature using a of the 4 AI TC must be
thermometer resistance thermometer (Pt100 adapted:
Pt100 climate climate range). If parameterized • 4 AI RTD set to Pt100
range to measure accordingly, this temperature value is climate range in the
the reference distributed to the correct slot;
junction 4 AI TC modules in the ET 200iSP
temperature where it is offset against the
• 4 AI TC: Reference
junction: ”yes”; select
(practical method) temperature value obtained at the
reference junction number
measuring location.
”1” or ”2”
Number of reference junctions: 2
• IM 152-1:
Assignment of the
reference junction to a slot
with 4 AI RTD; channel
selection;
Internal The TC sensor module (temperature • 4 AI TC:
compensation 4 AI sensor) is mounted onto the reference junction number
TC terminals of terminal module EM 4 ”Internal”
AI TC. The temperature sensor
reports the terminal temperature to
the 4 AI TC. This value is computed
with the measured value of the
channel of the electronic module.

13-14 A5E00247483-02
Extension to a reference junction

From their point of connection, thermocouples can be extended using equalizing
cables as far as the reference junction (transition to copper wiring). The reference
junction can also be an ET 200iSP terminal module.
The compensation cables are made of the same material as the wires of the
thermocouple. The connecting cables are made of copper. Make sure that you do
not reverse polarity.
Compensation by means of resistive thermometer at the 4 AI RTD

If thermocouples connected to the inputs of the 4 AI TC have the same reference
junction, compensate using a 4 AI RTD.
You can assign the channels of the 4 AI TC module the reference junction number
”1”, ”2” or ”Internal.” If you select ”1” or ”2”, the same reference junction (RTD
channel) is always used for all four channels.
4 AI RTD configured for

measuring range Pt100 climate
range
4 AI RTD 4 AI TC
Insulated thermocouples
with external
compensation by means
of resistive thermometer,
connected to 4 AI RTD
(channel 0)
1 5 9 13 1 5 9 13 1 5 9 13 1 5 9 13
M+:
M+:
2 6 10 14 2 6 10 14 2 6 10 14 2 6 10 14
M– M–
3 7 11 15 3 7 11 15 3 7 11 15 3 7 11 15
IC+
4 8 12 16 4 8 12 16 4 8 12 16 4 8 12 16
IC–
Abbreviations used:
M+: Measuring cable positive
M–: Measuring cable negative
IC+ Constant current cable positive
IC–: Constant current cable negative
Figure 13-1 Compensation by 4 AI RTD

A5E00247483-02 13-15
Setting Parameters for the Reference Junction

You can set the reference junction for the 4 AI TC electronics modules using the
following parameters:
Table 13-23 Reference Junction Parameters
Parameters Module Range of values Description

Slot reference junction IM 152 none, 4 to 35 With this parameter, you can
1 to slot 2 assign up to 2 slots (none, 4 to
35), in which the channels for
reference temperature
measurement (calculating the
compensation value).
Input reference junction IM 152 RTD on channel 0 With this parameter you specify
reference junction 1 to 4 RTD on channel 1 the channel (0/1/2/3) for
input reference junction reference temperature
RTD on channel 2
measurement (calculating the
RTD on channel 3 compensation value) for the
relevant slot.
Reference junction E0 to 4 AI TC none With these parameters, you can
reference junction E3 yes enable the use of the reference
junction.
Reference junction 4 AI TC 1 With this parameter, you assign
number 2 the reference junction (1 to 2)
containing the reference
Internal
temperature (compensation
value).
Example of the Configuration of Reference Junctions

• Structure: For simplification purposes, Figure 13-2 shows only RTD and TC
modules:
Example
Reference Reference
junction 1 junction 2
8 11 15 22 32
4 AI RTD
4 AI RTD
4 AI TC
4 AI TC
4 AI TC
... ... ... ... ... ...

E0
E1
E2
E3
E0
E1
E2
E3
E0
E1
E2
E3
E0
E1
E2
E3
E0
E1
E2
E3
Compensation by 4 AI RTD modules
Figure 13-2 Example of the Configuration of Reference Junctions

13-16 A5E00247483-02
• Relevant parameters for interface module IM 152-2
Parameters Value
Slot reference junction 1 8
Input reference junction 1 RTD on channel 0
Slot reference junction 2 11
Input reference junction 2 RTD on channel 1
• Relevant parameters for 4 AI RTD and 4 AI TC:
Slot Parameters Value

8 (4 AI RTD) Measurement type / range I0 RTD-4 wire connection/
Pt 100 climatic range
11 (4 AI RTD) Measurement type/range I0 RTD-4 wire connection/
Pt 100 climatic range
15 (4 AI TC) Reference junction I0 yes
Reference junction E1/E2/E3 none
Reference junction number 2
Measuring range E0 Type...
Reference junction E1/E2/E3 (any)
22 (4 AI TC) Reference junction E0/E1 yes
Reference junction E2/E3 none
Measuring range E0/E1 Type...
Measuring range E2/E3 (any)
32 (4 AI TC) Reference junction I0 none
Reference junction E1 yes
Reference junction E2/E3 none
Measuring range E0 (any)
Measuring range E1 Type...
Measuring range E2/E3 (any)
Non-insulated thermocouples
If you use non-insulated thermocouples, make sure that you adhere to the
permitted common mode voltage.

A5E00247483-02 13-17
13.3 Basics of HART
What is HART?
With the HART functionality, you can operate the analog modules with additional
digital communications options. The HART protocol has become established as the
”de facto” standard protocol for communication with intelligent field devices: HART
is a registered trademark of the ”HART Communication Foundation” (HCF), which
holds all rights for the HART protocol.
Note
The HART analog modules support the HART Protocol V6.0.
13.3.1 HART Features
What Are the Advantages of HART?

Advantages of using HART analog modules:
• Connection compatible with the analog modules: current loop 4 – 20 mA
• Additional digital communication using the HART protocol
• Low energy requirements of HART, important for applications in hazardous
areas
• Numerous field devices with HART functions are in use
What Are the Typical Applications for HART?

• Commissioning of field devices (centralized parameter assignment)
• Online changeability of field device parameters
• Information, maintenance, and diagnostic displays for the field devices
13.3.2 Function Principle of HART
Introduction
The HART protocol describes the physical form of the transfer:
transfer procedures, message structure, data formats and commands.

13-18 A5E00247483-02
HART Signal
The following figure shows the analog signal as carrier of the modulated HART
signal (FSK technique) composed of 1200 Hz and 2200 Hz sine waves having an
average value of zero. It can be filtered out using an input filter so that the original
analog signal is available again.
+0.5 mA
–0.5 mA
1200 Hz 2200 Hz
20 mA ”1” ”0”
A C A C
C A
Analog signal
A=Answer
C=Command
4 mA
Time (seconds)
Figure 13-3 The HART Signal
HART Commands and Parameters

With SIMATIC PDM, you can assign parameters for the HART field devices using
HART commands and read them out using HART response messages. The
HART commands and their parameters are divided into three groups with the
following properties:
• universal
• general usage
• device-specific
Universal commands must be supported by all manufacturers of HART field
devices, and common practice commands should be supported. There are also
commands specific to the device that apply only to the particular field device.

A5E00247483-02 13-19
Examples of HART Parameters

The following table presents HART parameters of the various groups:
Table 13-24 Examples of HART Parameters
Parameter Group Parameters of the HART Field Device

universal Measured value or manipulated variable
(primary variable), manufacturer, tag, or
identifier for actuator, other measured
values or manipulated variables
general usage Measuring range, filter time, alarm
parameters (message, alarm and warning
limits, output range)
device-specific Special diagnostic information

13-20 A5E00247483-02
13.3.3 Integration of HART Field Devices with ET 200iSP
Use in the ET 200iSP

With a HART analog module, you can connect a field device to each of the four
channels. The module operates as the HART master, the field devices as HART
slaves.
SIMATIC PDM sends and receives data via the HART analog module, comparable
to a client to which the HART analog module acts as a server.
4 AI I 2WIRE HART = HART master = 4 AO I HART
HART slave
Intelligent field for example

lowest devices such SIPART PS
layer: as SITRANS P
Measuring transducer Final control elements
Figure 13-4 Location of the HART Analog Modules in the Distributed System

A5E00247483-02 13-21
13.3.4 Use of HART
System Environment for Using HART

To use an intelligent field device with HART functionality, you require the following
system environment:
Current loop 4 – 20 mA via the analog electronics modules: 4 AI I 2WIRE HART,
4 AI I 4WIRE HART or 4AO I HART.
The HART analog module takes over the function of a ”master” by receiving the
commands from the HART parameter assignment tool, passing them on to the
intelligent field device, and then returning the response messages. The interface of
the HART analog module is represented by data records that are transferred via
the I/O bus. These data records are generated or interpreted by the HART
parameter assignment tool (SIMATIC PDM).
The analog values are entered in the process input and output image in 16-bit
format and with up to 4 IEEE tags (master or auxiliary tags).

13-22 A5E00247483-02
STEP 7, SIMATIC PDM, HART-Handheld

You can assign the HART parameters either with an external HART handheld
device or with SIMATIC PDM.
SIMATIC PDM accesses through the HART analog module, while the HART
handheld is connected directly in parallel to the field device.
SIMATIC
PDM
PROFIBUS-DP
RS 485 IS coupler
HART- resistor
L+ 24 V
Filtering of
modem
HART- signal
Analog/Digital Conversion
ADC
of the cyclic measured value
M : Chassis ground
4 to 20 mA
HART Handheld (EEx i)

Field device with HART
functionality
Figure 13-5 System Environment for HART Applications

A5E00247483-02 13-23
Transparent Message Data Format

The ET 200iSP HART analog modules support the transparent message data
format. With SIMATIC PDM, you therefore have direct access to the HART field
devices for commands and response messages.
Every HART analog module is equipped with a shared HART modem for the four
channels. This means that you can only directly access one channel of the module
at any given time with SIMATIC PDM (channel multiplexing). Simultaneous, direct
access to the second channel of the same module is not possible.
If the channels are on different HART analog modules, you can access a maximum
of 6 channels directly with SIMATIC PDM.
Additional Properties of the ET 200iSP HART Analog Modules
Table 13-25 Properties of the ET 200iSP HART Analog Modules
Features Explanation
Secondary master cannot be connected no
(secondary master exclusion)
Direct response with the validity of the data following a no
write request
(application supported parameter check)
Several HART field devices are supplied over one line. no, analog value = 0
(multi-drop mode)
Type of communication in HART in which the master no
requests the HART field device to send responses
cyclically and continuously at a predefined HART
command (for example, reading the measured variable)
(burst mode)
HART master cyclically sends a predefined HART no
command to the connected HART field device.
(scan mode)
Use of the compact data format no
(Compact HART Message Format)
A HART client sends a sequence of HART commands. No no
other client can interrupt this sequence
(successive HART commands mode)
Parameters are stored in non-volatile memory. no
(Parameter Stored Non Volatile)
Automatic disabling of the burst mode no
(Burst-Mode Auto Disable)
Maximum data field length 64 bytes (corresponds to 75
(data length) byte data record in the
transparent message data
format)
Client management no, only 1 client per channel
(Client Management) (4 ”mailboxes” per module)

13-24 A5E00247483-02
13.3.5 IEEE Tags
Features
Each analog module with HART can read up to four IEEE tags in addition to the
analog value. These tags are represented in IEEE 754 format. This is the
Float Format to IEEE Standard 754 Short Real Number (floating point format).
Each IEEE tag is accompanied by a status byte. The status byte informs you about
the validity of the measured value.
The representation of a tag in IEEE754 format requires 4 bytes + 1 status byte.
Byte x
Byte x+1
Byte x+2 IEEE tag (IEEE754 format)
Byte x+3
Byte x+4 Status byte
Figure 13-6 IEEE Tag

A5E00247483-02 13-25
HART Measured Value in IEEE Format (byte x to byte x+3)

Below you can see the representation of a HART measured value in IEEE format,
and the conversion of an IEEE word to a decimal value.
Byte x Byte x +1 Byte x +2 / Byte x +3
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 –1 –2 –3 –4 –5 –6 –7
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
S Exponential Mantissa
S=Sign
Byte x / Byte x +1 Byte x +2 Byte x +3

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
–8 –9 –10 –11 –12 –13 –14 –15 –16 –17 –18 –19 –20 –21 –22 –23
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Mantissa Mantissa
Example: Conversion of an IEEE value to a decimal value
Byte x Byte x+1 Byte x+2 Byte x+3
0100 0000 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000B: = 40 F0 00 00H
= 129d 2-3 =0.125

Exponential -2 Mantissa with bit ”1”
2 =0.25
S
2-1 =0.5
Measured value = (-1)S x 2(Exponent-127) x (1+Mantissa with bit ”1”)
Measured value = (-1)0 x 2(129-127) x (1+2-1+2-2 +2-3 )

Measured value = (1 x 4 x (1+0.5+0.25 +0.125)
Measured value = 7.5
Figure 13-7 IEEE754 Format

13-26 A5E00247483-02
Status byte (byte x +4)

The structure of the status byte corresponds to the PROFIBUS-PA profile.
The ET 200iSP uses the following status codes of the PROFIBUS-PA profile:
Byte x+4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
HART status byte for HART measured
value 1, as specified by HART
Limits: reports violation of limits
Substatus: differentiates and enhances the quality of the

corresponding measured value. The meaning depends on ”Quality”,
see the operating manual of the HART field device
Quality: describes the basic quality of a measured value
Status codes of the PROFIBUS-PA profile used in ET 200iSP:

01 0011 00 (4CH) uncertain, initial value (prior to first negotiation)
00 0110 00 (18H) bad, no communication (communication error)
00 0011 00 (0CH) bad, device failure
01 0001 11 (47H) uncertain, last usable event, constant (device is busy)
10 0001 00 (84H) good, update event (reconfiguring)
10 0000 00 (80H) good, ok (no error)
Figure 13-8 Status Byte
13.3.6 HART Data Records
Requirements
You require this information if you want to go beyond the standard applications of
STEP 7 and PDM or use your own configuration tool for HART communication.
Data Record Interface

Analog modules with HART use data records as the input and output interface:
The mapping of HART commands and HART response messages in
PROFIBUS-DP data records is based on the PROFIBUS Profile HART Version
1.0. For more detailed information on the HART protocol, refer to PROFIBUS DP
HART Profile Application Guidelines.
You can obtain this documentation from the PNO (PROFIBUS users organization)
on the Internet at http://www.profibus.com.

A5E00247483-02 13-27
Table 13-26 HART Data Records
Data Read / Write Size in bytes Description

record
number
148 read 13 Directory process data
DR information (data record directory): This data record contains the data record
numbers (index) of all HART data records and information on numbers and revisions.
149 read 3 HMD Feature Parameter Process Data
HART Feature Flags:This data record describes which optional HART features are
supported.
129 Read / Write 6 HMD Parameter Process Data
HART parameters: This data record contains the parameters for the HART master. When
this data record is read, you can evaluate the status of the configuration. There are no
vendor–specific parameters for the analog modules with HART.
140 Read / Write 12 HART Mapping Data Record
HART Mapping Data Record: This data record contains the assignment of the individual
HART measured values to the module channels.
80 write 75 HART Request Write Process Data
Mailbox channel 0: This data record contains the transfer data for the command from the
client to the HART field device (on channel 0).
81 read 75 HART Response Read Process Data
Mailbox channel 0: This data record contains the transfer data for the reply from the
HART field device (on channel 0) to the client.
82 write 75 HART Request Write Process Data
Mailbox channel 1:This data record contains the transfer data for the command from the
84 read 75 HART Request Write Process Data
86 read 75 HART Request Write Process Data

13-28 A5E00247483-02
Reading and Writing Data Records

To read and write data records, use the following SFCs:
• Read data record: SFC59 ”RD_REC”
• Write data record: SFC 58 ”WR_REC”
For more detailed information on SFCs, refer to the System Software for
S7–300/400 System and Standard Functions.
13.4 Response of the Analog Modules during Operation and if

Faults Occur
Influence of the Power Supply and the Operating State

The input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply
voltage for electronics/sensors and on the operating state of the PLC (CPU of the
DP master).
Table 13-27 Dependencies of the Input and Output Values on the Operating State of the PLC (CPU of the
DP Master) and the Supply Voltage L +
Operating State Power supply Input value of the electronics Output Value of the Electron-
of the PLC (CPU L + an module with analog inputs ics Module with Analog Out-
of the DP Master) ET 200iSP (evaluation possible in CPU puts
(power supply of the DP master)
module)
S7 format
POWER RUN L + present Process values PLC values
ON
7FFFH until first conversion Until first value output:
after startup, or after • After startup, a signal of 0 V
assignment of parameters for is output.
the module is completed.
• Dependent on the
parameter ”CPU/ master
STOP”
POWER STOP L + present Process value Dependent on the parameter
ON ”CPU/ master STOP”
L + missing 7FFFH –

A5E00247483-02 13-29
Influence of the Value Range on the Analog Input

The response of the electronics modules with analog inputs depends on the part of
the value range in which the input values are located. Table 13-28 illustrates the
relationship.
Table 13-28 Response of the Analog Modules, Depending on the Location of the Analog Input Value in the
Range of Values
Measured value is in Input value in SIMATIC S7 format

Nominal range Measured value
Overrange/underrange Measured value
Overflow 7FFFH
Underflow 8000H
Until valid measured values are available 7FFFH
Influence of the Value Range on the Analog Output

The response of the electronics modules with analog outputs depends on the part
of the value range in which the output values are located. Table 13-29 illustrates
this relationship.
Table 13-29 Response of the Analog Modules, Depending on the Location of the Analog Output Value in
the Range of Values
Output Value is in Output value in SIMATIC S7 format

Nominal range Value from DP master
Overrange/underrange Value from DP master
Overflow 0-signal
Underflow 0-signal
Before parameter assignment 0-signal

13-30 A5E00247483-02
13.5 Analog Electronic Module 4 AI I 2WIRE HART
Order Number
6ES7 134-7TD00-0AB0
Features
• 4 inputs for connecting HART field devices, 2-wire transducers (standard
applications)
• Configurable input range: HART / 4 to 20 mA
• Resolution 12 bits + sign
Terminal Assignment
Table 13-30 Terminal Assignment of 4 AI I 2WIRE HART
Channel Example of a channel 0 2-wire transducer 1

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 connection Channel 0: Terminals 1
1 5 9 13 and 2
M0+ M1+ M2+ M3+ 2-wire transducer 2
1
2 6 10 14 Channel 1: Terminals 5
mA and 6
M0– M1– M2– M3–
2 2-wire transducer 3
3 7 11 15
and 10
4 8 12 16 2-wire transducer 4
and 14
M+: Input signal ”+”

M–: Input signal ”–”
The 2-wire transducers are

supplied over the measurement
circuits.

A5E00247483-02 13-31
Block Diagram
1
Backplane 2
bus C
Backplane bus
interface HART Multiplexer

modem Inputs
Converter 5
6
9
10
Powerbus
13
14
Figure 13-9 Block Diagram of 4 AI I 2WIRE HART
Technical data
Dimensions and weight Type of protection

Dimensions W x H x D 30 x 129 x 136.5 • CENELEC
(mm) II2 G (1) GD EEx ibia IIC T4
0344
Supports clock No
synchronized mode
Number of inputs 4
Cable length

13-32 A5E00247483-02
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials Interference Suppression, Error Limits

Power supply of the yes Interference voltage suppression for f= n x
measuring transducers (f11%), f1 = interference frequency
• Supply current max. 23 mA • Common mode min 70 dB
(per channel) interference (peak value
of interference < rated
• Short-circuit proof yes
value of the input range)
Crosstalk between inputs min. – 50 dB
Operational limits (in the 0.15%
backplane bus
entire temperature range,
• Between the channels No relative to the input range)
• Between channels and yes Basic error limit (operational 0.1%
Powerbus limit at 25 _C, related to the
input range)
Current consumption
Temperature error (relative 0.005%/K
• Current consumption max. 320 mA
to the input range)
from power supply
(Powerbus) Linearity error (relative to 0.015%
the input range)
Power loss of the module 2.7 W
Repetition accuracy 0.01%
Analog Value Formation
(in transient state at 25 _C,
Measurement principle integrating relative to input range)
(Sigma-Delta)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Integration/conversion time
Interrupts
/ resolution (per channel)
• Limit value interrupt yes, configurable
• Integration time No
selectable • Diagnostic interrupt yes, configurable
• Interference frequency 60; 50 Diagnostic functions
suppression in Hz
• Basic conversion time 30
including integration
data
time (per channel) in ms
Monitoring function
• Cycle time in ms Number of active
channels per • Short-circuit ILoad > 25 mA2)
module x basic
conversion time
• Wire break ILoad < 3.6 mA
Safety information
• Resolution (incl. 12 bits + sign
overshoot range) See EC Prototype KEMA 04ATEX1244
Certificate
Smoothing of measured yes, configurable in
values 4 levels1)
Level: Time constant:
none 1 x cycle time
weak 4 x cycle time
medium 32 x cycle time
strong 64 x cycle time

A5E00247483-02 13-33
Data for selecting an encoder As 2-wire transducer possible

Input ranges (rated values) • Load of 2-wire max. 750
/ input resistance transducer
• Current 4 to 20 mA 1) Time elapsed until 63% of the
level-change value is reached
Permitted current at current 90 mA
(see Figure 13-14)
input (destruction limit)
2) I is in current limitation
Connection of signal possible Current limitation is triggered at 25 mA.
generators Short-circuit with <100 load
• For current
measurement
13.6 Analog Electronic Module 4 AI I 2WIRE HART
Order Number
6ES7 134-7TD50-0AB0
Features
• 4 inputs for connecting HART field devices, 4-wire transducer (standard
applications)
• Configurable input range: HART / 0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA
Note
If you connect up to four encoders to the electronic module, you must connect the
”–” measuring connections of the encoders one below the other or connect each
with equipotential bonding using wires. The lines must be indifferent to interrupts.
Further measures are not required if you connect up to two encoders to channel 0
and channel 2 (channels 1 and 3 have no R circuit.

13-34 A5E00247483-02
Terminal Assignment
Table 13-31 Terminal Assignment of 4 AI I 4WIRE HART
Channel Example of a channel 0 4-wire transducer 1

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 connection Channel 0: Terminals 1
1 5 9 13 and 2
M0+ M1+ M2+ M3+ 4-wire transducer 2
1
mA
M0– M1– M2– M3–
and 6
2 4-wire transducer 3
3 7 11 15
and 10
4 8 12 16 4-wire transducer 4
and 14
M+: Input signal ”+”

M–: Input signal ”–”
Block Diagram
1
Backplane 2
bus C
Backplane bus
interface HART Multiplexer

modem Inputs
Converter 5
6
9
10
Powerbus
13
14
Figure 13-10 Block Diagram of 4 AI I 4WIRE HART

A5E00247483-02 13-35
Technical data
Dimensions and weight • Cycle time in ms Number of active

channels per
Dimensions W x H x D 30 x 129 x 136.5
module x basic
(mm)
conversion time
Module-specific data overshoot range)
Supports clock No Smoothing of measured yes, configurable in
synchronized mode values 4 levels1)
Number of inputs 4 Level: Time constant:
Cable length none 1 x cycle time
• shielded max. 200 m weak 4 x cycle time
Type of protection medium 32 x cycle time
• CENELEC strong 64 x cycle time
II2 G (1) GD EEx ibia IIC T4
Interference Suppression, Error Limits
0344 Interference voltage suppression for f= n x

(f11%), f1 = interference frequency
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials • Common mode min 70 dB

interference (peak value
Power supply of the No of interference < rated
measuring transducers value of the input range)
Electrical isolation Crosstalk between inputs min. – 50 dB
• Between channels and yes Operational limits (in the 0.15%
backplane bus entire temperature range,
• Between the channels No relative to the input range)
• Between channels and yes Basic error limit (operational 0.1%

Powerbus limit at 25 _C, related to the
input range)
Current consumption
• Current consumption max. 30 mA to the input range)
from power supply
(Powerbus) Linearity error (relative to 0.015%
the input range)
Analog Value Formation (in transient state at 25 _C,
Measurement principle integrating relative to input range)
(Sigma-Delta)
Integration/conversion time
• Integration time yes
selectable
• Interference frequency 60; 50
suppression in Hz
• Basic conversion time 30

13-36 A5E00247483-02
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Data for selecting an encoder

Interrupts Input ranges (rated values)
/ input resistance
• Current 0 to 20 mA /
min. 295
Diagnostic functions 4 to 20 mA /
• Group error display red LED ”SF” min. 295
• Reading of diagnostic yes Permitted current at current 50 mA

data input (destruction limit)
Monitoring function Connection of signal possible

generators
• Wire break I < 3.6 mA
• For current
Safety information measurement
See EC Prototype KEMA 04ATEX1245 As 4-wire transducer possible
Certificate
• Load of 4-wire max. 750
transducer
1) Time elapsed until 63% of the

(see Figure 13-14)
13.7 Analog Electronic Module 4 AI RTD
Order Number
6ES7 134-7SD50-0AB0
Features
• 4 inputs for resistance thermometer or resistance measurement
• Input ranges:
– Resistance thermometer: Pt 100, Ni 100
– Resistance measurement: 600 ohms absolute

A5E00247483-02 13-37
Terminal Assignment
Table 13-32 Terminal Assignment of 4 AI RTD

Resistive thermometer 1
Channel Example of a channel 0 Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 connection Resistive thermometer 2
1 5 9 13
2-wire 3-wire 4-wire Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8
M0+ M1+ M2+ M3+ Resistive thermometer 3
1 1 1
2 6 10 14 Channel 2: Terminals 9 to 12
M0– M1– M2– M3– Resistive thermometer 4
3 7 11 15
2 2 2 Channel 3: Terminals 13 to 16
IC0+ IC1+ IC2+ IC3+
3 3 M+: measuring line positive
4 8 12 16
IC0– IC1– IC2– IC3– M+: measuring line negative

4 IC+: constant current line
positive
IC–: constant current line
negative
Block Diagram
Inputs
1
Backplane 2
bus C 3
Backplane bus
interface Multiplexer
4
5
Converter 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Powerbus
14
15
16
Figure 13-11 Block Diagram of 4 AI RTD

13-38 A5E00247483-02
Technical data
Dimensions and weight Analog Value Formation

Dimensions W x H x D 30 x 129 x 136.5 Measurement principle integrating
(mm) (Sigma-Delta)
Weight approx. 230 g Integration/conversion time
• Integration time yes
Supports clock No
selectable
synchronized mode
• Interference frequency 60; 50
Number of inputs 4
suppression in Hz
Cable length
• Basic conversion time 66; 80
• shielded max. 200 m including integration
Type of protection
• Additional conversion 5
• CENELEC time for wire break
II2 G (1) GD EEx ibia IIC T4 check
• Cycle time in ms Number of active
0344 channels per
module x basic
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials conversion time
Constant measuring current typ. 1 mA • Resolution (incl. 15 bits + sign
for resistive encoder overshoot range)
Electrical isolation Smoothing of measured yes, configurable in
• Between channels and yes values 4 levels1)
backplane bus Level: Time constant:
• Between the channels No none 1 x cycle time
• Between channels and yes weak 4 x cycle time
Powerbus
medium 32 x cycle time
Current consumption
strong 64 x cycle time
• Current consumption max. 22 mA
from power supply
(Powerbus)

A5E00247483-02 13-39
Interference Suppression, Error Limits Safety information

Interference voltage suppression for f= n x See EC Prototype KEMA 04ATEX1247
(f11%), f1 = interference frequency Certificate
• Common mode min. 90 dB Data for selecting an encoder
interference
Input ranges (rated values)
• Common mode min 70 dB / input resistance
interference (peak value
of interference < rated
• Resistance 600 absolute
min 2 M
• Thermo Pt100 / min 2 M
Crosstalk between inputs min. – 50 dB
resistor Ni100 / min 2 M
Operational limits (in the
Connection of signal
generators
relative to the input range)
• For resistance
• Resistive encoder 0.15%
measurement / RTD
• Pt100, Ni100 Standard 0 8 K
4-wire connection possible
• Pt100, Ni100 Climate 0.3 K
Basic error limit (operational
limit at 25 _C, related to the
input range) Characteristics linearization yes
• Resistive encoder 0.1% • For resistive
thermometers
• Pt100, Ni100 Standard 0.5 K
Technical unit for data configurable
• Pt100, Ni100 Climate 0.2 K
formats
to the input range) 1) Time elapsed until 63% of the
Linearity error (relative to 0.015% level-change value is reached
the input range) (see Figure 13-14)
(in transient state at 25 _C,
relative to input range)
Interrupts
data
Monitoring function
• Wire break R > 2 k

13-40 A5E00247483-02
13.8 Analog Electronic Module 4 AI TC
Order Number
6ES7 134-7SD00-0AB0
Features
• 4 inputs for thermocouples or voltage measurement

• Input ranges:
– Thermal e.m.f. measurement: 80 mV
– Thermocouples: type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U
– functional galvanic isolation, permissible common mode voltage 6.5 VDC,
30 VppAC
• Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves
• Internal compensation of the reference junction temperature by means of TC
sensor module (temperature sensor). The TC sensor module is supplied with
the 4 AI TC. This is mounted to the terminal module of 4 AI TC. For further
information, refer to chapter 13.2.1.
Terminal Assignment
Table 13-33 Terminal Assignment of 4 AI TC

Thermocouple 1
Channel Channel 0: Terminals 1
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 and 2
1 5 9 13 Example of a channel 0 Thermocouple 2
connection
M0+ M1+ M2+ M3+ Channel 1: Terminals 5
1
2 6 10 14
and 6
M0– M1– M2– M3–
Thermocouple 3
2 Channel 2: Terminals 9
3 7 11 15
and 10
TC TC TC TC 11 15 Thermocouple 4
7
4 8 12 16 3 Channel 3: Terminals 13
TC sensor and 14
module TC sensor module
Terminals 3, 7, 11, 15
M+: measuring line

positive
M+: measuring line
negative

A5E00247483-02 13-41
Block Diagram
Inputs
1
Backplane 2
bus C
Backplane bus
interface Opto-multi
plexer 5
6
Converter
9
10
13
14
TC sensor module
Powerbus
3
7
11
Figure 13-12 Block Diagram of 4 AI TC

13-42 A5E00247483-02
Technical data
Dimensions and weight • Cycle time in ms Number of active

channels per
Dimensions W x H x D 30 x 129 x 136.5
module x basic
(mm)
conversion time
Module-specific data overshoot range)
Supports clock No Smoothing of measured yes, configurable in
synchronized mode values 4 levels1)
Number of inputs 4 Level: Time constant:
Cable length none 1 x cycle time
• shielded max. 50 m weak 4 x cycle time
Type of protection medium 32 x cycle time
• CENELEC strong 64 x cycle time
II2 G (1) GD EEx ibia IIC T4
Interference Suppression, Error Limits
0344 Interference voltage suppression for f= n x

(f11%), f1 = interference frequency
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials • Common mode min. 90 dB

interference
Electrical isolation (UCM < 60 V)
• Between channels and yes • Common mode min 70 dB
backplane bus interference (peak value
• Between the channels yes, functional of interference < rated
Powerbus Crosstalk between inputs min. – 50 dB
Current consumption Operational limits in the 1.5 K

• Current consumption max. 30 mA relative to the input range 2)
from power supply
(Powerbus) Basic error limit (operational 1 K
limit at 25 _C, relative to
Power loss of the module 0.4 W input range)2)
Analog Value Formation Temperature error (relative 0.02%/K
Measurement principle integrating to the input range)
(Sigma-Delta) Linearity error (relative to 0.015%
Integration/conversion time the input range)
/ resolution (per channel) Repetition accuracy 0.01%
• Integration time yes (in transient state at 25 _C,
selectable relative to input range)
• Interference frequency 60; 50 Limits of total error when

suppression in Hz using internal compensa-
tion with TC sensor module
• Basic conversion time 66; 80
• Additional conversion 5
time for wire break
check in ms

A5E00247483-02 13-43
• Operational error limit 3.5 K Data for selecting an encoder

(across the entire
Input ranges (rated values)
temperature range in
/ input resistance
static thermal state,
ambient temperature • Thermal e.m.f. 80 mV/ min. 1M
fluctuation < 10 K/h).
See climatic ambient
• Thermocouple Typ. E, N, J, K, L, S,
R, B, T, V/min. 1 M
conditions.
Connection of signal
• Base error limit 2 K
generators
(operational error limit at
25_C in static thermal • For thermal e.m.f. possible
state, ambient measurement
temperature fluctuation
Characteristic curve yes
< 0.3 K/min)
linearization
• Thermal e.m.f. Rated range linear
Interrupts measurement:
• Limit value interrupt yes, configurable • Thermocouple Type E, N, J, K, L, S,
R, B, T, U
Temperature compensation
• Internal temperature possible by means
• Group error display red LED ”SF” compensation of the supplied TC
• Reading of diagnostic yes sensor module
data • External temperature possible by means
Monitoring function compensation of a temperature
value acquired at an
• Wire break yes, configurable analog module of
• TC sensor module for yes the same ET 200iSP
internal temperature station
compensation
Safety information
See EC Prototype KEMA 04ATEX1246
Certificate
1) Time elapsed until 63% of the
(see Figure 13-14)
2) the specified error limits apply as of the
following temperatures:
thermocouple type T: –200_C
thermocouple type B: +700_C
thermocouple type N: –150_C
thermocouple type E: –150_C
thermocouple type R: +200_C
thermocouple type S: +100_C

13-44 A5E00247483-02
13.9 Analog Electronic Module 4AO I HART
Order Number
6ES7 135-7TD00-0AB0
Features
• 4 current outputs
• Output range (configurable)
– HART
– 4 to 20 mA
– 0 to 20 mA
• Resolution 14 bits

A5E00247483-02 13-45
Terminal assignment

Actuator 1
Channel Example of a channel 0 Channel 0: Terminals 1
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 connection and 2
1 5 9 13 Actuator 2
QI0+ QI1+ QI2+ QI3+ Channel 1: Terminals 5
1 and 6
2 6 10 14
QI0+ QI1+ QI2+ QI3+

Actuator 3
2 Channel 2: Terminals 9
3 7 11 15
and 10
Actuator 4
and 14
QI: positive output

(analog output
current)
M: chassis ground
Block Diagram
1
Backplane 2
bus C
Backplane bus
interface HART Current

modem regulator Outputs
5
Converter 6
9
10
Powerbus
13
14
Figure 13-13 Block Diagram of 4AO I HART

13-46 A5E00247483-02
Technical Data
Dimensions and weight Interference Suppression, Error Limits

Dimensions W x H x D 30 x 129 x 136.5 Crosstalk between outputs min. – 50 dB
(mm)
Operational limits (in the 0.15%
Weight approx. 265 g entire temperature range,
relative to the input range)
Basic error limit (operational 0.1%
Supports clock No
limit at 25 _C, related to the
synchronized mode
input range)
Number of outputs 4
Cable length to the input range)
• shielded max. 200 m Linearity error (relative to 0.015%
the input range)
Type of protection
• CENELEC (in transient state at 25 _C,
II2 G (1) GD EEx ibia IIC T4 relative to input range)
0344
Interrupts
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials • Diagnostic interrupt yes, configurable
Electrical isolation Diagnostic functions
• Between channels and yes • Group error display red LED ”SF”
backplane bus
• Between the channels No data
• Between channels and yes Monitoring function
Powerbus
• Short-circuit Iload > 1 mA
Current consumption
Rload < 30...60
• From Powerbus load max. 330 mA • Wire break Iload > 1 mA
voltage
Rload < 0.68...24
Power loss of the module 2.7 W k)
Analog Value Formation Interconnectable yes, configurable
Resolution (incl. overshoot 14 bits substitution values
range) Safety information
• Cycle time in ms 3.6 ms See EC Prototype KEMA 04ATEX1250
Settling time Certificate
1)
• For resistive load max. 4 ms wire break depending on load current
• For capacitive load max. 40 ms

• For inductive load max. 40 ms
Interconnectable yes
substitution values

A5E00247483-02 13-47
Data for selecting an actuator Connection of actuators

Output ranges (rated • For current
values) measurement
• Current 0 to 20 mA 2-wire connection possible
4 to 20 mA
Load impedance (in the max. 750
nominal range of the
output)
13.10 Parameters of the Analog Electronic Modules
13.10.1 Parameters of the Analog Electronic Modules 4 AI I 2WIRE

HART, 4 AI I 4WIRE HART
Configuration with STEP 7 Version 5.3 Service Pack 1 or higher, and current
HW update

You can select various configurations for the analog electronic modules 4 AI I
2WIRE HART and 4 AI I 4WIRE HART from the following entries in the HW
catalog of the engineering software.
• Configurations ”4 AI I 2WIRE HART” and ”4 AI I 4WIRE HART”:
Analog values are output in S7 format.
• Configurations ”4 AI I 4W+x” and ”4 AI I 4W+x”:
Analog values are output in S7 format. In addition, up to four IEEE tags (master
or auxiliary tag) are available in IEEE 754 format. You define the number of
IEEE tags (1 to 4) in the configuration data:
– ...4W+1
– ...4W+2
– ...4W+3
– ...4W+4

13-48 A5E00247483-02
Parameters of the ”4 AI I 2WIRE HART” and ”4 AI I 4WIRE HART” Configurations
Table 13-34 Parameters of the ”4 AI I 2WIRE HART” and ”4 AI I 4WIRE HART” Configurations
Parameters Range of values Default Effective

range
4 AI I 2WIRE HART 4 AI I 4WIRE HART
Process alarm (when limit value is exceeded) • enabled disabled channel
• disabled
Measuring range ––– • disabled HART channel
• 4 to 20 mA
• HART
––– Measuring range • disabled HART channel
• 0 to 20 mA
• 4 to 20 mA
• HART
Group diagnostics • enabled enabled module
• disabled
Overflow/underflow diagnostics • enabled enabled module
• disabled
Smoothing • none none channel
• weak
• medium
• strong
Hi limit value Lo to hi limit value Hi limit value channel
of the overshoot
range
(SIMATIC S7)
Lo limit value Lo to hi limit value Lo limit value channel
of the overshoot
range
(SIMATIC S7)
• disabled
Short-circuit ––– • enabled enabled channel
diagnostics • disabled

A5E00247483-02 13-49
Parameters of the ”4 AI I 2W+x and ”4 AI I 4W+x” configurations

In addition to the ”4 AI I 2WIRE HART” and ”4 AI I 4WIRE HART” configurations,
you can set the following parameters at the ”...W+x” configurations:
Table 13-35 Parameters of the ”...W+x” Configuration

range
2 AI I 2WIRE HART 2 AI I 4WIRE HART
channel • 0 0 channel
• 1
• 2
• 3
IEEE tag • none none channel
• master tag
• 1. auxiliary tag
HART warning • enabled disabled module
• disabled
HART diagnostics • enabled disabled module
• disabled
13.10.2 Parameters of the Analog Electronic Modules 4 AI RTD and

4 AI TC
4 AI RTD and 4 AI TC Parameters
Table 13-36 4 AI RTD and 4 AI TC Parameters

4 AI RTD 4 AI TC range
Process alarm (when limit value is • enabled disabled channel
exceeded)1) • disabled
Measurement type ––– • disabled RTD 4-wire channel
• RTD 4-wire connection connection
• RTD 3-wire connection
• RTD 2-wire connection
• R 4-wire connection
Measuring range ––– • Pt 100 standard range Pt 100 channel
• Pt 100 climate range standard range
• Ni 100 standard range
• Ni 100 climate range
• 600 absolute

13-50 A5E00247483-02
Table 13-36 4 AI RTD and 4 AI TC Parameters

4 AI RTD 4 AI TC range
––– Measuring range • disabled Type K channel
• 80 mV [NiCr-Ni]
• Type B [PtRh-PtRh]
• Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi]
• Type E [NiCr-CuNi]
• Type R [PtRh-Pt]
• Type S [PtPh-Pt]
• Type J [Fe-CuNi]
• Type L [Fe-CuNi]
• Type T [Cu-CuNi]
• Type K [NiCr-Ni]
• Type U [Cu-CuNi]
Group diagnostics • enabled enabled Module
• disabled
Overflow/underflow diagnostics • enabled enabled Module
• disabled
• disabled
Short-circuit ––– • enabled enabled channel
diagnostics2) • disabled
––– Reference junction • none none channel
• yes
• RTD
––– Reference junction • 1 1 channel
number • 2
• Internal
Smoothing • none none channel
• weak
• medium
• strong
Hi limit value Lo to hi limit value of the Hi limit value channel
overshoot range
(SIMATIC S7)
Lo limit value Lo to hi limit value of the Lo limit value channel
overshoot range
(SIMATIC S7)
1) refers to the ”Hi limit” and ”Lo limit” parameters
2) Underflow is not indicated if short-circuit diagnostics is enabled.

A5E00247483-02 13-51
13.10.3 Parameters of the Analog Electronic Module 4AO I HART
Configuration with STEP 7 Version 5.3 Service Pack 1 or higher, and current
HW update

Several configuration options for the digital electronic module 4AO I HART are
available in the HW catalog of the engineering software:
• ”4AO I HART” configuration:
Analog values are output in S7 format.
• ”4AO I +x” configurations:
Analog values are output in S7 format. In addition, up to four IEEE tags (master
or auxiliary tag) are available in IEEE 754 format. You define the number of
IEEE tags (1 to 4) in the configuration data:
– ...I +1
– ...I +2
– ...I +3
– ...I +4

13-52 A5E00247483-02
Parameters of the ”4AO I HART” Configuration
Table 13-37 Parameters of the ”4AO I HART” Configuration

range
Group diagnostics • enabled enabled module
• disabled
• disabled
Short-circuit diagnostics • enabled enabled channel
• disabled
Output range • disabled HART channel
• 0 to 20 mA
• 4 to 20 mA
• HART
Response when CPU/master goes to STOP • Output at zero apply substitute channel
mode current/zero value
voltage
• apply substitute
value
• hold last value
Substitute value any value of the 0 to 20 mA: 0 channel
rated range mA
4 to 20 mA and
HART: 4 mA
Warning
! The substitution values are store in flash memory of IM 152. These are output at
the next startup of the ET 200iSP until it starts exchanging data with the DP
master (see Section 11.1).
Make allowances for this reaction when you assign the ET 200iSP to a different
configuration environment.
Remedy: Delete flash memory in IM 152 (see chapter 7.2).

A5E00247483-02 13-53
Parameters of the ”...I +x” Configuration

In addition to the ”4AO I HART” configuration, you can set the following
parameters at the ”...I +x” configurations:
Table 13-38 Parameters of the ”...I +x” Configuration

range
Channel • 0 0 Channel
• 1
• 2
• 3
IEEE tag • none none Channel
• master tag
HART warning • enabled disabled module
• disabled
HART diagnostics • enabled disabled module
• disabled
13.11 Description of the Parameters of the Analog Electronic

Modules
13.11.1 Reference Junction / Reference Junction Number
A description of these parameters is found in chapter 13.2.1.
13.11.2 Smoothing
Using Smoothing
A reliable analog signal is made available for further processing by smoothing the
analog values.
The smoothing of analog values is useful with slow measured value fluctuation, for
example in temperature changes.

13-54 A5E00247483-02
Parameters
The measured values are smoothed by means of digital filters. Smoothing is
achieved by the module forming a mean value from a specified number of
converted (digitized) analog values.
The user can set up to four smoothing levels, namely none, weak, medium or
strong. The level determines the number of analog signals used to form the mean
value.
The stronger the smoothing, the more reliable the smoothed analog value, and the
longer it takes until the smoothed analog signal is applied following a step
response (see the example below).
Example
The following diagram illustrates the number of module cycles it takes for the
smoothed analog value to be applied at approaching 100% following a step
response depending on the selected smoothing. The diagram applies to every
signal change at the analog input.
Signal changes as
percentage: Step response for any analog input signal
100
63
50
0 50 100 150 200 250 300

Module cycles
Smoothing:weak
medium
strong
Figure 13-14 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response

A5E00247483-02 13-55
13.11.3 Channel and IEEE Tag
Features
The 4 AI I 2WIRE/HART, 4 AI I 4WIRE/ HART, and 4AO I HART analog electronic
modules support up to four IEEE tags.
The PII provides up to 20 bytes per module for the IEEE tags. Thus, four blocks of
5 bytes each are available for the four IEEE tags within the PII.
Requirements
The HART field device must support the assigned number of IEEE tags.

13-56 A5E00247483-02
Assigning IEEE Tags

You assign the IEEE tags of the field devices to any one of the four blocks in the
PII.
Example: Mapping the IEEE tags
permanent assignment of analog values in the PII

user-specific assignment of IEEE tags in the PII
PII of a HART input module for example

with ”...W+4” configuration HART input
module
EB x Analog
EB x+1 value 1
EB x+2 Analog
EB x+3 value 2
EB x+4 Analog
EB x+5 value 3 HART field device on channel 0
EB x+6 Analog Analog value (corresponds to HV1))
EB x+7 value 4 IEEE tag 1 (HV)
IEEE tag 2
Auxiliary value 1
IEEE tag 3
EB x+8
IEEE tag 4
EB x+9 IEEE tag
EB x+10 4 of
channel 3 HART field device on channel 1
EB x+11
EB x+12 Analog value (corresponds to HV1))
IEEE tag 1 (HV)
Auxiliary value 2 IEEE tag 2
EB x+13 IEEE tag 3
EB x+14 IEEE tag IEEE tag 4
1 of
EB x+15 channel 1
EB x+16
HART field device on channel 2
EB x+17
Analog value (corresponds to HV1))
Auxiliary value 3 IEEE tag 1 (HV)
EB x+18 IEEE tag 2
EB x+19 IEEE tag IEEE tag 3
3 of IEEE tag 4
EB x+20
channel 2
EB x+21
EB x+22 HART field device on channel 3
Analog value (corresponds to HV1))
Auxiliary value 4 IEEE tag 1 (HV)
EB x+23 IEEE tag 2
IEEE tag
EB x+24 4 of IEEE tag 3
EB x+25 channel 0 IEEE tag 4
EB x+26
EB x+27
1) HV=master tag
Figure 13-15 Assigning the IEEE Tags

A5E00247483-02 13-57
Configuring IEEE Tags with STEP 7 Version 5.3 Service Pack 1 or Higher, and
Current HW Update
Configuring IEEE Tags With GSD File

First, you must configure the number of IEEE tags required (1 to 4). Select the
corresponding entry from the configuration table of the engineering software:
• ...+1
• ...+2
• ...+3
• ...+4
Assigning Parameters for IEEE Tags

Next, you must select the required IEEE tag of the field device. The PII provides
the following parameters in each block for the analog electronic modules 4 AI I
2WIRE/HART, 4 AI I 4WIRE/ HART and 4AO I HART:
Channel parameter: With this parameter you define the channel or field device
from which the IEEE tag is to be read in.
IEEE tag parameter: Here, you select the IEEE tag (1 to 4) of the field device that
is assigned to the PII.
13.11.4 HART Warning
If you enable this parameter, a diagnostic interrupt will be triggered for the following
HART warnings (see error types in Section 6.7.11):
• Further HART status available
• HART configuration changed
13.11.5 HART Diagnostics
If you enable this parameter, a diagnostic interrupt will be triggered for the following
HART diagnostics (see error types in Section 6.7.11):
• HART analog output current is defined
• HART analog output current in saturation
• HART communication error
• HART master tag out of limits
• HART auxiliary tag out of limits

13-58 A5E00247483-02

A5E00247483-02 13-59

13-60 A5E00247483-02
Reserve Module 14
Order Number
6ES7 138-7AA00-0AA0
Features
Features of the reserve module:
• suitable for all terminal modules which can receive an electronic module
• reserved for a slot on any electronic module. Insert the reserve module on the
reserved slot of the ET 200iSP configuration.
• If any gaps (of an electronic module) develop due to the ET 200iSP
configuration, the following rules apply:
– the gap is located at the last slot of ET 200iSP: Insert a reserve module or
the slot cover into the gap (see Sections 4.5 and 6.7.14).
– the gap is located at another slot (for electronic modules): Insert a reserve
module into this gap (see Section 6.7.14).
Procedure with CiR

See the Modifying the System during Operation via CiR function manual.
Terminal Assignment
The reserve module is not connected to the terminals of the terminal module. You
can thus fully wire the terminal module in preparation for future applications.

A5E00247483-02 14-1
Reserve Module
Technical Data
Dimensions and weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Dimensions Status display No
WHD (mm) 30129136.5
Diagnostic functions No
Weight approx. 180g
Safety data
Module–specific data
See EC Prototype Cer- KEMA 04ATEX1251
Type of protection tificate
• CENELEC
II2 G EEx ib IIC T4
0344
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials

Power loss of the max. 0.03 W
module

14-2 A5E00247483-02
Order Numbers A
A.1 Order numbers
Introduction
You will find the order numbers for the ET 200iSP distributed I/O station and the
PROFIBUS accessories that you may need in conjunction with the ET 200iSP
below.
Interface Module
Table A-1 Interface module
Description Number Order number

Interface module IM 152 1 piece 6ES7 152-1AA00-0AB0
Terminal Modules
Table A-2 Terminal Modules
Description Number Order number

TM-PS-A 1 piece 6ES7 193-7DA00-0AA0
TM-PS-B 1 piece 6ES7 193-7DB00-0AA0
TM-IM/IM and terminating module 1 piece 6ES7 193-7AB00-0AA0
TM-IM/EM 60S (screw terminals) and 1 piece 6ES7 193-7AA00-0AA0
terminating module
TM-IM/EM 60C (spring terminals) 1 piece 6ES7 193-7AA10-0AA0
and terminating module
TM-EM/EM 60S (screw terminals) 1 6ES7 193-7CA00-0AA0
TM-EM/EM 60C (spring terminals) 1 6ES7 193-7CA10-0AA0

A5E00247483-02 A-1
Order Numbers
Power Supply
Table A-3 Power Supply
Name Quantity Order Number

Power Supply PS 1 6ES7 138-7EA00-0AA0
Table A-4 Digital Electronic Modules

8 DI NAMUR 1 piece 6ES7 131-7RF00-0AB0
4 DO DC23.1V/20mA 1 piece 6ES7 132-7RD00-0AB0
4 DO DC17.4V/27mA 1 6ES7 132-7RD10-0AB0
4 DO DC17.4V/40mA 1 6ES7 132-7RD20-0AB0
Table A-5 Analog electronic modules

4 AI I 2WIRE HART 1 piece 6ES7 134-7TD00-0AB0
4 AI I 4WIRE HART 1 piece 6ES7 134-7TD50-0AB0
4 AI RTD 1 piece 6ES7 134-7SD50-0AB0
4 AI TC and TC sensor module 1 6ES7 134-7SD00-0AB0
4 AO I HART 1 6ES7 135-7TD00-0AB0
Reserve Module
Table A-6 Reserve module

Reserve module 1 6ES7 138-7AA00-0AA0

A-2 A5E00247483-02
Order Numbers
ET 200iSP Accessories
Table A-7 ET 200iSP Accessories

EEx e terminal WPE 16/E 1 17522900*
(for shielding terminal rail)
Mounting rail for S7 installation 1
technique
480 mm 6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0
530 mm 6ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0
585 mm 6ES7 390-1AF85-0AA0
830 mm 6ES7 390-1AJ30-0AA0
885 mm 6ES7 390-1AJ85-0AA0
Label sheet DIN A4, 20 labeling 10 sheets
strips for interface modules, and 60
labeling strips for electronic modules,
film for laser printing or plotter
• Light beige
• yellow 6ES7 193-7BA00-0AA0
• red 6ES7 193-7BB00-0AA0
• petrol 6ES7 193-7BD00-0AA0
6ES7 193-7BH00-0AA0
Slot number without labeling 100 piece 8WA8848-2AY
Slot number labels 10 x labeled 1 to 200 pieces 8WA8861-0AB
20
Slot number labels 5 x labeled 1 to 200 8WA8861-0AC
40
Slot number labels 2 x labeled 1 to 200 8WA8861-0DA
68, and 1 x labeled 1 to 64
* Order nos. of Weidmüller GmbH, An der Talle 89, 33102 Paderborn,

Phone: 05252-960-0, Fax: 05252-960-116

A5E00247483-02 A-3
Order Numbers
Enclosure for ET 200iSP
Table A-7 Enclosures for ET 200iSP

Wall-mount enclosures for Zone 1/ 2, type of protection 1 piece
EEx e, stainless steel, screw-on lid
• 600x400x230, suitable for up to 11 electronic 6DL2804-0AA00
modules 6DL2804-0AB00
• 800x400x230, suitable for up to 16 electronic 6DL2804-0AC00
modules
• 1050x400x230, suitable for up to 25 electronic
modules
Wall-mount enclosures for Zone 1/ 2, EEx e type of 1 piece
protection, stainless steel, screw-on cover; with cable
inlet for I/O signals; with installation and wiring of
ET 200iSP in wall-mount enclosure1
• 600x400x230, suitable for up to 11 electronic 6DL2804-1AA00
modules 6DL2804-1AB00
• 800x400x230, suitable for up to 16 electronic 6DL2804-1AC00
modules
modules
Wall-mount enclosures for Zone 1/ 2, type of protection 1 piece
EEx e, stainless steel, hinged lid
• 650x450x230, suitable for up to 15 electronic 6DL2804-0AD00
modules 6DL2804-0AE00
modules
Wall-mount enclosures for Zone 21/ 22, degree of 1 piece
protection IP65, stainless steel, hinged lid
• 650x450x230, suitable for up to 15 electronic 6DL2804-0DD00
modules 6DL2804-0DE00
modules
Wall-mount enclosures for Zone 1/ 2, EEx e type of 1
protection; stainless steel; certified separately; hinged
cover; with cable inlets for I/O signals; with installation
and wiring of ET 200iSP in wall-mount enclosure1)
• 650x450x230, suitable for up to 15 electronic 6DL2804-1AD00
modules 6DL2804-1AE00
modules
Wall-mount enclosures for Zone 21/ 22, IP65 degree of 1
protection, stainless steel; certified separately; hinged
cover; with cable inlets for I/O signals; with installation
and wiring of ET 200iSP in wall-mount enclosure1)
• 650x450x230, suitable for up to 15 electronic 6DL2804-1DD00
modules 6DL2804-1DE00
modules
1) Without ET 200iSP components. Please purchase these separately.

A-4 A5E00247483-02
Order Numbers
Network components
The table below lists all the network components you require to operate the
ET 200iSP.
Table A-8 Network Components for ET 200iSP

RS 485-IS Coupler 1 piece 6ES7 972-0AC80-0XA0
PROFIBUS connector RS 485 IS, with 1 6ES7 972-0DA60-0XA0
chamfered cable outlet, switched active bus
PROFIBUS cable 1 6XV1 830-0EH10

A5E00247483-02 A-5
Order Numbers
STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 Manuals

To program and commission the ET 200iSP with STEP 7 , you require one of the
following manuals.
Table A-9 STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 Manuals
Name Contents
Automation systems basics, explosion Includes
protection • Current standards and directives on
• Manual explosion protection
• Description of safety measures and
identification of equipment
• Information on the installation,
operation, and maintenance of Ex
equipment
S7-300 Automation System For example,
documentation package consisting of:
• Reference Manual • Description of the operation, functions
– CPU Data: and technical
CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP data of the CPUs.
– CPU Data:
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
• Manual • Description of the various technology
– CPU 31xC: CPU 31xC: functions
Process-Related
Functions Including CD with Examples
• Installation manual • Description of the configuration,
– S7-300 Automation System: mounting, wiring, networking and
Installation: CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP commissioning of an S7-300
– S7-300 Automation System:
Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
• Reference manual • Technical data and descriptions of the
– S7-300 Programmable Controller functions of signal modules, power
Module Specifications supply modules and interface
modules.
• Instruction list 312 IFM to 3182 DP (can be • Listing of the instruction set of the
ordered separately) CPU and the corresponding execution
• Instruction list CPU 31x C and CPU 31x times. Listing of executable blocks and
(can be ordered separately) execution times.
• Getting Started • Example of the various steps in

commissioning required to achieve a
fully functioning application.

A-6 A5E00247483-02
Order Numbers
Table A-9 STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 Manuals, Fortsetzung
Name Contents
Documentation package S7 F systems For example,
includes:
• ”S7 F/FH Systems” manual • Description of the various tasks to be
carried out in order to create and
commission a fail-safe S7 F/FH
system.
• Manual / Online Help • Description of the
”S7 Distributed Safety, Configuring and – Configuration of the F CPU and
Programming F I/O
– Configuration of safety
functions
– Programming the F CPU in F FBD
or F LAD
• ”Distributed I/O System ET 200S, Fail-safe • Description of the hardware of failsafe
Modules” manual modules in ET 200S (includes
installation, wiring, technical data)
• ”S7-300 Automation System, Fail-Safe • Description of the hardware of fail-safe

Signal Modules signal modules in S7-300 (includes
• System description ”Safety technology in installation, wiring, and technical data)
SIMATIC-S7” • Provides an overview of the use,
installation, and principle of operation
of the S7-300F and S7-400F/FH
fail-safe automation systems.
• Contains technical details that can be
presented for the F technology in
S7-400, S7-300.
• Contains monitoring and reaction time
calculations for the F systems
S7-300F and S7-400F/FH.
S7-400 and M7-400 Automation System For example,
Installation. • Description of the PROFIBUS-DP
• Manual master interface in S7-400 and
M7-400
• Installation of a PROFIBUS-DP
network
• RS 485 repeater
System Software for S7-300/400 For example,
Program design Description of addressing and diagnostics
• Programming manual in SIMATIC S7
System Software for S7-300/400 Description of the SFCs in STEP 7

System and Standard Functions
• Reference Manual
• Description SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks
wiring and cabling

A5E00247483-02 A-7
Order Numbers
Reference for PROFIBUS DP with SIMATIC S7 and STEP 7
Table A-10 Reference for PROFIBUS DP with SIMATIC S7 and STEP 7
Book Order Number Contents

Dezentralisieren mit PROFIBUS DP- In bookshops: Familiarizes you with the
Aufbau, Projektierung und Einsatz ISBN 3-89578-074-X topics of PROFIBUS-DP
des PROFIBUS DP mit SIMATIC S7 At your SIEMENS and how to implement
[Distributed Systems with branch: automation tasks with
PROFIBUS DP-Installation, A19100-L531-B714 PROFIBUS DP and
Configuration, and Implementation of SIMATIC S7. The use of
PROFIBUS DP with SIMATIC S7] – PROFIBUS DP is
Josef Weigmann, Gerhard Kilian illustrated with numerous
Publicis MCD Verlag, 1998 practical example based
on SIMATIC S7.

A-8 A5E00247483-02
Dimensional Drawings B
Introduction
This chapter contains the dimension drawings of the most important components
of the ET 200iSP.
Terminal Module TM-PS-A, TM-PS-B with Inserted Power Supply PS

65.5
57.1
190
67.4
166.5
60
Figure B-1 Terminal Module TM-PS-A with Inserted Power Supply PS

A5E00247483-02 B-1
Dimensional Drawings
Terminal Module TM-IM/EM with Inserted Interface Module and Electronic

Module65.5
57.1
190
67.4
116.6
60 152
167
Figure B-2 Terminal Module TM-IM/EM with Inserted Interface Module and Electronic Module
Terminal Module TM-EM/EM with Inserted Electronic Modules

65.5
57.1
190
67.4
116.6
60 152
167
Figure B-3 Terminal Module TM-EM/EM with Inserted Electronic Modules

B-2 A5E00247483-02
Terminating module
65.5 44.7
154.6
57.1
32
20 32.5
Figure B-4 Terminating module

A5E00247483-02 B-3

B-4 A5E00247483-02
Reaction Times C
Function principle
The figure below shows the different response times between the DP master and
the ET 200iSP.
DP master
CPU DP
interface
DP cycle
DP slave
ET 200iSP
ET 200iSP
IM DI: DO AI AO
Figure C-1 Response times between the DP master and the ET 200iSP
C.1 Response times at the DP master
You will find information on the response times in the manual for the DP master.

A5E00247483-02 C-1
Reaction Times
C.2 Reaction Times on the ET 200iSP
Reaction time
The reaction time on the ET 200iSP depends on:
• The number of modules
• The number of diagnostic messages
• Removing and inserting modules
• Interrupts
C.3 Reaction Times with Digital Input Modules
Input delay
The reaction times of the digital input modules depend on the input delay. See the
technical data in chapter 12.
C.4 Reaction Times with Digital Output Modules
Output Delay
The reaction times correspond to the output delay. See the technical data in
chapter 12.
C.5 Reaction Times of Analog Input Modules
Conversion Time
The conversion time is made up of the basic conversion time and the time for
processing wire break monitoring diagnostics (see the technical data
4 AI RTD and 4 AI TC in chapter 13).
With integrating conversion procedures, the integration time is included directly in
the conversion time.

C-2 A5E00247483-02
Reaction Times
Cycle time
The analog–to–digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values
to the memory or to the backplane bus take place sequentially. In other words, the
analog input channels are converted one after the other. The cycle time; in other
words, the time until an analog input value is converted again is the sum of the
conversion times of all active analog input channels of the input modules. Unused
analog input channels should be deactivated in the parameter settings to reduce
the cycle time. The conversion and integration times for a deactivated channel are
0.
Figure C-2 provides you with an overview of what makes up the cycle time for an
n-channel analog input module.
Conversion time channel 0
Cycle time
Figure C-2 Cycle Time of the Analog Input Module

A5E00247483-02 C-3
Reaction Times
C.6 Reaction Times of Analog Output Modules
Conversion Time
The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the time for the
transfer of the digitized output values from the internal memory and the
digital-to-analog conversion.
Cycle time
The conversion of the analog output channels involves a processing time for the
module and sequential conversion times for channels 0.1 and 2.
The cycle time, the other words, the time until an analog output value is converted
again is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output channels
and the processing time of the analog output module.
Figure C-3 provides an overview of the makeup of the cycle time for an analog
output module.
Execution time Module
Conversion time channel 1 Cycle time
Figure C-3 Cycle Time of the Analog Output Module
Settling time
The settling time (t2 to t3), in other words, the time from applying the converted
value to reaching the specified value at the analog output is load dependent. A
distinction must be made between resistive, capacitive, and inductive load.

C-4 A5E00247483-02
Reaction Times
Response Time
The worst–case response time (t1 to t3), in other words, the time from the
availability of the digital output values in the internal memory until the specified
value is reached and the analog output is the sum of the cycle time and settling
time. The worst case occurs when the analog channel was converted shortly
before transferring a new output value and will only the converted again following
the conversion of the other channels (cycle time).
Figure C-4 shows the response time of an analog output channel.
tA
tI
tC
t1 t2 t3
tA= response time

tC = cycle time according to the processing time of the module and
conversion time of the channel
tI = settling time
t1 = a new digital output value is queued
t2 = output value accepted and processed
t3 = specified output value reached
Figure C-4 Response Time of an Analog Output Channel

A5E00247483-02 C-5
Reaction Times

C-6 A5E00247483-02
Address Space of the Inputs and Outputs D
D.1 Digital Input Module
8 DI NAMUR
The address range of the process input and output image that is occupied is
dependent on the configuration, i.e., by the selection of the relevant entry in the
engineering software.
8 DI NAMUR with ”8 DI NAMUR” configuration

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Channels 0 to 7 of the input signal
S7 format
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+2 n.c.
Figure D-1 PII with ”8 DI NAMUR” Configuration


A5E00247483-02 D-1
Address Space of the Inputs and Outputs
8 DI NAMUR with ”2 Counter/ 6 DI NAMUR” or ”2 Counter/

6 Control” configuration
PII:
EB x
Actual value counter 1
EB x+1 Actual value counter 1
EB x+2 (cascading function)
EB x+3 Actual value counter 2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+4
Counter output 1
Counter output 2
Digital input 2
Digital input 3 Example:
Digital input 4 Actual value counter 1, standard function
Digital input 5
Digital input 6 EB x 2AH
Digital input 7 10885
EB x+1 85H
S7 format Example:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Actual value counter 1 (cascading function)
EB x+5 7 6 5 4 3 2 EB x 00H
EB x+6 n.c. EB x+1 01H
CBH 117573
Value status channels 2 to 7: EB x+2
EB x+3 45H
Figure D-2 PII with ”2 Counter/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration
PIO:
AB x
Setpoint counter 1
AB x+1 Setpoint value counter 1 (cascading
AB x+2 function)
AB x+3 Setpoint counter
2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AB x+4
n.c.
n.c.
Figure D-3 PII with ”2 Counter/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration

D-2 A5E00247483-02
8 DI NAMUR with ”2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR” configuration

PII:
EB x
Frequency counter 1
EB x+1
EB x+2
EB x+3 Frequency counter 2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+4
n.c.
n.c.
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
Digital input 5
Digital input 6
Digital input 7
S7 format Example:
Frequency counter 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+5 3 2 EB x 09H
7 6 5 4 2317 = 2.317 kHz
EB x+6 n.c. EB x+1 0DH

Figure D-4 PII with ”2 Trace/ 6 DI NAMUR” Configuration

D.2 Digital Output Module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AB x 3 2 1 0 Channels 0 to 3 of the output signal
S7 format
AB x+1 n.c.
Figure D-5 PIO with Digital Output Module

A5E00247483-02 D-3
D.3 Analog Input Modules
S7 format
PII:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x Input value
EB x+1 channel 0
EB x+2 Input value
EB x+3 channel 1
EB x+4 Input value
EB x+5 channel 2
EB x+6 Input value
EB x+7 channel 3
Example:
Input value channel 0:
61A8H
EB x 61H
Input value channel 0: 25000
EB x+1 A8H
Figure D-6 PII with Analog Input Modules
D.4 Analog Output Modules
S7 format
PIO:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AB x Output value
AB x+1 channel 0
AB x+2 Output value
AB x+3 channel 1
AB x+4 Output value
AB x+5 channel 2
AB x+6 Output value
AB x+7 channel 3
Example:
Output value channel 0:
61A8H
AB x 61H
Output value channel 0: 25000
AB x+1 A8H
Figure D-7 PIO with Analog Output Modules

D-4 A5E00247483-02
D.5 Analog Input Modules with HART

(4 AI I 2WIRE HART, 4 AI I 4WIRE HART)
S7 format
PII:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Analog Value
EB x Input value
EB x+1 channel 0
EB x+2 Input value
EB x+3 channel 1
EB x+4 Input value
EB x+5 channel 2
EB x+6 Input value
EB x+7 channel 3
IEEE754 floating-point format
EB x+8
EB x+9 IEEE tag 1 in floating-point format
EB x+10 as specified in HART
EB x+11
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+12 HART status byte for IEEE tag 1, as
specified for HART (see Section 13.3.5)
Status codes of the PROFIBUS-PA profile used in ET 200iSP: You can define
the number of
01 0011 00 (4CH) uncertain, initial value (prior to first negotiation) IEEE tags in your
00 0110 00 (18H) bad, no communication (communication error) configuration.
00 0011 00 (0CH) bad, device failure
You can map
01 0001 11 (47H) uncertain, last usable event, constant each IEEE tag of
(device is busy) a field device to
10 0001 00 (84H) good, update event (reconfiguring) the PII as desired.
10 0000 00 (80H) good, ok (no error) See chapter
13.3.5.
EB x+13 to 17 IEEE tag 2 in floating-point format as specified in

HART, and HART status byte (for structure, see
IEEE tag 1)

IEEE tag 1)

IEEE tag 1)
Figure D-8 PIO with Analog Input Modules with HART

A5E00247483-02 D-5
D.6 Analog Output Module with HART (4 AO I HART)
S7 format
PIO:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Analog Value
AB x Output value
AB x+1 channel 0
AB x+2 Output value
AB x+3 channel 1
AB x+4 Output value
AB x+5 channel 2
AB x+6 Output value
AB x+7 channel 3
PII: IEEE754 floating-point format
EB x
EB x+1 IEEE tag 1 in floating-point format
EB x+2 as specified in HART
EB x+3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EB x+4 HART status byte for IEEE tag 1, as
specified for HART (see Section 13.3.5)
You can define
Status codes of the PROFIBUS-PA profile used in ET 200iSP: the number of
01 0011 00 (4CH) uncertain, initial value (prior to first negotiation) IEEE tags in your
00 0110 00 (18H) bad, no communication (communication error) configuration.
00 0011 00 (0CH) bad, device failure You can map
01 0001 11 (47H) uncertain, last usable event, constant each IEEE tag of
(device is busy) a field device to
10 0001 00 (84H) good, update event (reconfiguring) the PII as desired.
10 0000 00 (80H) good, ok (no error) See chapter
13.3.5.
IEEE tag 1)

IEEE tag 1)

IEEE tag 1)
Figure D-9 PIO/PII with Analog Output Module with HART

D-6 A5E00247483-02
Certifications E
E.1 EC Prototype Certificates

A5E00247483-02 E-1
Certifications
E.2 EC Declarations of Conformity

A5E00247483-02 E-51
Glossary
ACCU
Accumulators are registers in the CPU used as buffer storage for load and transfer
operations, as well as comparison, arithmetic, and conversion operations.
Accumulated current
Total current of all output channels of a digital output module.
Automation system
An automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least one
CPU, various input and output modules, and operator interfaces.
Backplane bus
A serial data bus used by interface module IM 151-2 to communicate with the
electronics modules. Also supplies these with the required voltage. The various
modules are interconnected by means of terminal modules.
Bus connector
Physical connection between the bus nodes and the bus cable.
Bus termination module

The ET 200iSP distributed I/O station is terminated by the bus termination module.
ET 200iSP will not operate without bus termination module.
Bus
Shared data transmission path to which all nodes are connected. It has two defined
ends.
In an ET 200 system, the bus is a twisted-pair cable or optical fiber cable.
Chassis ground
Chassis ground includes all the interconnected inactive parts of equipment that
must not carry a hazardous voltage even in the event of a fault.

A5E00247483-02 Glossary-1
Glossary
Diagnostics
The detection, localization, classification, visualization and further evaluation of
errors, faults and messages.
Provides monitoring functions which are executed automatically when the system
is in RUN. Increases plant availability by reducing commissioning times and down
times.
Distributed I/O systems

These are input/output units that are not located in the base unit; instead, they are
distributed at some distance from the CPU.
• ET 200M, ET 200X, ET 200L, ET 200S, ET 200iSP
• DP/AS-I Link
• Other DP slaves from either Siemens or other vendors
The distributed I/O systems are connected to the DP master by means of
PROFIBUS DP.
DP master
A master that complies with IEC 61784–1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is known as a DP
master.
DP slave
A slave running on the PROFIBUS on the basis of the PROFIBUS DP protocol in
accordance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is known as a DP slave.
DP standard
The DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system in
accordance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
DPV1
Enhanced version of the original PROFIBUS standard
IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
Earth
The electrical potential of conductive ground can be pulled down to zero at any
point. In the area of earth connections, ground may assume a potential other than
zero. For this reason, the term ”reference ground” is often used.

Glossary-2 A5E00247483-02
Glossary
Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that keeps electrical
equipment and extraneous conductive objects to the same or almost the same
potential in order to prevent disturbing or dangerous voltages between these
objects.
ET 200
The ET 200 distributed I/O system with PROFIBUS DP protocol allows the
connection of distributed I/O to a CPU or adequate DP master. The ET 200 system
is characterized by its fast reaction times as a result of reduced data traffic, i.e. only
few bytes are transferred.
ET 200 is based on IEC 61784–1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
The ET 200 works on the master/slave principle. Examples of DP masters are the
IM308-C master interface or the CPU 315-2 DP.
DP slaves can be the distributed I/O devices ET 200M, ET 200X, ET 200L,
ET 200S, ET 200iSP, or DP slaves from Siemens or other vendors.
Flutter monitoring
Flutter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. Flutter
monitoring detects and reports unusual signal profiles.
FREEZE
This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.
When a DP slave receives the FREEZE control command, it freezes the current
status of the inputs and transfers them cyclically to the DP master.
After each subsequent FREEZE control command, the DP slave freezes the status
of the inputs again.
The input data are not transferred from the DP slave to the DP master again
cyclically until the DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command.
Grounding busbar PA
Term describing the connection of electrical equipment operated in potentially
explosive areas to the equipotential busbar.
Grounding
Refers to connecting a conductive element to earth via a grounding system.
GSD file
The GSD file (device master file) contains all the properties specific to a DP slave.
The format of a GSD file is defined in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.

Glossary
HART
English: Highway Adressable Remote Transducer
Hot swapping
Refers to the removal and insertion of modules while ET 200iSP is in RUN.
I&M (identification data)

Identification data represent information stored on a module.
I data: Module information, usually available on a the label of the module
enclosure. I data are read only.
M data: System-specific information such as the installation locations and date.
M data are generated during configuration and written to the module.
Isolated
In the case of isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control
and load circuit are galvanically isolated – for example, by means of optical
isolators, relays, or transformers. Input/output circuits can be grouped.
Master
A master station which is in possession of the token can send data to other nodes
and request data from these (= active node.) Examples of DP masters are the
CPU 315-2 DP or the IM308–C.
NAMUR sensor
A NAMUR sensor provides functions for monitoring cable breaks and short-circuits.
Node
A device that can send, receive, or repeat data on the bus (for example, a DP
master, DP slave, or RS 485 repeater).
Non-isolated
In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the
control and load circuit are electrically connected.
Parameter assignment is the transfer of slave parameters from the DP master to
the DP slave.

Glossary
PCS7–OS
Operator station (operating and monitoring system) for the SIMATIC PCS 7
process control system.
Permanent wiring
All the elements carrying wiring (terminal modules) are installed on a mounting rail.
The electronics modules are inserted into the terminal modules.
Prewiring
Wiring the terminal modules before the electronics modules are inserted.
Process image
The process image is a component of the system memory of the DP master. At the
start of the cyclic program, the signal states of the input modules are transferred to
the process image of inputs (PII.) At the end of the cyclic program, the values of
the process-image output area are transferred to the DP slave as the signal states.
PROFIBUS address
Each bus node must receive a PROFIBUS address to identify it uniquely on the
PROFIBUS.
The PC/programming device has the PROFIBUS address “0”.
The PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 125 are permitted for the ET 200iSP distributed
I/O device.
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, process and field–bus standard, which is defined in
IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. Specifies the functional, electrical and mechanical
characteristics of a serial bits stream field bus system.
PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (= distributed peripherals, that is,
distributed or remote I/O),
FMS (= field bus message specification), PA (= process automation), or
TF (= technology functions).
Pulse stretching
Function used to stretch the duration of a digital input signal. Stretches the signal at
a digital input by a configured value.
Reference potential
Reference for the evaluation / measuring of the voltages of participating circuits.

Glossary
RTD
Measuring temperatures with resistive thermometers RTD (resistance temperature
detection.)
Segment
The bus cable between two terminating resistors forms a segment. An RS 485 IS
segment (on RS 485-IS Coupler) contains between 0 and 16 bus nodes.
SIMATIC PCS 7
Powerful process control system with integrated programming, operating and
monitoring functions. PCS 7 allows direct interconnections with the control control
system. For further information, refer to the ST 70 Catalog and the integrated
PCS 7 Online Help.
SIMATIC PDM
Process Device Manager. Versatile tool for configuring, setting parameters,
commissioning, and diagnostics of intelligent process devices of any manufacturer.
SIMATIC PDM provides a uniform user interface for the configuration of a wide
range of process devices.
Slave
A slave can only exchange data with a master after it has been requested to send
data by the master. Slaves include all DP slaves such as the ET 200X, ET 200M,
ET 200S, ET 200iSP, etc.
SYNC
This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.
By means of the SYNC control command, the DP master causes the DP slave to
freeze the current statuses of the outputs. With the subsequent frames, the DP
slave stores the output data, but the statuses of the outputs remain unchanged.
After each new SYNC control command, the DP slave sets the outputs that it has
stored as output data. The outputs are not cyclically updated again until the DP
master sends the UNSYNC control command.
TC
Measuring temperatures with thermocouples (TC = thermocouple.)

Glossary
Time stamping
Function used to time stamp binary input signals when these change. All the binary
input signals selected for time stamping must be time stamped with a specified
accuracy throughout the system when they change, i.e. when two transducers on
different stations of different PROFIBUS DP master systems respond at the same
time, the time stamps of these signal changes may not differ by more than this
selected accuracy.
Time stamp
Information on the date and time of messages.
Time synchronization
Time synchronization ensures that all the clocks in a system are set to the same
time-of-day. A master clock distributes the time in a configurable cycle to all other
components in the system that have a clock. The components use this time to set
their own clocks.
Transmission rate
The speed at which data is transmitted on the network. Specifies the number of
transferred bits per second (= bit rate.)
Value status
The value status is additional binary information of a digital input signal. The value
status is entered in the PII at the same time as the process signal, and provides
information on the validity of the input signal.
WinCC
PCS 7 standard package

Glossary

Index
Numbers Analog Electronic Module 4 AI TC, 13-41
Block Diagram, 13-42
16–bit down counter, 3-19
Features, 13-41
16–bit up counter, 3-18
Order Number, 13-41
32–bit down counter, 3-19
Technical data, 13-43
8 DI NAMUR, 12-1
Terminal Assignment, 13-41
Parameters, 12-20, 12-21
Analog Electronic Module 4AO I HART, 13-45
Features, 13-45
A Order Number, 13-45
Accessories, A-1 Technical Data, 13-47
ACCU, Glossary-1 Terminal assignment, 13-46
Accumulated current, Glossary-1 Analog Electronic Modules, 13-1
Actions in run, 7-1 Analog electronic modules, 6-21
Actuators, 3-2 Analog value processing, Basics, 13-14
Address, 5-32 Analog Value Visualization, 13-1
Address space, 3-12 Analog value visualization, 13-2
Analog Input Modules, D-4 for resistive thermometers, 13-6, 13-7
Analog input modules with HART, D-5 for thermocouple, 13-8, 13-9, 13-10, 13-11,
Analog output module with HART, D-6 13-12
Analog Output Modules, D-4 Analog values S7, 13-2
Digital Input Module, D-1 Application, 2-1
Digital Output Module, D-3 Approval, Marine, 8-2
Address Space of Inputs, D-1 Assigning frequency counter parameters, 3-26
Address Space of Outputs, D-1 ATEX label, 8-2
Analog Electronic Module 4 AI I 2WIRE HART, Automation system, Glossary-1
13-31
Features, 13-31 B
Order Number, 13-31
Backplane bus, Glossary-1
Basic functions, 2-1
Burst pulses, 8-3
Analog Electronic Module 4 AI I 4WIRE HART,
Bus, Glossary-1
13-34
Bus cable, 1-6
Bus connector, 2-7, 5-21, Glossary-1
Features, 13-34
Bus terminating module, 1-6
Order Number, 13-34
Bus termination module, 4-6, 4-13, Glossary-1
Analog Electronic Module 4 AI RTD, 13-37
Features, 13-37
Order Number, 13-37

A5E00247483-02 Index-1
Index
C D
Cable glands, 4-3 Data exchange
Cascaded counting function, 3-19 acyclic, 6-3
CE certification, 8-1 cyclic, 6-2
Certification, CE, 8-1 DC 24 V supply, 5-2
Certifications, E-1 DC relays, 3-2
Changing parameter settings in RUN, 6-15 Default startup, 6-10
Procedure, 6-15 Definition, Electromagnetic compatibility, 8-3
channel, 13-56 Degree of contamination, 8-6
Channel–related diagnostics, 2-16 Degree of Protection IP 20, 4-5
Channel–specific diagnostics, 6-34 Degree of Protection IP 54, 4-4
Chassis ground, Glossary-1 Degree of protection IP30, 8-7
CiR, 3-34 Diagnostic interrupt, 6-25, 6-41
Procedure, 14-1 HART input modules, 6-44
Class of protection, 8-6 HART output modules, 6-44
Cleaning, 7-6 Input modules, 6-42, 6-43
Climatic ambient conditions, 8-5 Output modules, 6-43
Commissioning, 6-1 Diagnostic Message
Requirements, 6-9 of the electronic modules , 6-23
the ET 200iSP, 6-9 Digital Input Modules, 6-23
Compensation by means of resistive Digital Output Modules, 6-23
thermometer, 13-15 Diagnostics, 6-1, 6-3, Glossary-2
Compensation of the reference junction channel–specific, 6-3
temperature, 13-14 Expanded, H-status, 6-38
Conductor cross–sections, 5-16 ID–relevant, 6-3
Configuration changes in RUN, 3-34 in STEP 5, 6-21
Configuring, 6-2 Module status, 6-3
Features, 6-5, 6-6 Process alarm, 6-3
Function principle, 6-1 Diagnostics datagram, 2-14
in STEP 7, 6-5 Diagnostics using the process image, 6-16
Procedure, 6-5, 6-7 Dielectric strength test, 8-6
Requirements, 6-5, 6-6 Digital Electronic Module 4 DO, 12-11
with GSD file, 6-6 Block Diagram, 12-13
with SIMATIC PDM, 6-6 Features, 12-11
Configuring an IEEE tag, 13-58 Figure Output Curve, 12-16
Configuring counters, 3-20, 3-22 Order number, 12-11
Configuring frequency counters, 3-24 Technical Data, 12-14
Conversion Time Terminal assignment, 12-12
Analog input modules, C-2 Digital electronic module 4 DO
Analog output modules, C-4 Figure Output Curve, 12-17
Counting, 3-17 Parameters, 12-22
Current Consumption Calculation Table, 3-10 Digital Electronic Module 8 DI NAMUR, 12-1
Cycle time Block Diagram, 12-7
Analog input modules, C-3 Features, 12-1
Analog output modules, C-4 Order number, 12-1
Technical Data, 12-8
Terminal assignment, 12-2
Digital electronic modules, 6-20
Direct Data Exchange, 3-12
Distributed I/O devices, Fields of application,
1-1
Distributed I/O systems, Glossary-2
DP master, 3-12, Glossary-2
DP slave, 6-3, Glossary-2
DP standard, Glossary-2

Index-2 A5E00247483-02
Index
DP-master, 1-2, 1-8 G

DP-Slave, 1-2
General Technical Data, 8-1
DPV0 slave, 6-3
General wiring rules , 5-1
DPV1, Glossary-2
Ground conductor, 5-18
DPV1 slave, 6-3
Grounding, Glossary-3
Grounding busbar, 5-18
Grounding busbar PA, 5-26, Glossary-3
E Grounding connection, 5-21
Earth, Glossary-2 GSD file, Glossary-3
EC Declarations of Conformity, E-51
EC Prototype Test Certificates, E-1
Editing parameter settings in RUN H
Features, 6-15
H-status, 6-38
Requirements, 6-15
HART, 13-18, Glossary-4
Electrical arcs, 1-10
Advantages, 13-18
Electrical installation, 5-6
Applications, 13-18
Electromagnetic compatibility, 8-3
Communication, 3-2
Electronic module, 1-6, 2-8, 3-2, 4-16, 5-27
Data records, 13-27
Electrostatic discharge, 8-3
diagnostics, 13-58
EMC, 8-3
Field devices, 3-2
EMERGENCY-OFF -equipment, 5-1
Protocol, 13-18
Emission of RF interference, 8-4
Signal, 13-19
EN 60079–14, 3-8
System environment, 13-22
Enclosure, 1-4, 2-4, 4-5
Use in the ET 200iSP, 13-21
Equipment, 1-9
warning, 13-58
Equipotential bonding, Glossary-3
Hot swapping, 7-1, 7-3, Glossary-4
Equipotential bonding PA, 5-5
Error case, 2-14
Error LEDs
of IM 152, 6-17 I
on digital electronic modules, 6-20 I&M, 3-27, 12-25, 13-59
on the analog electronic modules, 6-21 ID–related Diagnostics, 6-32
ET 200, Glossary-3 ID–related diagnostics, 2-16
ET 200iSP, commissioning, 6-10 Identification Data, 3-27
ET 200iSP Distributed I/O station, Definition, Identification data, 1-8, 7-3, Glossary-4
1-3 reading and writing, 3-27
Ex equipment, 1-11 Identification functions, 12-25, 13-59
Example, 2-1 Identifier:, 1-11
IEC 60536, 8-6
IEC 61131, 8-2
F IEC 61784–1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 standard, 1-2
IEEE tag, 13-56
Fields of application, 2-2
assigning, 13-57
Firmware update, for IM 152, 7-7
configuring, 13-58
Flutter monitoring, 1-8, 12-24, Glossary-3
IEEE tags, 13-25
FREEZE, Glossary-3
Features, 13-25
Frequency counter, 3-23
IM 152 interface module, 6-17
Function check, 2-1, 7-6
Implementation of a GSD file into the
Function principle of counting, 3-18
engineering software , 5-3
Function principle of the frequency counters,
Incorrect Module Configuration, 6-50
3-24
Increased safety e, 1-10
Indicator lamps, 3-2
Input delay, C-2
Insertion interrupt, 6-26, 6-48
Installation, 2-4, 4-1

A5E00247483-02 Index-3
Index
Installation Dimensions, 4-2 Mounting position, 4-5

Installation rules, 2-1 Mounting rail, 1-4, 2-4, 2-5, 4-7, 4-8, 4-11, 5-18
Installing the bus termination module, 4-13
Installing the mounting rail, 4-7
Installing the Slot Cover, 4-13 N
Installing the Slot Number Labels, 4-16
NAMUR encoder, 3-2
Installing the Terminal Modules TM–IM/EM,
Node, Glossary-4
TM–EM/EM, 4-11
Non–isolated, Glossary-4
Interface, 2-7, 5-21, 5-24
Interface module, 1-6, 3-12, 5-19, 5-27
Interface Module IM 152, 11-1
Interface module IM 152, 4-6, 5-32 O
Block diagram, 11-2 OB82, 2-14
Description of the parameters, 11-5 Operational current consumption, 3-10
Example configuration for redundancy, 3-31 Order Numbers, A-1
exchanging, 7-5 Interface Module, A-1
Features, 11-1 Order numbers, A-1
Order number, 11-1 Accessories, A-3
Parameters, 11-4 Analog Electronic Modules, A-2
Startup, 6-12 Book, A-8
Technical data, 11-3 Digital Electronic Modules, A-2
Interrupts, 6-3, 6-25, 6-39, 6-40 Enclosure, A-4
Diagnostic interrupt, 6-3 Manuals, A-6
Insertion interrupt, 6-3 Network Components, A-5
Removal interrupt, 6-3 Power Supply, A-2
Time stamping, 6-3 Reserve Module, A-2
Update interrupt, 6-3 STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 Manuals, A-6
Intrinsic safety i, 1-10 Terminal Modules, A-1
Isolated, Glossary-4 Output Delay, C-2
Overall configuration, 5-4
Overvoltage protection, 5-7
L
Label, 1-7
Label sheet, 1-6 P
Labeling strip, 5-27 Parameter assignment, 6-2, Glossary-4
Layout:, 4-6 all modules, 6-8
Lightning protection, 5-7 Electronic module, 6-7
Interface module, 6-8
Procedure, 6-5, 6-7, 6-8
M Parameter description, 13-54
of the digital electronic modules, 12-22
Measuring range in S7-format, 13-4
Parameters
Mains, 5-2
Electronic module 8 DI NAMUR, 12-19
Maintenance, 7-1
of IM 152, 11-5
Maintenance in RUN, 7-6
of the analog electronic modules, 13-48
Marine, Approval, 8-2
of the digital electronic modules, 12-19
Mark for Australia, 8-2
PCS7, 1-12
Master, Glossary-4
PCS7–OS, Glossary-5
Maximum configuration, 3-12, 4-6
Periodic counting function, 3-19
Measured Value Resolution, 13-3
Power supply, 2-7, 3-4, 5-4, 5-18, 5-20, 9-2
Measuring range with SIMATIC S7, 13-2
Power Supply Module PS, 1-10
Mechanical ambient conditions, 8-5
Message functions, 12-25, 13-59
Minimum clearances, 4-6
Module Status, 6-33

Index-4 A5E00247483-02
Index
Power Supply PS, 1-5, 3-4, 4-8, 10-1 RIO-format, 6-16

Block diagram, 10-1 Risk of explosion, 1-9, 5-19, 7-2
Order number, 10-1 RS 485-IS Coupler, 1-6
Technical data, 10-2 RTD, Glossary-6
Powerbus, 1-7 Rules for Installation, 4-1, 4-6
Pressure–proof encapsulation, 1-10
Prewiring, Glossary-5
Process alarm, 6-26 S
Analog Input Modules, 6-47
Safe area, 3-7
Time stamping, 6-47
Segment, Glossary-6
Process control engineering, 1-12
Selection help, 3-2
Process control system, 1-12
Settling time, Analog output modules, C-4
Process image, Glossary-5
SFC13, 2-14
PROFIBUS, Glossary-5
Shipping conditions, 8-3
PROFIBUS address, Glossary-5
Shock, 8-6
PROFIBUS RS 485-IS, 1-1
SIMATIC PCS7, Glossary-6
PROFIBUS standard, 8-2
SIMATIC PDM, Glossary-6
PROFIBUS-DP, 1-1, 1-2
Sinusoidal disturbances, 8-4
Supported devices, 1-2
Slave, Glossary-6
PROFIBUS-DP-network, Layout:, 1-2
Slave diagnostics, Layout:, 6-27
Protective elements, 5-3
Slot number labels, 1-6, 4-16
Protective measures, 5-3
Smoothing, 13-54
Pulse stretching, 1-8, 12-23, Glossary-5
Software redundancy, 3-32
Pulse–shaped disturbances, 8-3
Solenoid valves, 3-2
Sparks, 1-10
Specific application, 5-1
R Standard counting function, 3-18
Rack, 2-5 Start information, 2-14
Rated voltage, 8-7 Startup
Reaction Times, C-1 for time stamping, 6-14
Reaction times for time synchronization, 6-14
of analog output modules, C-4 of ET 200iSP, 6-9, 6-11
of ET 200iSP, C-2 Status LEDs
on the DP master, C-1 of IM 152, 6-17
with analog input modules, C-2 on digital electronic modules, 6-20
with digital input modules, C-2 on the analog electronic modules, 6-21
with digital output modules, C-2 STL program, 2-13
Redundancy, with IM 152, 3-29, 3-31 Storage conditions, 8-3
Redundancy of power supply, 3-33 SYNC, Glossary-6
Reference junction, 13-16, 13-54
Reference junction number, 13-54
Reference potential, Glossary-5 T
Regulations for the prevention of accidents,
TC, Glossary-6
2-2
Technical data
Removal and insertion, 7-3
Climatic ambient conditions, 8-5
Remove interrupt, 6-26, 6-48
Electromagnetic compatibility, 8-3
Requirements, 2-1
Mechanical ambient conditions, 8-5
Reserve Module, 14-1
Shipping and storage conditions, 8-3
Order Number, 14-1
Temperature, 8-4
Reserve module
Terminal module, 1-5
Features, 14-1
Terminal module TM–PS, 4-1
Terminal Module TM-EM/EM 60C, Order
Terminal assignment, 14-1
number, 9-9
Response Time, Analog output modules, C-5

A5E00247483-02 Index-5
Index
Terminal Module TM-EM/EM 60S, Order Type of protection, 1-10

number, 9-9 Types of protection, 1-9
Terminal Module TM-IM/EM
Block diagram, 9-6
Features, 9-4, 9-9 U
Technical data, 9-6
Ungrounded installation, 5-4
Terminal assignment, 9-5, 9-9
Update interrupt, 6-26, 6-49
Terminal module TM-IM/EM
User data, 6-2
Block diagram, 9-10
User program, in STEP 7, 6-22
Terminal Module TM-IM/EM 60C, Order
number, 9-4
Terminal Module TM-IM/EM 60S, Order V
number, 9-4 Value status, Glossary-7
Terminal module TM-IM/IM, 9-7 Assignment of inputs in the PII, 6-16
Block diagram, 9-8 Evaluation in PCS 7, 6-16
Order number, 9-7 of analog input modules, 6-16
Pinout, 9-7 of digital input modules, 6-16
Properties, 9-7 Vendor ID, IM 152, 6-30
Technical data, 9-8 Vibrations, 8-6
Terminal module TM-IM-EM, 4-6
Terminal Module TM-PS-A, installing, 4-8, 4-9
Terminal module TM-PS-A, 4-6, 4-8 W
Terminal Modules, 3-3, 4-8, 4-11, 5-16, 9-1
Width, 3-12
Overview of Contents, 9-1
WinCC, Glossary-7
Terminal modules TM-IM-EM, 4-6
Wiring, 5-1
Terminal Modules TM-PS-A and TM-PS-B, 9-2
permanent, Glossary-5
Block diagram, 9-3
Wiring rules, 5-15
Order No., 9-2
Wiring the ET 200iSP, 5-15
Pinout, 9-2
Properties, 9-2
removing, 4-10
Technical Data, 9-3 Y
Terminal modules TM-PS-B, installing, 4-10 Year of Production, 3-36
Terminal- and Electronic Modules, 1-3
Test voltage, 8-6
The Lightning Protection Zone concept, 5-8 Z
Thermocouples:, connecting, 13-14
Zone 1, 3-5, 4-2
Time stamp, Glossary-7
Zone 2, 3-6, 4-4
Time stamping, 1-8, 12-22, Glossary-7
Zone 21, 3-6, 4-3
Time synchronization, Glossary-7
Zone 22, 3-7, 4-5
Transmission rate, Glossary-7
Zones, 1-9, 3-4

Index-6 A5E00247483-02

SIMATIC Distributed I/O Device ET 200iSP

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIMATIC Distributed I/O Device ET 200iSP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface, Contents

Purpose of this manual

Basic knowledge required

Table 1-1 Qualified Personnel

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

Scope of the manual

Identification for Australia (C tick mark)

Where this documentation fits in

Guide to the manual

Recycling and disposal

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

Service & Support on the Internet

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

1 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

6.7.8 Manufacturer’s ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

12 Digital Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

14 Reserve Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

5-15 Removing Interface and Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

13-1 Compensation by 4 AI RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

7-1 Permitted actions / tasks in the potentially explosive areas . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

13-28 Response of the Analog Modules, Depending on the Location of the

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

Distributed I/O stations – Fields of Application

What is PROFIBUS DP?

What is PROFIBUS RS 485-IS

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

What are DP-masters and DP-slaves?

Which devices can be connected to the PROFIBUS-DP?

Structure of a PROFIBUS DP network

S7-400 ET 200M PG/PC

Potentially explosive area: Zone 1 Potentially explosive area: Zone 2

Figure 1-1 Typical PROFIBUS DP network structure

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

1.2 What is the ET 200iSP Distributed I/O Station?

Certification ET 200iSP Station* Inputs and outputs

Terminal and Electronic Modules

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

Figure 1-2 View of the ET 200iSP Distributed I/O Station

Table 1-1 ET 200iSP Components

Component Function View

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

Table 1-1 ET 200iSP Components, continued

Component Function View

Power Supply PS ...is plugged into terminal module

Distributed I/O device ET 200iSP

Table 1-1 ET 200iSP Components, continued

Component Function View

Electronic module ...is plugged onto the terminal

RS 485-IS coupler ...couples PROFIBUS DP to

Label sheet (DIN ...for machine labeling or printing